Copyright: ADSM For NT (Beta 6/1/96)


Table of Contents
Table of Contents:

Index

ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) - Help

ADSM Trademarks - Help

Customer Support - Help

Print to File - Help

Print to File - Help

Delete - Help

Expanding Icon Objects - Help

Using Help - Help

Product Information - Help

Keys Help - Help

AIX Keys Help - Help

OS/2 Keys Help - Help

SUN Keys Help - Help

HP Keys Help - Help

Windows Keys Help - Help

Administrators Include - Help

Administrators Details - Help

Administrator Add - Help

Administrator Add Using - Help

Administrator Properties - Help

Administrator Rename - Help

Administrators Delete - Help

Administrators Export - Help

Administrators Import - Help

Administrators Tasks - Help

ADSM Administration Logon - Help

Change Password - Help

Database Volumes Details - Help

Database Properties - Help

Database Volume Properties - Help

Database Add Volume - Help

Database Add Mirrored Volume - Help

Database Extend - Help

Database Reduce - Help

Recovery Log Volumes Details - Help

Recovery Log Volume Properties - Help

Recovery Log Add Volume - Help

Recovery Log Extend - Help

Recovery Log Reduce - Help

Database - Dump - Help

Database Properties - Help

Database Backup - Help

Recovery Log Properties - Help

Recovery Log Properties - Help

Database Tasks - Help

Nodes Include - Help

Nodes Details - Help

Node Properties - Help

Node Add - Help

Node Add Using - Help

Node Rename - Help

Nodes Export - Help

Nodes Import - Help

Nodes Storage Usage - Help

Nodes Tasks - Help

Policy Domain Details - Help

Policy Domain Properties - Help

Policy Domain Add - Help

Policy Sets Details - Help

Policy Set Properties - Help

Add Policy Set - Help

Management Class Details - Help

Add Management Class - Help

Include Management Classes - Help

Include Policy Sets - Help

Backup Copy Group Details - Help

Standard Backup Copy Group Properties - Help

Backup Copy Group Add - Help

Standard Archive Copy Group Properties - Help

Archive Copy Group Add - Help

Policy Sets Activate - Help

Policy Set Validate - Help

Activate Results - Help

Policy Domains Include - Help

Policy Domain Add Using - Help

Add Using Policy Set - Help

Add Using Management Class - Help

Validate Results - Help

Policy Import - Help

Policy Export - Help

Management Class Properties - Help

Management Class Add - Help

Management Class - Add Using - Help

Archive Copy Groups Details - Help

Add Using Backup Copy Group - Help

Archive Copy Group Properties - Help

Add Using Archive Copy Group - Help

Backup Copy Groups Include - Help

Archive Copy Groups Include - Help

Sessions Details - Help

Process Details - Help

Activity Log Details - Help

Sessions Include - Help

Processes Include - Help

Activity Log Include - Help

Cancel - Help

Server Export - Help

Server Import - Help

Server Properties - Help

Device Configuration Backup - Help

Volume History Details - Help

Volume History Backup - Help

Volume History Include - Help

Volume History Delete - Help

Server Properties - Help

Storage Pool Details - Help

Primary Storage Pool Add - Help

Storage Pool Properties - Help

Storage Pool Properties - Help

Storage Pools Include - Help

Random Access Volumes Details - Help

Storage Pool Volumes Details - Help

Add Volume - Help

Random Access Volume Properties - Help

Sequential Access Volume Properties - Help

Include Volumes - Help

Move Data Volumes - Help

List Volume Content to File - Help

Audit Volumes - Help

Copy Storage Pool Add - Help

Storage Pool Properties - Help

Copy Storage Pool Volumes Properties - Help

Backup - Help

Restore - Help

Restore - Help

Central Scheduler Properties - Help

Backup/Archive Events Details - Help

Backup/Archive Events Include - Help

Backup/Archive Schedules Details - Help

Backup/Archive Schedule Add - Help

Backup/Archive Schedule Properties - Help

Schedules Include - Help

Schedule Copy - Help

Backup/Archive Event Properties - Help

Schedules Add Node Associations - Help

Administrative Command Events Details - Help

Administrative Command Events Include - Help

Administrative Command Schedules Details - Help

Administrative Command Schedule Add - Help

Administrative Command Schedule Properties - Help

Schedules Include - Help

Administrative Command Event Properties - Help

Backup/Archive Events Delete - Help

Administrative Command Events Delete - Help

Schedule Copy - Help

File Spaces Details - Help

File Spaces Include - Help

File Spaces Delete - Help

File Space Rename - Help


Index
Index:

About ADSM menu choice

Activate menu choice

Activate Results window

activate, definition

activating a policy set

active policy set, definition

Activity Log Details view

Activity Log entry

Activity Log Include window

Activity Log object

activity log tasks

activity log, definition

Add Copy Storage Pool menu choice

Add Management Class window

Add menu choice

Add Policy Set window

Add Primary Storage Pool menu choice

Add Using Archive Copy Group view

Add Using Backup Copy Group view

Add Using Management Class window

Add Using Policy Set window

Add Volume window

adding a copy storage pool

adding a primary storage pool

adding a storage pool volume

adding a volume to the database

adding a volume to the recovery log

adding mirrored volumes to a group of mirrored database volumes

adding mirrored volumes to a group of mirrored recovery log volumes

adding mirrored volumes to the database

adding mirrored volumes to the recovery log

adding new administrators

adding new nodes

adding policy domains

adding policy sets

Administrative Command Event object

Administrative Command Event Properties view

administrative command event, definition

Administrative Command Events Delete window

Administrative Command Events Details view

Administrative Command Events Include window

Administrative Command Events object

Administrative Command Schedule Add view

Administrative Command Schedule object

Administrative Command Schedule Properties view

administrative command schedule, definition

administrative command scheduler tasks

Administrative Command Schedules Details view

Administrative Command Schedules Include window

Administrative Command Schedules object

Administrator Add Using view

Administrator Add view

administrator definitions, definition

Administrator object

Administrator Properties view

Administrator Rename window

Administrator Tasks

administrator, definition

Administrators Delete window

Administrators Details view

Administrators Export window

Administrators Import window

Administrators object

ADSM Administration Logon window

ADSM Administration Tasks

ADSM Trademarks

ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window

AIX Volume Names

All backup, archive, and migrated file data radio button

Archive Copy Group Add view

Archive Copy Group Icon object

Archive Copy Group object

Archive Copy Group Properties view

Archive Copy Group Tasks

archive copy group, definition

Archive Copy Groups Details view

Archive Copy Groups Include window

Archive Copy Groups object

Archive menu choice

archive, definition

Arrange Icons menu choice

Assign Default menu choice

assigning a default management class

association, definition

Audit License Terms menu choice, mvs as400 vse

Audit menu choice

Audit Volumes window

auditing license terms

auditing storage pool volumes

automatic backup, database

background process, definition

backing up a storage pool

backing up device configuration

backing up the database automatically

backing up the database

backing up volume history information

Backup Copy Group Add properties

Backup Copy Group Details view

Backup Copy Group object, icons view

Backup Copy Group object

Backup Copy Group Tasks

backup copy group, definition

Backup Copy Groups Include window

Backup Copy Groups object

Backup Device Configuration menu choice

Backup menu choice, backup copy group

Backup menu choice, database

Backup menu choice, storage pools selected menu

Backup menu choice, volume history

Backup Trigger tab

Backup window

backup, definition

Backup/Archive Event object

Backup/Archive Event Properties view

backup/archive event, definition

Backup/Archive Events Delete window

Backup/Archive Events Details view

Backup/Archive Events Include window

Backup/Archive Events object

Backup/Archive Schedule Add view

Backup/Archive Schedule object

Backup/Archive Schedule Properties view

backup/archive schedule, definition

backup/archive scheduler tasks

Backup/Archive Schedules Details view

Backup/Archive Schedules Include window

Backup/Archive Schedules object

caching, definition

Cancel All Sessions menu choice, Sessions object

Cancel Process menu choice

Cancel Session menu choice

Cancel window

canceling all client sessions

canceling selected client sessions

canceling selected processes

capacity, definition

Cascade menu choice

Central Scheduler object

central scheduler properties tasks

Central Scheduler Properties view

Central Scheduler Tasks

Change Password window

client session, definition

Close menu choice

collocation, definition

copy group, definition

copy mode, definition

Copy Schedule menu choice

copy serialization, definition

Copy Storage Pool Add view

Copy Storage Pool Volumes Properties view

copy storage pool, definition

copying a backup copy group

copying a backup/archive schedule

copying a storage pool volume

copying a storage pool

copying administrators

copying an administrative command schedule

copying an archive copy group

copying management classes

copying nodes

copying policy domains

copying policy sets

copying volume content to a file

Cumulative consumption

customer support

Database - Dump window

Database Add Mirrored Volume window

Database Add Volume menu choice

Database Add Volume window

Database Backup window

Database Delete All Selected Volumes menu choice

Database Delete menu choice

Database Delete Volume 1 menu choice

Database Delete Volume 2 menu choice

Database Delete Volume 3 menu choice

Database Extend menu choice

Database Extend window

Database object

Database Properties view (with Database Backup)

Database Properties view

Database Recovery Log object

Database Reduce menu choice

Database Reduce window

Database Tasks

Database Volume properties view

Database Volumes Details view

Database Volumes object, individual

Database Volumes object

database, definition

decreasing the size of the database

decreasing the size of the recovery log

defining a backup/archive schedule

defining a storage pool volume

defining an administrative command schedule

defining archive copy groups

defining backup copy groups

defining central scheduler properties

defining management classes

defining node associations

defining policy domains

defining policy sets

Delete menu choice

Delete Past Events menu choice

Delete window

deleting a backup/archive schedule

deleting a storage pool

deleting administrative command events

deleting administrators

deleting an administrative command schedule

deleting archive copy groups

deleting backup copy groups

deleting backup/archive events

deleting database volumes

deleting file spaces

deleting management classes

deleting mirrored volumes and groups of mirrored database volumes

deleting mirrored volumes and groups of mirrored recovery log volumes

deleting node associations

deleting nodes

deleting policy domains

deleting policy sets

deleting recovery log volumes

deleting storage pool volumes

deleting volume history information

Deselect All menu choice

details view

device class, definition

Device Configuration Backup window

device configuration, definition

Disable menu choice

disabling the server

DISK Volume object

Dump menu choice

Edit menu choice

Enable menu choice

enabling the server

event, definition

Exit menu choice

Expanding Icon Objects

Export menu choice, administrator

Export menu choice, node

Export menu choice, policy

Export menu choice, selected policy

Export menu choice, server

export, definition

exporting administrators

exporting nodes

exporting policy domains

exporting server

extending the database

extending the recovery log

File menu

File Space object

File Space Rename window

file space, definition

File Spaces Delete window

File Spaces Details view

File Spaces Include window

File Spaces object

file spaces tasks

full backup, definition

General Help menu choice

glossary

group of mirrored volumes, definition

Halt menu choice

halting the server

Help menu bar choice

Help Topics menu

icons view

Import menu choice, administrator

Import menu choice, nodes

Import menu choice, policy

Import menu choice, server

import, definition

importing administrators

importing nodes

importing policy domains

importing server

Include Management Classes window

Include menu choice, server

Include menu choice

Include Policy Sets window

Include Volumes window

Include window, administrators

Include window, nodes

increasing the size of the database

increasing the size of the recovery log

incremental backup, definition

Keys Help

List Volume Content to File menu choice

List Volume Content to File window

listing volume content to a file

Log pool pages

Log pool utilization

Log pool wait

Management Class Add Using view

Management Class Add view

Management Class Details view

Management Class object

Management Class Properties view, policy

Management Class Tasks

management class, definition

Management Classes object

migration, definition

mirrored volume, definition

monitoring processes

Move Data menu choice

Move Data Volumes window

moving data from storage pool volumes

multiple selection, definition

MVS Volume Names

Node Add Using view

Node Add view

node definitions, definition

Node object

Node properties view

Node Rename window

Node Tasks

node, definition

Nodes Details view

Nodes Export view

Nodes Import view

Nodes object

Nodes Storage Usage view

notebooks, using

Open as Properties menu choice

Open menu

OS/2 Volume Names

page, definition

policy definition, definition

Policy Domain Add Using window

Policy Domain Add window

Policy Domain Details view

Policy Domain drop-down list box

Policy Domain object

Policy Domain Properties view

Policy Domain Tasks

policy domain, definition

Policy Domains Include window

Policy Domains object

Policy Export window

Policy Import window

Policy set drop-down list box

Policy Set object

Policy Set Properties view

Policy Set Tasks

Policy Set Validate window

policy set, definition

Policy Sets Activate window

Policy Sets Details view

Policy Sets object

Policy Tasks

Primary Storage Pool Add view

primary storage pool, definition

Print to File Details Object menu choice

Print to File Details window

Print to File Properties window

printing a database volume properties

printing a group of mirrored database volumes information

printing a group of mirrored recovery log volumes information

printing a recovery log volume properties

printing administrative command event properties

printing administrative command events information

printing administrative command schedule information

printing administrative command schedule properties

printing administrator information

printing administrator properties

printing all activity log objects

printing all administrative command events

printing all administrative command schedules

printing all administrators

printing all archive copy group information

printing all backup copy groups

printing all backup/archive events

printing all backup/archive schedules

printing all client sessions

printing all database volumes in a details view

printing all database volumes

printing all file spaces

printing all management classes

printing all nodes

printing all policy domains

printing all policy sets

printing all processes

printing all recovery log volumes in a details view

printing all recovery log volumes

printing all storage pool volumes

printing all storage pools

printing all volume histories

printing an archive copy group properties view

printing archive copy group information

printing backup copy group information

printing backup copy group properties

printing backup/archive event properties

printing backup/archive events information

printing backup/archive schedule information

printing backup/archive schedule properties

printing central scheduler properties

printing database information

printing database volume information

printing file space information

printing management class information

printing management class properties

printing node associations

printing node information

printing node properties

printing policy domain information

printing policy domains properties

printing policy set information

printing policy sets properties

printing recovery log information

printing recovery log volume information

printing selected activity log objects

printing selected administrative command events

printing selected administrative command schedules

printing selected administrators

printing selected archive copy group information

printing selected backup copy groups

printing selected backup/archive events

printing selected backup/archive schedules

printing selected client sessions

printing selected database volumes in a details view

printing selected database volumes

printing selected file spaces

printing selected management classes

printing selected nodes

printing selected policy domains

printing selected policy sets

printing selected processes

printing selected recovery log volumes in a details view

printing selected recovery log volumes

printing selected storage pool volumes

printing selected storage pools

printing selected volume histories

printing server properties

printing storage pool information

printing storage pool properties view

printing storage pool volume information

printing storage pool volume properties view

printing storage usage information for all nodes

printing storage usage information for selected nodes

printing storage usage information

printing the database properties view

printing the details view of all database volumes

printing the details view of all groups of mirrored database volumes

printing the details view of all groups of mirrored recovery log volumes

printing the details view of all recovery log volumes

printing the details view of selected database volumes

printing the details view of selected groups of mirrored database volumes

printing the details view of selected groups of mirrored recovery log volumes

printing the details view of selected recovery log volumes

printing the properties of a database volume

printing the properties of a group of mirrored database volumes

printing the properties of a group of mirrored recovery log volumes

printing the properties of a recovery log volume

printing the properties of the database

printing the properties of the recovery log

printing the recovery log properties view

privilege class, definition

Process Details view

Process object

Processes Include window

Processes object

processes tasks

Product Information menu choice

Product Information window

properties view

querying administrator information

querying archive copy groups

querying backup copy groups

querying client sessions

querying database information

querying database volumes

querying management class information

querying node information

querying policy domains

querying policy sets

querying processes

querying recovery log information

querying recovery log volumes

querying server information

querying storage pool information

querying storage pool volume content

querying the activity log

querying the database

querying the recovery log

random access media, definition

Random Access Volume object

Random Access Volume Properties window

Random Access Volumes Details view

randomization, definition

reclamation, definition

Recovery Log Add Mirrored Volume menu choice

Recovery Log Add Volume menu choice

Recovery Log Add Volume window

Recovery Log Delete All Selected Volumes menu choice

Recovery Log Delete menu choice

Recovery Log Delete Volume 1 menu choice

Recovery Log Delete Volume 2 menu choice

Recovery Log Delete Volume 3 menu choice

Recovery Log Extend menu choice

Recovery Log Extend window

Recovery Log Properties view

Recovery Log Properties window (with Database Backup)

Recovery Log Reduce menu choice

Recovery Log Reduce window

Recovery Log Tasks

Recovery Log Volume properties view

Recovery Log Volumes Details view

Recovery Log Volumes object (individual)

Recovery Log Volumes object

recovery log, definition

reducing the database

reducing the recovery log

Refresh Now menu choice

register, definition

registering new administrators

registering new nodes

registration, definition

removing administrators

removing nodes

removing policy domains

Rename menu choice

renaming a node

renaming an administrator

renaming file spaces

Restore menu choice, storage pools selected menu

Restore menu choice, storage pools

Restore window, storage pool volumes

Restore window, storage pools

restoring a storage pool volume

restoring a storage pool

Schedule Copy window, administrative command

Schedule Copy window, backup/archive

schedule, definition

Schedules Add Node Associations view

Select All menu choice

sequential access media, definition

Sequential Access Volume object

Sequential Access Volume Properties view

Sequential Access Volumes Details view

Sequential Volume History object

sequential volume history tasks

Server Export view

Server Import view

server object tasks

Server object

Server Properties view, licensed servers

Server Properties view, non-licensed servers

Server Tasks

Session object

Sessions Details view

Sessions Include window

Sessions object

sessions tasks

setting caching On or Off for random access media

setting collocation On or Off for sequential access media

setting migration thresholds for a storage pool

Show Storage Usage menu choice, nodes

Sort by menu choice

Standard Archive Copy Group Properties view

Standard Backup Copy Group Properties view

startup window, definition

Status Bar menu choice

Storage Pool Details view

Storage Pool object

Storage Pool Properties view

Storage Pool Properties, Random Access Media view

Storage Pool Properties, Sequential Access Media view

Storage Pool Tasks

Storage Pool Volume Tasks

storage pool volume, definition

Storage Pool Volumes object

storage pool, definition

Storage Pools Include window

Storage Pools object

Storage Pools Tasks

support, technical

Task Help menu choice

technical support

Tile menu choice

updating a backup/archive schedule

updating a storage pool volume

updating a storage pool

updating administrator properties

updating an administrative command schedule

updating archive copy groups

updating backup copy groups

updating central scheduler properties

updating management classes

updating node properties

updating policy domains

updating policy sets

updating server properties

updating the access mode for a storage pool volume

Using Help menu choice

Using Help window

utilization, definition

Validate menu choice

Validate Results window

validate, definition

validating a policy set

Vary Offline Volume menu choice

Vary Online Volume menu choice

Vary Volume menu choice

varying database volumes online and offline

varying mirrored database volumes online and offline

varying mirrored recovery log volumes online or offline

varying random access storage pool volumes

varying recovery log volumes online or offline

View Books menu choice

View menu bar choice

view, definition

viewing a backup/archive schedule

viewing administrative command events

viewing administrator information

viewing an administrative command schedule

viewing archive copy groups

viewing backup copy groups

viewing backup/archive events

viewing central scheduler information

viewing client sessions

viewing database information

viewing database volumes

viewing file spaces information

viewing groups of mirrored database volumes

viewing groups of mirrored recovery log volumes

viewing management class information

viewing node associations

viewing node information

viewing policy domains

viewing policy sets

viewing processes

viewing recovery log information

viewing recovery log volumes

viewing server information

viewing storage pool information

viewing storage pool volume information

viewing storage usage information for all nodes

viewing storage usage information for selected nodes

viewing storage usage information

viewing the activity log

viewing the database properties view

viewing the details of database volumes

viewing the details of recovery log volumes

viewing the properties of the database

viewing the properties of the recovery log

viewing the recovery log properties view

viewing volume history information

VM Volume Names

volume access list box

Volume History Backup window

Volume History Delete window

Volume History Details view

Volume History Include window

Volume History object

volume history, definition

volume set, definition

volume status list box

Windows Keys Help window

Windows Volume Names


ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) - Help

This window displays the ADSM primary objects as icons. Use this window to select the ADSM object you want to work.

 With the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface you can perform most of your ADSM administrative tasks. Your privilege class determines what ADSM tasks you can perform and which objects you will work with most frequently:

Analyst

Will perform tasks in the Server object to monitor server processes.

Operator

Will perform tasks in the Server object to control the operation of the server.

Policy

Will perform tasks in the Policy, Nodes, and Central Scheduler objects to define and assign policy management, register nodes, and schedule backups and archives for nodes.

Storage

Will perform tasks in the Storage Pools and Database and Recovery Log objects to control the allocation and use of storage resources for the server.

System

Will perform tasks in all objects.  The system administrator can perform any server task.

No Privilege Assigned

Will perform only viewing and printing functions in any object.

 Related Information

•  Administrator Tasks

•  Central Scheduler Tasks

•  Database Tasks

•  Database Recovery Log Tasks

•  File Spaces Tasks

•  Node Tasks

•  Policy Domains Tasks

•  Server Tasks

•  Storage Pools Tasks

 Help for Objects

•  Administrators

•  Central Scheduler

•  Database

•  Database Recovery Log

•  File Spaces

•  Nodes

•  Policy Domains

•  Server

•  Storage Pools

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Help Not Available - Help

   Help is not yet available.


ADSM Administration Tasks - Help

Select one of the following items to see a list of tasks:

•   Administrators

•   Central Scheduler

•   Database

•   Database Recovery Log

•   File Spaces

•   Nodes

•   Policy Domains

•   Server

•   Storage Pools

 You can see a complete list of tasks for all objects in the help index.


ADSM Trademarks - Help

The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:

 ADSTAR

 AIX

 AS/400

 IBM

 MVS

 MVS/ESA

 Operating System/2

 OS/2

 OS/400

 PS/2

 RISC System/6000

 VM/ESA

 VM/XA

 VSE

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

HP 	Hewlett-Packard, Inc.

HP 	Hewlett Packard, Corp.

Solaris 	Sun Microsystems, Inc.

SPARC 	Sun Microsystems, Inc.

Sun 	Sun Microsystems, Inc.

SunOS 	Sun Microsystems, Inc.

Sun-3 	Sun Microsystems, Inc.

Sun-4 	Sun Microsystems, Inc.

UNIX 	X/Open Company Limited

Windows 	Microsoft Corporation

Windows NT 	Microsoft Corporation

Windows 95 	Microsoft Corporation


Customer Support - Help

Free Technical Telephone Support

 Customers purchasing ADSM within the U.S.A. will receive 60-days of free technical telephone assistance to help with installing, configuring, and using ADSM.

 The 60-day period begins with your first call to the IBM Support Center.  When you call, please request assistance for ADSM. To obtain your free support, call the following number:

IBM Support Center

1-800-237-5511

Monday to Friday, 8 a.m. - 5 p.m.

(excluding national holidays)

Outside the U.S. and Puerto Rico, contact your local IBM representative.


Print to File - Help

Select Print to File from the File menu to copy to a file all the information contained in the view for a selected object that appears in the window. You can send this file to a printer or use the file as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

Note:   If the file does not exist, it will be created. If the file already exists, it will be replaced unless the Append check box is selected. Append adds data to the end of the file.


Add - Help

Select Add to create a new object. Use the Add window to enter information about the new object.


Refresh Now - Help

Select Refresh Now to update the current view with information from the ADSM server.

 Use Refresh Now when changes have been made that affect the object that you are working with. You will also use Refresh Now to effectively monitor information that is dynamic, such as the status of a background process or the status of a volume.


Print to File - Help

Use this window to copy all the information in the properties view to a file for printing. Specify the workstation file name according to the rules for the operating system on your workstation.

 To copy information to a file:

1. Enter the name of the file you want the information sent to in the File Name field.

2. Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. The Append check box is in a selected state as a default.

3. Select the Print to File push button to copy the information to the specified file.

Note:   If the file does not exist, it will be created. If the file already exists, it will be replaced unless the Append check box is selected. Append adds data to the end of the file.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


File Name - Help

 Type the name of a valid file in the File Name field. Use the standard file naming convention for your workstation.

 This field must be filled in.

 Default:  dsmprint.txt

 Example:

     AIX - /home/bill/print

     OS/2, Windows - D:\PRINT.FIL

 Considerations:

• The File Name may include a path designation.


Append - Help

 Select Append to add the information to the end of the specified file.


Print to File - Help

 Select Print to File to copy to the file you have specified, the properties or details information you have selected.


Apply - Help

 Select Apply to submit changes to the ADSM server without removing the window in which the changes were made.

 To remove the window, select the System menu, and then select Close from the menu list.


Print to File - Help

 Select Print to File to copy to a file the contents of the Properties view. You can send this file to a printer or use the file as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

Note:   If the file does not exist, it will be created. If the file already exists, it will be replaced unless the Append check box is selected. Append adds data to the end of the file.


Open as Properties - Help

Select Open as Properties to open a properties view in which you can view or change characteristics of the selected object.

 This choice is available when objects have been selected.

 If multiple objects are selected, multiple windows are opened.


Reset - Help

 Select Reset to discard changes made to the object window. Fields on the window will be reset to reflect the last update made with the Apply push button.


Rename - Help

 Select Rename to change the name of the selected object.


Rename - Help

Select Rename to change the name of the objects you have selected.

 This choice is available when objects have been selected.

 If multiple objects are selected, multiple windows are opened.


Arrange Icons - Help

Select Arrange Icons to organize the icons in the window.


All Objects - Help

 Select All Objects to copy to a file all the objects in the Details view.

 Default:  All Objects


Selected Objects - Help

 Select Selected Objects to copy to a file selected objects in the Details view.

 Default:  Selected Objects


Print to File - Help

Use this window to copy the details view of all or selected objects to a file for printing. Specify the workstation file name according to the rules for the operating system on your workstation.

 To copy information to a file:

1. Select either Selected Objects or All Objects.

2. Enter the name of the file you want the information sent to in the File Name field.

3. Select Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. The Append check box is in a selected state as a default.

4. Select the Print to File push button to copy the information to the specified file.

Note:   If the file does not exist, it will be created. If the file already exists, it will be replaced unless the Append check box is selected. Append adds data to the end of the file.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Delete - Help

Use this window to confirm the objects you have selected to delete. All the objects in the list are in a "selected" state. You can de-select from the list the objects you do not want to delete.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To delete selected objects:

1.  Verify that you want to delete all the selected objects displayed in the scrollable list box.

2. Select the Delete push button to delete all objects that are still selected. Select the Cancel push button if you want to cancel the delete action.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Objects to be Deleted - Help

 The Objects to be Deleted list box displays objects you have selected to be deleted. The objects in the list are in a selected state when the list displays. You can de-select an item if you do not want it deleted.


Edit - Help

Use the Edit menu to create new objects and to delete selected objects.

 Add choices are always available. Other choices are available only if objects have been selected.


View - Help

Use the View menu to select how you want objects displayed in a window.


Include - Help

Select Include to specify the filter criteria for the objects you want to display in the current view.

 Use the wildcard character convention for your ADSM server to display all or a selected group of objects.

• To match on zero or more characters, use * to filter.

• To match exactly on one character, use ? to filter.


Open as Properties - Help

 Select Open as Properties to open a properties view in which you can view characteristics of the selected object.

 This choice is available when objects have been selected.

 If multiple objects are selected, multiple windows are opened.


Apply - Help

 Select Apply to filter the view based on the criteria you specify. When Apply is selected, the view is filtered without removing the include window in which the criteria was specified.

 To filter the view and remove the include window, select Include.


Help - Help

Use the Help menu to display:

• A table of contents of ADSM help topics

• General information about the active window

• General information about the help facility

• Task information for the object represented in the window

• ADSM copyright, version and release information


Task Help - Help

Select Task Help to display a selection list of tasks for this object. Task help is displayed in split window format. When the task selection list appears in the left half of the window, select the task you want to perform. A list of steps for the selected task will then appear in the right half of the window. Some tasks, such as Printing and Viewing, will present an additional task selection list from which to select.


General Help - Help

Select General Help to display information about the active window.


Using Help - Help

Select Using Help to display information about how to access and use the help facility for ADSM.


Product Information - Help

Select Product Information to display the copyright, version and release information for ADSM.


File - Help

Use the File menu to perform actions on the objects in the current view. You can also use the File menu to close and exit a view.


Select All - Help

Select Select All to select all items in the list.


Deselect All - Help

Select Deselect All to deselect all items in a list.


Exit - Help

Select Exit to close the object on which you are working and return to the previous object.  If you are in the ADSM component tree view, Exit will leave the ADSM Storage Administration client.


Status Bar - Help

Select Status Bar to toggle between displaying and removing the status bar at the bottom of the display window.  The status bar menu item will show a check mark if the display is enabled.

 The Status Bar displays a short description of a highlighted field. To toggle between the settings, select the Status Bar menu item.


Open - Help

Use the Open menu to open the selected ADSM Storage Administration client container to either a details or properties view. You can also open a container by selecting and double-clicking on the container icon.


Cascade - Help

Select Cascade to arrange the open ADSM windows in an overlapping pattern so that the title bar of each window is visible.


Tile - Help

Select Tile to arrange the open ADSM Storage Administration client windows side by side so that all windows are visible.


Help Topics - Help

Use the Help Topics menu to start the ADSM Storage Administration online help facility and display the table of contents.


Close - Help

Select Close to remove the selected window.


Format Print - Help

 Select Format Print to specify that you want your output file formatted automatically by ADSM.

 Default:  On

 Initial Setting:  On


Print with Delimiter - Help

 Select Print with Delimiter to specify that you want to specify your own field delimiter to be used in your output file.

 Specifying this option enables the Select a Delimiter for Print option selection.

 Default:  Off

 Initial Setting:  Off


Space - Help

 Select Space to specify that the field delimiter for your output file is a space.

 This field can be specified only if Print with Delimiter is checked.

 Default:  On

 Initial Setting:  On


Tab - Help

 Select Tab to specify that the field delimiter for your output file is a tab.

 This field can be specified only if Print with Delimiter is checked.

 Default:  Off

 Initial Setting:  Off


New Line - Help

 Select New Line to specify that the field delimiter for your output file is a new line.

 This field can be specified only if Print with Delimiter is checked.

 Default:  Off

 Initial Setting:  Off


Comma - Help

 Select Comma to specify that the field delimiter for your output file is a comma.

 This field can be specified only if Print with Delimiter is checked.

 Default:  Off

 Initial Setting:  Off


Semicolon - Help

 Select Semicolon to specify that the field delimiter for your output file is a semicolon.

 This field can be specified only if Print with Delimiter is checked.

 Default:  Off

 Initial Setting:  Off


Other - Help

 Select Other to specify that the field delimiter for your output file will be the value in the Other description field.

 This field can be specified only if Print with Delimiter is checked.

 Default:  Off

 Initial Setting:  Off


Other - Help

 Type the output field delimiter for your output print file in the Other field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Other field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any character

 Default:  none

 Example:  --

 Considerations:

• This field can only be specified if Print with Delimiter and Other are specified.


About ADSM - Help

Select About ADSM to display the copyright, version and release information for ADSM.


Cancel - Help

 Select Cancel to close the window without making changes.


Help - Help

 Select Help to display general help for the current window.


OK - Help

 Select OK to continue or to return to the previous window after acknowledging information.


Expanding Icon Objects - Help

In the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window, you can expand or collapse objects that have related objects.

 An object with a plus sign (+) next to it indicates that the object has related objects.  Select the plus sign next to the object you want to expand.  For example:

 An object with a minus sign (-) next to it indicates that all related objects are in view.  Select the minus sign next to the object you want to collapse.  For example:

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Using Help - Help

For ADSM you can view the following help information:

• Help Topics - A table of contents for the entire ADSM Storage Administrator help system - by selecting the Help Topics choice from the Help menu pull down.  You can select ADSM Storage Administrator task descriptions and glossary definitions.

• General help - for the active window - by selecting General help from the Help menu. Output field help is also provided on this window.

• Task help - application specific task information - by selecting the Task Help choice from the Help menu pull down or from the General help for the active window. You can also select Task help for a specific object by searching for the task in the Help Topics.

• Contextual help - for the item at which the cursor is positioned - by selecting F1.

• Glossary help - for the definitions desired - by selecting glossary from the index or table of contents.

• View Books - to view the ADSM online softcopy documentation - by selecting View Books from the Help menu pull down.  The ADSM online book reader is started and displays the complete ADSM library list.

 You can move through the help by following hypertext links, using the search facility, and selecting topics from the table of contents, glossary or task lists.

 Hypertext Links

 Hypertext links are highlighted words or phrases that allow you to access more information about a topic. You can select the word or phrase to view the additional information.


Product Information - Help

This window displays the copyright date, version and release information for ADSM. Use this window to determine what level of ADSM you are using.


Keys Help - Help

ADSM keyboard function is dependent on your workstation environment. It is independent of the ADSM client or server platforms.

 Select the Keys Help for your workstation and press Enter:

• AIX Keys Help

• OS/2 Keys Help

• Windows Keys Help

• SUN Keys Help

• HP Keys Help


AIX Keys Help - Help

 ADSM keyboard function is dependent on your workstation environment. It is independent of the ADSM client or server platforms. These are the keyboard functions for the AIX workstation environment.

 For functions common across objects, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add 	Ctrl+A

Contextual Help 	F1

General Help 	F2 (in a Help window only)

Help Index 	F4 (in a Help window only)

Include 	Ctrl+I

Information Area Off 	Ctrl+L

Information Area On 	Ctrl+J

Keys Help 	F9 (in a Help window only)

Print to File - selected 	Ctrl+P

Refresh Now 	F5

Status Area Off 	Ctrl+O

Status Area On 	Ctrl+N

 For system menu functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Close 	Alt+F4

Lower 	Alt+F3

Maximize 	Alt+F10

Minimize 	Alt+F9

Move 	Alt+F7

Restore 	Alt+F5

Size 	Alt+F8

 For navigation functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Menu Mnemonic

  jump key 	F10

 For the following Database and Recovery Log functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Volume 	Ctrl+A

Delete Volume 1 	Ctrl+1

Delete Volume 2 	Ctrl+2

Delete Volume 3 	Ctrl+3

 For the following Storage Pools functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Vary Offline 	Ctrl+F

Vary Online 	Ctrl+E

 For the following Policy functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Archive 	Ctrl+A

Add Backup 	Ctrl+B


OS/2 Keys Help - Help

 ADSM keyboard function is dependent on your workstation environment. It is independent of the ADSM client or server platforms. These are the keyboard functions for the OS/2 workstation environment.

 For functions common across objects, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add 	Ctrl+A

Add Using 	Ctrl+U

Arrange Icons 	Ctrl+G

Contextual Help 	F1

Delete 	Delete

General Help 	F2 (in a Help window only)

Help Index 	F11 (in a Help window only)

Help Window Jump Key 	F7 (in a Help window only)

Include 	Ctrl+I

Information Area Off 	Ctrl+L

Information Area On 	Ctrl+J

Keys Help 	F9 (in a Help window only)

Print to File - object 	Ctrl+PrintScreen

Print to File - selected 	Ctrl+P

Refresh Now 	F5

Status Area Off 	Ctrl+O

Status Area On 	Ctrl+N

Using Help 	Shift+F10 (in a Help window only)

Select All 	Ctrl+S

Deselect All 	Ctrl+D

 For system menu functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Close 	Alt+F4

Maximize 	Alt+F10

Minimize 	Alt+F9

Move 	Alt+F7

Restore 	Alt+F5

Size 	Alt+F8

Window List 	Ctrl+Esc

 For navigation functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

All - De-select 	Ctrl+\

All - Select 	Ctrl+/

Menu Mnemonic

  jump key 	F10

 For the following Database and Recovery Log functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Volume 	Ctrl+A

Delete

  All Selected Volumes 	Delete

Delete Volume 1 	Ctrl+1

Delete Volume 2 	Ctrl+2

Delete Volume 3 	Ctrl+3

 For the following Storage Pools functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Vary Offline 	Ctrl+F

Vary Online 	Ctrl+E

 For the following Policy functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Archive 	Ctrl+A

Add Backup 	Ctrl+B


SUN Keys Help - Help

 ADSM keyboard function is dependent on your workstation environment. It is independent of the ADSM client or server platforms. These are the keyboard functions for the SUN workstation environment.

 For functions common across objects, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add 	Ctrl+A

Contextual Help 	F1 or HELP key

General Help 	F2 (in a Help window only)

Help Index 	F4 (in a Help window only)

Include 	Ctrl+I

Information Area Off 	Ctrl+L

Information Area On 	Ctrl+J

Keys Help 	F9 (in a Help window only)

Print to File - selected 	Ctrl+P

Refresh Now 	F5

Status Area Off 	Ctrl+O

Status Area On 	Ctrl+N

 For system menu functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Close 	Alt+F4

Lower 	Alt+F3

Maximize 	Alt+F10

Minimize 	Alt+F9

Move 	Alt+F7

Restore 	Alt+F5

Size 	Alt+F8

 For navigation functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Menu Mnemonic

  jump key 	F10

 For the following Database and Recovery Log functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Volume 	Ctrl+A

Delete Volume 1 	Ctrl+1

Delete Volume 2 	Ctrl+2

Delete Volume 3 	Ctrl+3

 For the following Storage Pools functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Vary Offline 	Ctrl+F

Vary Online 	Ctrl+E

 For the following Policy functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Archive 	Ctrl+A

Add Backup 	Ctrl+B


HP Keys Help - Help

 ADSM keyboard function is dependent on your workstation environment. It is independent of the ADSM client or server platforms. These are the keyboard functions for the HP workstation environment.

 For functions common across objects, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add 	Ctrl+A

Contextual Help 	F1 or HELP key

General Help 	F2 (in a Help window only)

Help Index 	F4 (in a Help window only)

Include 	Ctrl+I

Information Area Off 	Ctrl+L

Information Area On 	Ctrl+J

Keys Help 	F9 (in a Help window only)

Print to File - selected 	Ctrl+P

Refresh Now 	F5

Status Area Off 	Ctrl+O

Status Area On 	Ctrl+N

 For system menu functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Close 	Alt+F4

 For navigation functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Menu Mnemonic

  jump key 	F10

 For the following Database and Recovery Log functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Volume 	Ctrl+A

Delete Volume 1 	Ctrl+1

Delete Volume 2 	Ctrl+2

Delete Volume 3 	Ctrl+3

 For the following Storage Pools functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Vary Offline 	Ctrl+F

Vary Online 	Ctrl+E

 For the following Policy functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Archive 	Ctrl+A

Add Backup 	Ctrl+B


Windows Keys Help - Help

ADSM keyboard function is dependent on your workstation environment. It is independent of the ADSM client or server platforms. These are the keyboard functions for the Windows workstation environment.

 For functions common across objects, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add 	Ctrl+A

Contextual Help 	F1

Delete 	Delete

Include 	Ctrl+I

Print to File 	Ctrl+P

Refresh Now 	F5

Select All 	Ctrl+S

Deselect All 	Ctrl+D

 For the following Storage Pools functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Vary Offline 	Ctrl+F

Vary Online 	Ctrl+E

 For the following Policy functions, use the predefined shortcut keys listed below:

Function 	Shortcut Keys

Add Archive 	Ctrl+A

Add Backup 	Ctrl+B


Delete - Help

Select Delete to remove selected objects from ADSM. A confirmation window is opened which displays a list of objects you have selected to be deleted.

 This choice is available when objects have been selected.


Sort by - Help

Select Sort By to arrange the objects in the window in a specified order. Use the cascaded menu to select the data column by which you want to sort the objects. Objects will be sorted alphabetically in ascending sequence or numerically in descending sequence.

You can also sort the objects of the display by clicking on the data column title bar that you want sorted.  For example, if you are in the Archive Copy Groups details view, clicking on the Policy Domain title sorts the view by Policy Domain.  Clicking on the Policy Set title sorts the view by Policy Set.


Include - Help

 Select Include to filter the view based on the criteria you specify and to remove the Include window. The view is also refreshed with current information from the ADSM server.

 To filter the view without removing the include window, select Apply.


Add - Help

 Select Add to add a new object to ADSM.


Delete - Help

 Select Delete to remove the selections, displayed on the window, from ADSM.

 Before you delete an object, consider that you will not be able to recover it.


View Books - Help

Select View Books to display a viewer facility which will enable you to view ADSM documentation. The manuals that are available are on-line versions of the hardcopy documentation supplied with ADSM.

 View Books is available when the BOOKS option is contained in the options file.


Administrators - Help

The Administrators object contains all of the administrators registered with ADSM.

 The Administrators object opens to a Details view.  Use the view to register, update, remove, or query information for one or more administrators.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Administrators:

•  Details


Administrator - Help

Each Administrator object represents an ADSM administrator. Select the administrator object you want to work with. You can open the properties view of an administrator to update, or view information about the administrator.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of an Administrator:

•  Properties


Administrator Name - Help

 Type the name of the administrator in the Administrator Name field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Administrator Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  John Smith

 Considerations:

• Administrator names must be unique.


Password - Help

 Type the administrator password in the Password field. The administrator password is the character string that an administrator must enter to access ADSM.

 This field must be filled in if you are registering a new administrator or accessing ADSM administrative functions.

 The Password field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  If byebye is entered as a password, the Password field will display ******.

 Considerations:

• This field is a protected field. When you enter a character in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.


Contact Information - Help

 Type any additional contact information, such as a telephone number or electronic address, in the Contact Information field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Contact Information field can contain:

• Any character

 Default:  Blank for new entry or last saved contact information for existing entry.

 Example:  Administrator for M47 - contact Shirley Jones for system support

 Considerations:

• If quotes are used in this field, they must be balanced.


Analyst - Help

 Select Analyst to give an administrator analyst privileges. An analyst administrator monitors the operations of the storage management services server.

 Privilege classes can be assigned to an administrator. ADSM administrative privilege classes determine the tasks that an administrator can perform.


System - Help

 Select System to give an administrator overall ADSM system responsibility. A system administrator can perform any ADSM administrative task.

 Privilege classes can be assigned to an administrator. ADSM administrative privilege classes determine the tasks that an administrator can perform.

 Initial Setting:  None


Operator - Help

 Select Operator to give an administrator operator privileges. An operator administrator controls the regular operation of the ADSM server, including server availability and physical media status.

 Privilege classes can be assigned to an administrator. ADSM administrative privilege classes determine the tasks that an administrator can perform.


Policy - Help

 Select Policy to give an administrator policy privileges. A policy administrator defines and manages one or more policy domains, and the nodes assigned to those domains.

 Privilege classes can be assigned to an administrator. ADSM administrative privilege classes determine the tasks that an administrator can perform.


Storage - Help

 Select Storage to give an administrator storage privileges. A storage administrator controls the storage resources for the server, including database, recovery log and storage pools.

 Privilege classes can be assigned to an administrator. ADSM administrative privilege classes determine the tasks that an administrator can perform.


Administrators Include - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the administrators you want displayed in the details view.

 To include filtered administrators in the view:

1.  Type in the administrator name (with or without wildcards) in the Administrator Name field.

2.  Select from the Privilege Class list the privilege classes of the administrators you want to include.

3.  Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrators Details - Help

This window displays information about each administrator. Use this window to select the administrator or administrators you want to work with. From this window you can create new administrators, delete existing administrators, or select administrators to update or view.

 Data Columns

Administrator Name

Displays the name of the administrator.

Days Since Access

Displays the number of days since the server has been accessed by the administrator.

Days Since Password Set

Displays the number of days since a new password was set for the administrator.

Locked

Displays "yes" if the administrator has access to the ADSM server, "no" if not.

Privilege Class

Displays the privilege class assigned to the administrator.  There can be more than one privilege class. Each privilege class is separated by a blank.  When this field is blank, then the privilege class is "none".

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the administrator that you want to add, delete, or view. If you select multiple administrators and then select Open as Properties from the File menu, multiple windows are opened for processing.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Administrator

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Last Access - Help

 The Last Access field displays the date and time the server was last accessed by an administrator.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Registered By - Help

 The Registered By field displays the name of the administrator who registered an administrator.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Specific - Help

 Select Specific to assign privilege classes other than System to an administrator. An administrator can be assigned to more than one privilege class.

 Privilege classes:

• Select Analyst to give an administrator authority to monitor the operations of ADSM.

• Select Operator to give an administrator authority to control the regular operation of the ADSM server.

• Select Policy to give an administrator authority to define and manage policy constructs.

• Select Storage to give an administrator authority to control the storage resources for the server, including database, recovery log, and storage pools.

 Initial Setting: None

If you want to change the current settings of privilege class shown on pages 2 and 3  of the Privilege tab, you need to first select options on page 1.  Otherwise, pages 2 and 3 are greyed out and you cannot enter any changes.

For changes relating to page 2 (policy domains), first select Specific plus the Policy option on page 1.

For changes relating to page 3 (storage pools), first select Specific plus the Storage option on page 1.

After entering changes, click on the Apply button.  You can now proceed to page 2 and 3 of the Privilege tab to view the status or make related changes.


Privilege Class - Help

 The Privilege Class list is used to select which administrator privilege class you want to include in the details view. This list contains each of the administrator privileges and an All selection. Select one, more than one, or all privilege classes to include in the view.


Administrator Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to register a new ADSM administrator. Use this notebook to add descriptive information, assign privilege classes, and assign a password to the new administrator.

 You can access the Add window from the Edit menu in an Administrators window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields to register the name and contact information for the new administrator.

Privilege

Shows the privileges you can assign a new administrator.

Password

Shows the fields to set a new password.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrator Add Using - Help

This window uses a notebook to display some of the properties of the administrator you have selected. Use this notebook to register a new administrator using some of the same properties of the administrator you have selected.

 You can access the Add Using window from the Edit menu in an Administrators window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields to register the name and contact information for the new administrator.

Privilege

Shows the privileges you can assign or update for an administrator.

Password

Shows the fields to set a new password.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Administrator Add notebook to enter information for a new administrator.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 Use the General page to enter the name and contact information for a new administrator.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Password - Help

 Use the Password section of the Administrator Add notebook to set a password for a new administrator.

 The Password section contains one page of properties.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reenter New Password - Help

 Type the new password in the Reenter New Password field. This field must contain the exact character sequence entered in the New Password field.

 This field must be filled in if you are updating your current password.


Administrator Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display registration information for an administrator. Use this notebook to view, or update registration information for an administrator.

 You can access the Properties view from the File menu in an Administrators window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the administrator name and contact information.

Privilege

Shows the privileges assigned to the administrator.

Password

Shows the fields to use to update the administrator's password.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Administrator Properties notebook to view or update registration properties for an administrator.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to update contact information. You can use the Locked check box to prevent the administrator from performing ADSM functions.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to view registration information about an administrator.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Last access

•  Days since last access

•  Registered on

•  Registered by

•  Days since password set

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Password - Help

 Use the Password section of the Administrator Properties notebook to update the password for an administrator.

 The Password section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Last password update

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Locked - Help

 Select Locked to prevent an administrator from performing ADSM functions.  You can deselect Locked to remove the restriction.


None - Help

 Select None to give an administrator authority to only view information about ADSM objects. Administrators with system, policy, storage, analyst, or operator privileges also can view information about ADSM objects.

 Initial Setting:  None


All Policy Domains - Help

 The All Policy Domains list contains the names of the policy domains that can be assigned to a policy administrator. The list contains policy domain names defined to a server. Select the policy domain name you want to assign to the policy administrator.

 You can choose one, more than one, or all of the selections in the list.

 Use the Add push button to copy the selected policy domains to the Authorized Policy Domains list. Use the Apply push button to submit the changes to server.


All Storage Pools - Help

 The All Storage Pools list contains the names of the storage pools that can be assigned to a storage administrator. This list contains storage pool names defined to a server. Select the storage pool name you want to assign to the storage administrator.

 You can choose one, more than one, or all of the selections in the list.

 Use the Add push button to copy the selected storage pools to the Authorized Storage Pools list. Use the Apply push button to submit the changes to server.


Authorized Policy Domains - Help

 The Authorized Policy Domains list contains the names of the policy domains that are assigned to a policy administrator. Select the policy domain name you want to remove from the list.

 You can choose one, more than one, or all of the selections in the list.

 Use the Delete push button to remove the policy domains you have selected from the list.  Use the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.


Authorized Storage Pools - Help

 The Authorized Storage Pools list contains the names of the storage pools that are assigned to a storage administrator. Select the storage pool name you want to remove from the list.

 You can choose one, more than one, or all of the selections in the list.

 Use the Delete push button to remove the storage pools you have selected from the list. Use the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.


Add - Help

 Select Add to copy selections from the All Policy Domains or All Storage Pools list box to the Authorized Policy Domains or Authorized Storage Pools list box.

 Use the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.


Delete - Help

 Select Delete to remove selections from the Authorized Policy Domains or Authorized Storage Pools list box.

 Use the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.


Registered On - Help

 The Registered On field displays the date and time that an administrator was registered.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Administrator Name - Help

 The Administrator Name field displays the name assigned to an administrator.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


New Administrator Name - Help

 Type a new name for the administrator in the New Administrator Name field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The New Administrator Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  Richard Smith

 Considerations:

• For the New Administrator Name field, asterisk (*) wildcard characters are not allowed.


Last Password Update - Help

 The Last Password Update field displays the date and time the password for an administrator was last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Privilege - Help

 Use the Privilege section of the Administrator Properties notebook to view or update the privilege class assignment of an administrator. You can view or update the policy domains assigned to a policy administrator, or storage pools assigned to a storage administrator.

 The Privilege section contains three pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Privilege section to view or update the privilege class assigned to an administrator.

 Use Page 2, Domains, of the Privilege section to view or update the policy domains assigned to a policy administrator.

 Use Page 3, Pools, of the Privilege section to view or update the storage pools assigned to a storage administrator.

 A logged-on administrator cannot change his/her own privilege class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Privilege - Help

 Use the Privilege section of the Administrator Add notebook to assign a privilege class to a new administrator. You can assign policy domains to policy administrators, or storage pools to storage administrators.

 The Privilege section contains three pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Privilege section to assign a privilege class associated with the responsibilities of the new administrator.

 Use Page 2, Domains, of the Privilege section to assign policy domains to a policy administrator.

 Use Page 3, Pools, of the Privilege section to assign storage pools to a storage administrator.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Days Since Last Access - Help

 The Days Since Last Access field displays the number of days since an administrator last accessed the ADSM server.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Days Since Password Set - Help

 The Days Since Password Set field displays the number of days elapsed since a new password was set for an administrator.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Administrator Rename - Help

Use this window to update the name of an administrator. For example, you could update the administrator's name from Mike to Michael.

 To rename an administrator:

1.  Type in the new administrator name in the Administrator Name field.

2.  Select the Rename push button to assign the new name.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrators Delete - Help

Use the Administrators Delete window to confirm the administrators you have selected to delete.

 All the administrators in the list box are in a "selected" state. You can deselect administrators from the list you do not want to delete.

 Select the Delete push button to delete all administrators still selected in the list box.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reenter Password - Help

 Type the new password again in the Reenter Password field. This field must contain the exact character sequence entered in the Password field.

 This field must be filled in if you are updating the current administrator password.

 The Reenter Password field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  If byebye is entered, the Reenter Password field will display ******.

 Considerations:

• This field is a protected field.  When you enter a character in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.

• When you enter a new password in the Password field, you must enter the same password in the Reenter Password field.


Unrestricted Policy Privilege - Help

 Select Unrestricted policy privilege to give an administrator with policy privileges authority over all policy domains, including policy domains defined in the future.

 Initial Setting:  Unrestricted policy privilege

 If you want to change the current setting, follow these steps:

Step 1 	On page 1 of the Privilege tab, select Specific plus the Policy option.

Step 2 	On page 2 of the Privilege tab, select one or more policy domains in the All policy domains box.

Step 3 	Select the Add button.  The selected policy domains will appear in the Authorized policy domains box.

Step 4 	Click on the Apply button to save your changes.

You can remove specific authorizations by selecting any policy domain in the Authorized policy domains box, and click on the Delete button.  Then click on the  Apply button to save your changes.


Restricted to Authorized Policy Domains (below) - Help

 Select Restricted to authorized policy domains (below) to give an administrator with policy privileges authority over only those policy domains assigned to the administrator.  The administrator will not have authority over policy domains defined in the future.

 Initial Setting:  Unrestricted policy privilege

 If you want to change the current setting, follow these steps:

Step 1 	On page 1 of the Privilege tab, select Specific plus the Policy option.

Step 2 	On page 2 of the Privilege tab, select one or more policy domains in the All policy domains box.

Step 3 	Click on the Add button.  The selected policy domains will appear in the Authorized policy domains box.

Step 4 	Click on the Apply button to save your changes.

You can remove specific authorizations by selecting any policy domain in the Authorized policy domains box, and click on the Delete button.  Then select the  Apply button to save your changes.


Unrestricted Storage Privilege - Help

 Select Unrestricted storage privilege to give an administrator with storage privileges authority over all storage pools, including storage pools defined in the future.

 Initial Setting:  Unrestricted storage privilege

 If you want to change the current setting, follow these steps:

Step 1 	On page 1 of the Privilege tab, select Specific plus the Storage option.

Step 2 	On page 3 of the Privilege tab, select one or more storage pools listed in the All storage pools box.

Step 3 	Click on the Add button.  The selected storage pools will appear in the Authorized storage pools box.

Step 4 	Click on the Apply button to save your changes.

You can remove specific authorizations by selecting any storage pool in the Authorized storage pool box, and click on the Delete button.  Then click on the Apply button to save your changes.


Restricted to Authorized Storage Pools (below) - Help

 Select Restricted to authorized storage pools (below) to give an administrator with storage privileges authority over only those storage pools assigned to the administrator.  The administrator will not have authority over storage pools defined in the future.

 Initial Setting:  Unrestricted storage privilege

 If you want to change the current setting, follow these steps:

Step 1 	On page 1 of the Privilege tab, select Specific plus the Storage option.

Step 2 	On page 3 of the Privilege tab, select one or more storage pools listed in the All storage pools box.

Step 3 	Click on the Add button.  The selected storage pools will appear in the Authorized storage pools box.

Step 4 	Click on the Apply button to save your changes.

You can remove specific authorizations by selecting any storage pool in the Authorized storage pools box, and click on the Delete button. Then click on the Apply button to save your changes.


Administrator Name - Help

 Type the administrator name in the Administrator Name field. The administrator you specify in this field will be used as a filter for your search criteria.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Administrator Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question Mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  Asterisk (*)

 Example:  michaelc


Administrators Export - Help

Use this window to export administrator definitions to selected sequential access media. You can preview administrator information in the Activity Log before exporting any definitions.

 The following is a list of types of administrator information you can export using the Administrator Export window:

• Administrator definitions such as name, contact, and lock state

• Types of administrative authority for specified administrators

 You can access the Administrators Export window from the File menu choice in the Administrator Details view.

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class to which you want administrator definitions exported. The Device Class list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can make only one selection from the list. A selection is required when you want to export administrator definitions. A selection is not required when you select the Preview Only check box to view administrator information in the Activity Log before exporting any definitions.


Volume Names - Help

 Type specific volume names in the Volume Names field to indicate where you want to export administrator definitions. You can leave the Volume Names field blank to include all volumes on the selected sequential access media.

 Volume names identify sequential access media volumes that have been assigned to a storage pool to store backed up or archived files.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

    AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

    MVS - rlvol2

    OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\rlvol2.dsm

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.

• You can use specific volumes and scratch media to export administrator definitions. The volumes you specify in the Volume Names field will be used first, and if more volumes are needed, scratch media is used for the remainder of the definitions being exported.


Can Use Scratch Media - Help

 Select Can Use Scratch Media to specify that you want to export administrator definitions to any sequential access media that is available. If the Can Use Scratch Media check box is not selected, you must enter the volume names to which you want to export the administrator definitions.

 Default:  On (use scratch media)

 Considerations

•  If the Device Class File is selected, the Volume Names field must be left blank.


Preview Only (You Can View Results in Activity Log) - Help

 You can select Preview Only to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting administrator definitions. When you select the Preview Only check box from the Administrator window, ADSM calculates the number of volumes needed and reports on the administrator definitions that are to be exported.

 Default:  Off


Export - Help

 Select Export to send the specified administrator definitions to the sequential access media you have selected.

 If the Preview Only check box is selected, the results will be sent to the Activity Log for viewing without exporting any administrator definitions.


Administrators Import - Help

Use this window to import administrator definitions from sequential access media. You can preview administrator information in the Activity Log before importing any definitions.

 The following is a list of types of administrator information you can import using the Administrator Import window:

• Administrator definitions such as name, contact, and lock state

• Types of administrative authority for specified administrators

 You can access the Administrators Import window from the Edit menu choice in the Administrator Details view.

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrator Names - Help

 Type specific administrator names in the Administrator Names field, or leave the asterisk (*) in the field to import all administrator definitions.

 Entering information in this field is required.

 The Administrator Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Example:  AMYK,ZACK

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries in this field must be separated by commas without spaces.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class from which you want administrator definitions imported. The Device Class list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can make only one selection from the list. A selection is required when you want to preview or import administrator definitions.


Volume Names - Help

 Type the names of sequential access media in the Volume Names field to indicate from where you want to import administrator definitions.

 Volume names identify sequential access media volumes that have been assigned to a storage pool to store backed up or archived files.

 Entering information in this field is required except for the VM server.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

    AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

    MVS - rlvol2

    OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\rlvol2.dsm

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.


Replace Existing Administrator Definitions - Help

 Select Replace Existing Administrator Definitions to specify that you want existing administrator definitions to be replaced.  Replacing existing administrator definitions causes existing administrator definitions to be over written by the definitions you are importing.

 Default:  Off


Preview Only (You Can View Results in Activity Log) - Help

 You can select Preview Only to view the results in the Activity Log before importing administrator definitions. When you select Preview Only from the Administrator Import window, ADSM calculates the number of volumes used and reports on the administrator definitions that are to be imported. All specified volumes must be mounted and available for reading when importing.

 Default:  Off


Import - Help

 Select Import to receive the specified administrator definitions from the selected sequential access media.

 If the Preview Only check box is selected, the results will be sent to the Activity Log for viewing without importing any administrator definitions.


Export - Help

Select Export from the File menu to export administrator definitions to sequential access media or to the activity log for viewing before you export any data. Only those administrators included in the view are available for export.

 Export is useful for server maintenance and disaster recovery.

 This choice is always available.


Import - Help

Select Import from the Edit menu to import administrator definitions from selected sequential access media, or you can preview the results in the Activity Log before you import any data.

 Import is useful for server maintenance, disaster recovery, and adding new servers to a network.

 This selection is always available.


Administrators Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Copying Administrators

•   Exporting Administrator Definitions

•   Importing Administrator Definitions

•   Printing Administrator Information

•   Registering New Administrators

•   Removing Administrators

•   Renaming an Administrator

•   Updating Administrator Properties

•   Viewing Administrator Information


Registering New Administrators - Help

You can register new administrators to ADSM. A user must be registered with the ADSM server in order to perform administration tasks.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each administrator you are registering:

• Name of the administrator

• Contact information for the administrator

• A password for the administrator

• Policy domains or storage pools to assign the administrator

• The privilege class the administrator will have

 To register a new administrator:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add.  The Administrator-Add window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the properties for the new administrator.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to submit the new administrator information to the server.


Updating Administrator Properties - Help

To update the properties for an administrator:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select an existing administrator, or administrators.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties.  The Administrator-Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the field you want to update.

 Step 5 	 Enter the new properties for the administrator.

 Step 6 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.

 Considerations

• You can rename an administrator from the Rename window available on the Edit menu from the Administrators Details view.

• An administrator logged-on to the ADSM server cannot update his/her own privilege class in the properties view.


Removing Administrators - Help

You can remove administrators that have been registered with ADSM and will no longer be performing ADSM administration tasks.

 To remove an administrator:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the administrator, or administrators you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Delete.  The Administrators-Delete window displays.

 Step 4 	 A delete confirmation window is displayed for you to verify the administrators to be deleted.  You can deselect administrators you choose not to delete.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button to remove the administrator or administrators from the server.  Select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.


Viewing Administrator Information - Help

You can view information about an administrator or group of administrators, or view the properties for specific administrators.

 To view administrator information:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object on the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the administrator you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties.  The Administrator-Properties window displays.

 Considerations

•  If you want to filter the list of administrators, select Include from the View menu in Details view.


Renaming an Administrator - Help

An administrator registered with ADSM can be renamed.

 To rename an administrator:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the administrator you want to rename.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Rename.  The Administrator-Rename window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new name of the administrator in the New Administrator Name field. The current name of the administrator will display in the Administrator Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Rename push button to change the administrator name.


Printing Administrator Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Administrator Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Administrators in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor,

 Select one of the following to see instructions for copying to a file for printing:

•   Printing all administrators

•   Printing selected administrators

•   Printing administrators properties view


Printing All Administrators - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all administrators in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to.

 To print all the administrators:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Select All.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File.  The Administrators-Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file you want the administrator information sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the administrator information to the file you have specified.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Administrators - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected administrators in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to.

 To print selected administrators:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the administrator you want to copy to a file. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File.  The Administrator-Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file you want the administrator information sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected administrators to the file you have specified.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Administrators Properties View - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Administrator- Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to.

 To copy a properties view of an administrator:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the administrator you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, then select Open as Properties from the menu list. The Administrator-Properties notebook displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window.  The Administrator - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the administrator properties information to the file you have specified.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Importing Administrators - Help

You can import administrator definitions from sequential access media.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• Names of administrators you want to import

• Device class on which the data is stored

• Volume names where the data is stored

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help. To import administrator definitions:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrator object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Import from the list. The Administrator Import window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the Administrator Names and Volume Names in the appropriate fields, and then select the Device Class from which you are importing the definitions.

 Step 4 	 Select the Import push button to import the administrator definitions.

 Considerations

• You can leave the Volume Names field blank to import all volumes from the selected device class.

• You can select Replace Existing Administrator Definitions to overwrite existing definitions.

• You can select Preview Only to view the results in the Activity Log before importing any administrator definitions.


Exporting Administrators - Help

You can export administrator definitions to sequential access media.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The device class to be used

• Volume names where the data is to be stored

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To export all administrator definitions:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrator object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Export.  The Administrator Export window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the Volume Names and select the Device Class to which you are exporting the definitions. The asterisk (*) in the Administrator names field will export all administrator definitions.

 Step 4 	 Select the Export push button to export the administrator definitions.

 Considerations

• The Can Use Scratch Media check box is selected as the default, allowing ADSM to use any available sequential access media.

• Select the Preview Only check box to view the administrator definitions before taking any action.


Copying Administrators - Help

You can copy existing administrator attributes to a new administrator.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• Name of the new administrator

• Contact information for the new administrator

• A password for the new administrator

• The name of the administrator whose attributes you want to copy

• The privilege class that the new administrator will have

 To copy a new administrator:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrators object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Administrators displays.

 Step 2 	Select the Administrator whose attributes you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Administrator-Add window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the properties for the new administrator.  There are three tabs in the notebook.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to submit the new administrator information to the server.


New Password - Help

 Type a new password in the New Password field.

 This field must be filled in when changing your password.

 The new password can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  If you type hello as a password, the password field displays *****.

 Considerations:

• This field is a protected field.  When a character is entered in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.

• When you enter a new password in the New Password field, you must enter same password in the Reenter New Password field.


ADSM Administration Logon - Help

This window displays the fields required to logon to ADSM.  Use this window to enter your name and ADSM password.  Select the Logon push button when you have filled in the fields.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Change Password - Help

This window displays the fields required to change your administrator password.  This window is displayed when your current password has expired.

 To change your password:

• Enter your current password in the Current Password field

• Enter your new password in both the New Password and Reenter New Password fields

• Select the Change push button to register your new ADSM administrator password

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Administrator Name

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Logon - Help

 Select Logon to log on to the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface.


Reenter New Password - Help

 Type your new password again in the Reenter New Password field.

 This field must be filled in if you are updating your current password.


Change - Help

 Select Change to change your current password to your new password.


Password - Help

 Type your administrator password in the Password field. Your administrator password is the character string that you must enter to access ADSM functions.

 This field must be filled in to access ADSM functions.

 The Password field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  If solong is entered as a password, the Password field will display ******.

 Considerations:

• This field is a protected field. When you enter a character in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.


Administrator Name - Help

 The Administrator Name field displays the name of the administrator for which the password is being changed.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Current Password - Help

 Type the administrator's current password in the Current Password field.  The password you type in this field will be used to validate the adminstrator for which the password is being changed.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Current Password field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  If you type hello as a current password, the field displays *****.

 Considerations:

• This field is a protected field.  When a character is entered in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.


Administrator Name - Help

 Type the name of the administrator in the Administrator Name field.  The name of the administrator will be validated with the adminstrator's password during the logon process.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Administrator Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  Ellen Castaway


Database - Help

The database stores information about all objects managed by ADSM.  This includes an inventory of information about policy management objects, scheduling objects, backed up or archived files in Storage Pools, and administrator and client node registrations.

 The Database object opens to a properties view.  Use the view to get information about the capacity and utilization of the database, to extend or reduce the database, and to copy to a file information about the database.  If your ADSM server supports database backup, you can use the properties view to perform backup operations for the database.

 Expand the Database object and open Database Volumes to select the database volumes you want to work with, add new volumes to the database, increase or decrease the size of the database, and copy to a file information about all or selected volumes in the database.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of the Database object.

•  Properties view


Database Recovery Log - Help

The Database Recovery Log object tracks all changes made to the database. If a system failure occurs, the recovery log ensures that uncommitted transactions are rolled back during recovery to restore the database to a consistent state. When a file is backed up or archived, information is written to the recovery log before it is committed to the database.

 The Database Recovery Log object opens to a properties view of the Recovery Log.  Use the view to get information about the capacity and utilization of the recovery log, to extend or reduce the recovery log, and to copy to a file information about the recovery log.

  Expand  the Database Recovery Log object and open Recovery Log Volumes to select the recovery log volumes you want to work with, to add new volumes to the recovery log, to increase or decrease the size of the recovery log, and to copy to a file information about all or selected volumes in the recovery log.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks


Database Volumes Details - Help

This window displays information about all the volumes that make up the database. The database can contain as many volumes as needed to provide sufficient space for the database information. All volumes defined to an image of the database are called a volume set. You can have up to three mirrored images of the database, each represented by a volume set. The vertical columns represent a database volume set.

 A database volume can consist of up to three identical volumes which make up a group of mirrored Database volumes. When the information on one volume changes, the other volumes in the group are also updated so they remain synchronized. Each horizontal row represents a group of mirrored Database volumes.

 Use this window to select the Database volumes you want to work with. From this window you can arrange and view information to help you manage the Database volumes. You can also add new volumes to the Database, increase or decrease the size of the Database and copy to a file information about all or selected volumes in the Database.

 If you select multiple Database volumes and then select Open as Properties from the File menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Data Columns

Volume Set 1

Displays the long name for Volume 1 and identifies the Database volume.

Volume Set 1 Status

Displays the status of Volume 1.

Volume Set 2

Displays a truncated name for Volume 2 if the volume name is longer than 17 characters.

Volume Set 2 Status

Displays the status of Volume 2.

Volume Set 3

Displays a truncated name for Volume 3 if the volume name is longer than 17 characters.

Volume Set 3 Status

Displays the status of Volume 3.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis. To view the long name for the volumes in a group of mirrored volumes, select a Database volume, then select Open as Properties from the File menu and scroll through each name on the Volumes page of the notebook.

 The Status field for each mirrored volume shows the current status of the volume and can contain:

• Sync'd - The volume is synchronized with other volumes in the group of mirrored volumes.

• Stale - The volume is not yet synchronized with other volumes in the group of mirrored volumes.

• Offline - The volume has been made unavailable to ADSM by varying it offline.

• Not Def. - No volume has been defined.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Database

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Database Volumes - Help

Each object represents a group of mirrored database volumes. The detail line displays up to three identical volumes in the group of mirrored volumes. When the information on one volume changes, the other volumes in the group are also updated so they remain synchronized.

 Select the group of mirrored database volumes you want to work with. You can copy information about the database volume to a file, add new mirrored volumes, and delete mirrored volumes. You can also open the properties view for a group of mirrored volumes to view capacity information about the database volume, view the long name of the mirrored volumes, add new mirrored volumes, and vary mirrored volumes offline or online for maintenance purposes.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a group of mirrored volumes:

•  Database Volume Properties


Extend - Help

Select Extend from the File menu to increase the size of the database.


Reduce - Help

Select Reduce from the File menu to decrease the size of the database.


Add Volume - Help

Select Add Volume from the Edit menu to define one to three mirrored volumes as a new group of mirrored database volumes.


Delete - Help

Select Delete from the Edit menu to list the Delete choices available for the database. Use the cascaded menu to select the delete action you want to perform.

 Delete only removes a database volume from use by the Database. The volume is available for reuse since it is not physically removed. You can only delete a volume if there is space available to move the contents to other volumes or if there is a synchronized volume remaining in the group of mirrored volumes. You cannot delete the last database volume in the database.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 The availability of the delete menu choices depends on the number of mirrored volumes in the selected group of mirrored database volumes.


Delete Volume 1 - Help

Select Delete Volume 1 from the Edit menu to delete Volume 1 from the selected group of mirrored volumes.

 Delete Volume 1 is available only when a group of mirrored volumes has been selected.

 The last volume in a group of mirrored volumes can be deleted only if the database has sufficient capacity to move the data from this volume to other volumes. The database must be reduced by at least an amount which is the size of the volume being deleted.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Since mirrored volumes are identical, you can delete any volume in the group.


Delete Volume 2 - Help

Select Delete Volume 2 from the Edit menu to delete Volume 2 from the selected group of mirrored volumes.

 Delete Volume 2 is available only when a group of mirrored volumes that contains at least two volumes, has been selected.

 Since mirrored volumes are identical, you can delete any volume in the group.


Delete Volume 3 - Help

Select Delete Volume 3 from the Edit menu to delete Volume 3 from the selected group of mirrored volumes.

 Delete Volume 3 is available only when a group of mirrored volumes that contains three volumes, has been selected.

 Since mirrored volumes are identical, you can delete any volume in the group.


Delete All Selected Volumes - Help

Select Delete All Selected Volumes from the Edit menu to delete all volumes in the selected group of mirrored volumes.

 Delete All Selected Volumes is available only when a group of mirrored volumes has been selected.

 A group of mirrored volumes can be deleted only if the database has sufficient capacity to move the data from this volume to other database volumes. The database must be reduced by at least an amount which is the size of the volumes being deleted.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.


Database Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties view of the database. Use this notebook to view information to help you manage, extend, reduce, and copy to a file information about the database.

 You can access the properties view from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.

 This notebook has the following tab:

General

Shows capacity and utilization information for the database.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Available Space - Help

 The Available Space field displays the sum of all the logical space available on the volumes that are defined to the Database. This field is initialized at installation and is updated each time you add or delete volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Assigned Capacity - Help

 The Assigned Capacity field displays the amount of logical space that can be used by the database to store data. This field is initialized at installation to be equal to Available Space and is adjusted each time the database is extended or reduced. The new space can be used to store more data or to move data from one storage device to another.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Maximum Extension - Help

 The Maximum Extension field displays the maximum amount of space by which the database can be extended. This amount is determined by subtracting Assigned Capacity from Available Space.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Maximum Reduction - Help

 The Maximum Reduction field displays the maximum amount of space by which the database can be reduced. This amount is determined by subtracting Current Utilization from Assigned Capacity.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Page Size - Help

 The Page Size field displays the size of each page in the database. This field is currently equal to 4096 bytes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Total Pages Assigned - Help

 The Total Pages Assigned field displays the total number of pages used by the database. This amount is determined by dividing the Assigned Capacity by the Page Size.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Used Pages - Help

 The Used Pages field displays the number of pages used by the database. This amount is determined by multiplying Current Utilization of Assigned Capacity by the Total Pages Assigned.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Current Utilization of Assigned Capacity - Help

 The Current Utilization of Assigned Capacity field displays the percent of Assigned Capacity used by the database at the instant the data is displayed. This percent is determined by dividing Used Pages by Total Pages Assigned. This will normally be the same percent as Maximum Utilization of Assigned Capacity unless a large object has been deleted.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Maximum Utilization of Assigned Capacity - Help

 The Maximum Utilization of Assigned Capacity field displays the highest percent of Assigned Capacity used by the database. This percent is the highest utilization of the database since the last server invocation.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Database Volume Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties view for a database volume. Use this notebook to add mirrored volumes to a database volume and to view capacity information about the database volume. You can also view the long name of the mirrored volumes or their status, and vary these volumes online or offline.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

Volumes

Shows the mirrored volumes defined for the group of mirrored database volumes.

Summary

Shows the volume capacity for the group of mirrored database volumes.

Volume 1

Shows the status of the first volume of the group of mirrored volumes and allows you to vary this volume online or offline.

Volume 2

Shows the status of the second volume of the group of mirrored volumes and allows you to vary this volume online or offline.

Volume 3

Shows the status of third volume of the group of mirrored volumes and allows you to vary this volume online or offline.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volumes - Help

 Use the Volumes section of the Database Properties notebook to add volumes to a group of mirrored database volumes.

 The Volumes section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Volumes page to view the long names of the mirrored volumes and to add volumes to the group of mirrored database volumes.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for this page, select from the list below:

•  Volume 1

•  Volume 2

•  Volume 3

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume 1 - Help

 The Volume 1 field displays the name of the first volume of the group of mirrored database volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Volume 2 - Help

 Type a unique volume name for Volume 2 to add a new volume to a group of mirrored database volumes.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Volume 2 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/dbvol2

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.DBVOL2

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\DBVOL2.DSM

      VM - 192

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Volume 3 - Help

 Type a unique volume name for Volume 3 to add a new volume to a group of mirrored database volumes.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Volume 3 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/dbvol3

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.DBVOL3

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\DBVOL3.DSM

      VM - 193

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Summary - Help

 Use the Summary section of the database properties notebook to view information about the space capacity of a database volume.

 The Summary section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Summary page to view available, allocated and free space for the database volume.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for this page, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Allocated space

•  Free space

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Available Space - Help

 The Available Space field displays the logical space available on the database volume. This amount is initialized when a database volume is added.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Allocated Space - Help

 The Allocated Space field displays the amount of logical space on the database volume currently being used by the Database.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Free Space - Help

 The Free Space field displays the amount of logical space on the database volume that is currently not being used by the Database. This is determined by subtracting Allocated Space from Available Space.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Volume 1 - Help

 Use the Volume 1 section of the Database Properties notebook to view information about the first mirrored volume and to vary it online and offline.

 The Volume 1 section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Volume 1 page to view the status of Volume 1. You can also vary Volume 1 online or offline.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for Volume 1, select from the list below:

•  Volume name

•  Status

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume Name - Help

 The Volume Name field displays the name of a volume in the group of mirrored database volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Status - Help

 The Status field displays the current status of a mirrored volume. Status values are:

• Sync'd - The volume is synchronized with other volumes in the group of mirrored volumes.

• Stale - The volume is not yet synchronized with other volumes in the group of mirrored volumes.

• Offline - The volume has been made unavailable to ADSM by varying it offline.

• Not Def. - No volume has been defined.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Online - Help

 Select Vary Online to make the volume available to the database. Use Vary Online to make a volume available after service has been performed on the device on which the volume resides. A volume is automatically made available by ADSM when it is added.

 A background process is started to synchronize the volumes if you Vary Online and the volume has data on it.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 The value of the vary radio button setting reflects the current state of the volume.

 Default:  Online


Offline - Help

 Select Vary Offline to make the volume unavailable to the database. Use Vary Offline to make a volume unavailable in order to perform service on the device on which the volume resides. A volume is automatically varied offline by ADSM if there is a media failure on the device on which the volume resides.

 The value of the vary radio button setting reflects the current state of the volume.

 Default:  Online


Volume 2 - Help

 Use the Volume 2 section of the database Properties notebook to view information about second mirrored volume and to vary the volume online and offline.

 The Volume 2 section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Volume 2 page to view the status of Volume 2. You can also vary Volume 2 online or offline.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for Volume 2, select from the list below:

•  Volume name

•  Status

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume 3 - Help

 Use the Volume 3 section of the database Properties notebook to view information about the third mirrored volume and to vary the volume online and offline.

 The Volume 3 section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Volume 3 page to view the status of Volume 3. You can also vary Volume 3 online or offline.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for Volume 3, select from the list below:

•  Volume name

•  Status

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Database Add Volume - Help

Use this window to add a new volume to the database and to optionally add one or two additional mirrored database volumes. Enter a volume name in Volume 1 field. If you are also adding mirrored volumes, enter their names in the other volume fields.

 If you want to increase the size of the database next, select Show Extend Window Next check box. After the volume is added, the database Extend window will display to allow you to extend the size of the database.

 Select the Add push button when the fields are filled in.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume 1 - Help

 Type a unique volume name in the Volume 1 field to add a volume to the database.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 1 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/dbvol1

      MVS - DBVOL1

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\DBVOL1.DSM

      VM - 191

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Show Extend Window Next - Help

 Select Show Extend Window Next to request that the Database Extend window be displayed after volumes are added.


Database Add Mirrored Volume - Help

Use this window to add one or two additional volumes to a group of mirrored database volumes. Enter a volume name in the Volume 2 or Volume 3 fields. Each group of mirrored volumes must contain at least two volumes to ensure that complete mirroring exists.

 Select the Add push button when the fields are filled in.

 If you are adding mirrored volumes, it may take several minutes to several hours to synchronize the new volumes with the existing group of mirrored volumes.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•   Volume 1

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume 2 - Help

 Type a unique volume name for Volume 2 to add a new volume to a group of mirrored Database volumes.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 2 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/dbvol2

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.DBVOL2

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\DBVOL2.DSM

      VM - 192

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Volume 3 - Help

 Type a unique volume name for Volume 3 to add a new volume to a group of mirrored database volumes.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 3 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/dbvol3

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.DBVOL3

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\DBVOL3.DSM

      VM - 193

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Database Extend - Help

Use this window to increase the amount of usable space for the database so you can store more data in the database. Space utilization information is displayed. The database assigned space will be updated.

 You can also increase the size of the database after adding a volume or volumes to the Database.

 Storage can be extended in 4 MB increments. A recommended amount, which is equivalent to the Maximum Extension value, will be displayed in the Extend By field. If you enter an amount in other than 4 MB increments, the extension amount will be rounded up to the next highest 4 MB increment.

 Select the Extend push button when the Extend By field is complete.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Assigned capacity

•  Utilized assigned capacity

•  Maximum extension

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Utilized Assigned Capacity - Help

 The Utilized Assigned Capacity field displays the amount of space containing data in the database at the instant the data is displayed. This amount is determined by subtracting Maximum Reduction from Assigned Capacity.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Extend By - Help

 Type the amount of storage, in 4 MB increments, that you want to extend the Database by in the Extend By field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Extend By field can contain:

• 1 to 8 numbers

 Default:  The Maximum Extension amount

 Example:  24 (MB)

 Considerations:

• If you enter an amount in other than 4 MB increments, the extension amount will be rounded up to the next highest 4 MB increment.


Extend - Help

 Select Extend to increase the database storage by the amount entered in the Extend By field.


Database Reduce - Help

Use this window to reduce the amount of usable space for the database before you delete the last volume in a group of mirrored database volumes. Space utilization information is displayed. The database storage will be updated.

 Storage can be reduced in 4 MB increments. A recommended amount, which is equivalent to the Maximum Reduction value, will be displayed in the Reduce By field. If you enter an amount in other than 4 MB increments, the reduction amount will be rounded up to the next highest 4 MB increment.

 Select the Reduce push button when the Reduce By field is complete.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Assigned capacity

•  Utilized assigned capacity

•  Maximum reduction

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reduce By - Help

 Type the amount of storage, in 4 MB increments, that you want to reduce the database by in the Reduce By field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Reduce By field can contain:

• 1 to 8 numbers

 Default:  The Maximum Reduction amount

 Example:  12 (MB)

 Considerations:

• If you enter an amount in other than 4 MB increments, the reduction amount will be rounded up to the next highest 4 MB increment.


Reduce - Help

 Select Reduce to decrease the database storage by the amount entered in the Reduce By field.


Recovery Log Volumes Details - Help

This window displays information about all the volumes that make up the recovery log. The recovery log can contain as many volumes as needed to provide sufficient space for the recovery log information. All volumes defined to an image of the recovery log are called a volume set. You can have up to three mirrored images of the recovery log, each represented by a volume set. The vertical columns represent a recovery log volume set.

 A recovery log volume can consist of up to three identical volumes which make up a group of mirrored recovery log volumes. When the information on one volume changes, the other volumes in the group are also updated so they remain synchronized. Each horizontal row represents a group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 Use this window to select the recovery log volumes you want to work with. From this window you can arrange and view information to help you manage the recovery log volumes. You can also add new volumes to the recovery log, increase or decrease the size of the recovery log and copy to a file information about all or selected volumes in the recovery log.

 If you select multiple recovery log volumes and then select Open as Properties from the File menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Data Columns

Volume Set 1

Displays the long name for Volume 1 and identifies the recovery log volume.

Volume Set 1 Status

Displays the status of Volume 1.

Volume Set 2

Displays a truncated name for Volume 2 if the volume name is longer than 17 characters.

Volume Set 2 Status

Displays the status of Volume 2.

Volume Set 3

Displays a truncated name for Volume 3 if the volume name is longer than 17 characters.

Volume Set 3 Status

Displays the status of Volume 3.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis. To view the long name for the volumes in a group of mirrored volumes, select a recovery log volume, then select Open as Properties from the File menu and scroll through each name on the Volumes page of the notebook.

 The Status field for each mirrored volume shows the current status of the volume and can contain:

• Sync'd - The volume is synchronized with other volumes in the group of mirrored volumes.

• Stale - The volume is not yet synchronized with other volumes in the group of mirrored volumes.

• Offline - The volume has been made unavailable to ADSM by varying it offline.

• Not Def. - No volume has been defined.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Recovery Log

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Recovery Log Volumes - Help

Each object represents a group of mirrored recovery log volumes. The detail line displays up to three identical volumes in the group of mirrored volumes. When the information on one volume changes, the other volumes in the group are also updated so they remain synchronized.

 Select the group of mirrored recovery log volumes you want to work with. You can copy information about the recovery log volume to a file, add new mirrored volumes, and delete mirrored volumes. You can also open the properties view of a group of mirrored volumes to view capacity information about the recovery log volume, view the long name of the mirrored volumes, add new mirrored volumes, and vary mirrored volumes offline or online for maintenance purposes.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a group of mirrored volumes:

•  Recovery Log Volume Properties


Extend - Help

Select Extend from the File menu to increase the size of the recovery log.


Reduce - Help

Select Reduce from the File menu to decrease the size of the recovery log.


Add Volume - Help

Select Add Volume from the Edit menu to define one to three mirrored volumes as a new group of mirrored recovery log volumes.


Add Mirrored Volume - Help

Select Add Mirrored Volume from the Edit menu to add one or two mirrored volumes to a group of mirrored Recovery Log volumes.

 Add Mirrored Volume is available if the selected group of mirrored volumes contains less than three mirrored volumes, and if the properties view for the selected group of mirrored volumes is not open.


Delete - Help

Select Delete from the Edit menu to list the Delete choices available for the recovery log. Use the cascaded menu to select the delete action you want to perform.

 Delete only removes a recovery log volume from use by the Recovery Log. The volume is available for reuse since it is not physically removed. You can only delete a volume if there is space available to move the contents to other volumes or if there is a synchronized volume remaining in the group of mirrored volumes. You cannot delete the last recovery log volume in the recovery log.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 The availability of the delete menu choices depends on the number of mirrored volumes in the selected group of mirrored recovery log volumes.


Delete Volume 1 - Help

Select Delete Volume 1 from the Edit menu to delete Volume 1 from the selected group of mirrored volumes.

 Delete Volume 1 is available only when a group of mirrored volumes has been selected.

 The last volume in a group of mirrored volumes can be deleted only if the recovery log has sufficient capacity to move the data from this volume to other volumes. The recovery log must be reduced by at least an amount which is the size of the volume being deleted.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Since mirrored volumes are identical, you can delete any volume in the group.


Delete Volume 2 - Help

Select Delete Volume 2 from the Edit menu to delete Volume 2 from the selected group of mirrored volumes.

 Delete Volume 2 is available only when a group of mirrored volumes that contains at least two volumes, has been selected.

 Since mirrored volumes are identical, you can delete any volume in the group.


Delete Volume 3 - Help

Select Delete Volume 3 from the Edit menu to delete Volume 3 from the selected group of mirrored volumes.

 Delete Volume 3 is available only when a group of mirrored volumes that contains three volumes, has been selected.

 Since mirrored volumes are identical, you can delete any volume in the group.


Delete All Selected Volumes - Help

Select Delete All Selected Volumes from the Edit menu to delete all volumes in the selected group of mirrored volumes.

 Delete All Selected Volumes is available only when a group of mirrored volumes has been selected.

 A group of mirrored volumes can be deleted only if the recovery log has sufficient capacity to move the data from this volume to other recovery log volumes. The recovery log must be reduced by at least an amount which is the size of the volumes being deleted.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.


Available Space - Help

 The Available Space field displays the sum of all the logical space available on the volumes that are defined to the recovery log. This field is initialized at installation and is updated each time you add or delete volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Assigned Capacity - Help

 The Assigned Capacity field displays the amount of logical space that can be used by the recovery log to store data. This field is initialized at installation to be equal to Available Space and is adjusted each time the recovery log is extended or reduced. The new space can be used to store more data or to move data from one storage device to another.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Maximum Extension - Help

 The Maximum Extension field displays the maximum amount of space by which the recovery log can be extended. This amount is determined by subtracting Assigned Capacity from Available Space.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Maximum Reduction - Help

 The Maximum Reduction field displays the maximum amount of space by which the recovery log can be reduced. This amount is determined by subtracting Current Utilization from Assigned Capacity.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Page Size - Help

 The Page Size field displays the size of each page in the recovery log. This field is currently equal to 4096 bytes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Total Pages Assigned - Help

 The Total Pages Assigned field displays the total number of pages used by the recovery log. This amount is determined by dividing the Assigned Capacity by the Page Size.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Used Pages - Help

 The Used Pages field displays the number of pages used by the recovery log. This amount is determined by multiplying Current Utilization of Assigned Capacity by the Total Pages Assigned.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Current Utilization of Assigned Capacity - Help

 The Current Utilization of Assigned Capacity field displays the percent of Assigned Capacity used by the recovery log at the instant the data is displayed. This percent is determined by dividing Used Pages by Total Pages Assigned. This will normally be the same percent as Maximum Utilization of Assigned Capacity unless a large object has been deleted.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Maximum Utilization of Assigned Capacity - Help

 The Maximum Utilization of Assigned Capacity field displays the highest percent of Assigned Capacity used by the recovery log. This percent is the highest utilization of the recovery log since the last server invocation.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Recovery Log Volume Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties view for a recovery log volume. Use this notebook to add mirrored volumes to a recovery log volume and to view capacity information about the recovery log volume. You can also view the long name of the mirrored volumes or their status, and vary these volumes online or offline.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

Volumes

Shows the mirrored volumes defined for the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

Summary

Shows the volume capacity for the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

Volume 1

Shows the status of the first volume of the group of mirrored volumes and allows you to vary this volume online or offline.

Volume 2

Shows the status of the second volume of the group of mirrored volumes and allows you to vary this volume online or offline.

Volume 3

Shows the status of third volume of the group of mirrored volumes and allows you to vary this volume online or offline.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volumes - Help

 Use the Volumes section of the Recovery Log Properties notebook to add volumes to a group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 The Volumes section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Volumes page to view the long names of the mirrored volumes and to add volumes to the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for this page, select from the list below:

•  Volume 1

•  Volume 2

•  Volume 3

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume 1 - Help

 The Volume 1 field displays the name of the first volume of the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Volume 2 - Help

 Type a unique volume name for Volume 2 to add a new volume to a group of mirrored Recovery Log volumes.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Volume 2 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

      MVS - RLVOL2

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\RLVOL2.DSM

      VM - 192

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Volume 3 - Help

 Type a unique volume name for Volume 3 to add a new volume to a group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Volume 3 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/ads/rlvol3

      MVS -  RLVOL3

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\RLVOL3.DSM

      VM -  193

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Summary - Help

 Use the Summary section of the recovery log properties notebook to view information about the space capacity of a recovery log volume.

 The Summary section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Summary page to view available, allocated and free space for the recovery log volume.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for this page, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Allocated space

•  Free space

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Available Space - Help

 The Available Space field displays the logical space available on the recovery log volume. This amount is initialized when a recovery log volume is added.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Allocated Space - Help

 The Allocated Space field displays the amount of logical space on the recovery log volume currently being used by the Recovery Log.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Free Space - Help

 The Free Space field displays the amount of logical space on the recovery log volume that is currently not being used by the recovery log. This is determined by subtracting Allocated Space from Available Space.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Volume 1 - Help

 Use the Volume 1 section of the Recovery Log Properties notebook to view information about the first mirrored volume and to vary it online and offline.

 The Volume 1 section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Volume 1 page to view the status of Volume 1. You can also vary Volume 1 online or offline.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for Volume 1, select from the list below:

•  Volume name

•  Status

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume Name - Help

 The Volume Name field displays the name of a volume in the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Status - Help

 The Status field displays the current status of a mirrored volume. Status values are:

• Sync'd - The volume is synchronized with other volumes in the group of mirrored volumes.

• Stale - The volume is not yet synchronized with other volumes in the group of mirrored volumes.

• Offline - The volume has been made unavailable to ADSM by varying it offline.

• Not Def. - No volume has been defined.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Online - Help

 Select Vary Online to make the volume available to the recovery log. Use Vary Online to make a volume available after service has been performed on the device on which the volume resides. A volume is automatically made available by ADSM when it is added.

 A background process is started to synchronize the volumes if you Vary Online and the volume has data on it.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 The value of the vary radio button setting reflects the current state of the volume.

 Default:  Online


Offline - Help

 Select Vary Offline to make the volume unavailable to the recovery log. Use Vary Offline to make a volume unavailable in order to perform service on the device on which the volume resides. A volume is automatically varied offline by ADSM if there is a media failure on the device on which the volume resides.

 The value of the vary radio button setting reflects the current state of the volume.

 Default:  Online


Volume 2 - Help

 Use the Volume 2 section of the Recovery Log Properties notebook to view information about second mirrored volume and to vary the volume online and offline.

 The Volume 2 section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Volume 2 page to view the status of Volume 2. You can also vary Volume 2 online or offline.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for Volume 2, select from the list below:

•  Volume name

•  Status

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume 3 - Help

 Use the Volume 3 section of the Recovery Log Properties notebook to view information about the third mirrored volume and to vary the volume online and offline.

 The Volume 3 section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Volume 3 page to view the status of Volume 3. You can also vary Volume 3 online or offline.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for Volume 3, select from the list below:

•  Volume name

•  Status

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Recovery Log Add Volume - Help

Use this window to add a new volume to the recovery log and to optionally add one or two additional mirrored recovery log volumes. Enter a volume name in Volume 1 field. If you are also adding mirrored volumes, enter their names in the other volume fields.

 If you want to increase the size of the recovery log next, select Show Extend Window Next check box. After the volume is added, the recovery log Extend window will display to allow you to extend the size of the recovery log.

 Select the Add push button when the fields are filled in.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume 1 - Help

 Type a unique volume name in the Volume 1 field to add a volume to the Recovery Log.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 1 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol1

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.RLVOL1

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\RLVOL1.DSM

      VM - 191

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Volume 2 - Help

 Type a unique volume name in the Volume 2 field to add a mirrored volume to the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 2 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.RLVOL2

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\RLVOL2.DSM

      VM - 192

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Volume 3 - Help

 Type a unique volume name in the Volume 3 field to add a mirrored volume to the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 3 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol3

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.RLVOL3

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\RLVOL3.DSM

      VM - 193

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Show Extend Window Next - Help

 Select Show Extend Window Next to request that the Recovery Log Extend window be displayed after volumes are added.


Volume 2 - Help

 Type a unique volume name for Volume 2 to add a new volume to a group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 2 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.RLVOL2

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\RLVOL2.DSM

      VM - 192

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Volume 3 - Help

 Type a unique volume name for Volume 3 to add a new volume to a group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 3 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol3

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.RLVOL3

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\RLVOL3.DSM

      VM - 193

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Recovery Log Extend - Help

Use this window to increase the amount of usable space for the recovery log so you can store more data in the recovery log. Space utilization information is displayed. The recovery log assigned space will be updated.

 You can also increase the size of the recovery log after adding a volume or volumes to the Recovery Log.

 Storage can be extended in 4 MB increments. A recommended amount, which is equivalent to the Maximum Extension value, will be displayed in the Extend By field. If you enter an amount in other than 4 MB increments, the extension amount will be rounded up to the next highest 4 MB increment.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Select the Extend push button when the Extend By field is complete.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Assigned capacity

•  Utilized assigned capacity

•  Maximum extension

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Utilized Assigned Capacity - Help

 The Utilized Assigned Capacity field displays the amount of space containing data in the recovery log at the instant the data is displayed. This amount is determined by subtracting Maximum Reduction from Assigned Capacity.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Extend By - Help

 Type the amount of storage, in 4 MB increments, that you want to extend the recovery log by in the Extend By field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Extend By field can contain:

• 1 to 8 numbers

 Default:  The Maximum Extension amount

 Example:  24 (MB)

 Considerations:

• If you enter an amount in other than 4 MB increments, the extension amount will be rounded up to the next highest 4 MB increment.


Extend - Help

 Select Extend to increase the recovery log storage by the amount entered in the Extend By field.


Recovery Log Reduce - Help

Use this window to reduce the amount of usable space for the recovery log before you delete the last volume in a group of mirrored recovery log volumes. Space utilization information is displayed. The recovery log storage will be updated.

 Storage can be reduced in 4 MB increments. A recommended amount, which is equivalent to the Maximum Reduction value, will be displayed in the Reduce By field. If you enter an amount in other than 4 MB increments, the reduction amount will be rounded up to the next highest 4 MB increment.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Select the Reduce push button when the Reduce By field is complete.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Assigned capacity

•  Utilized assigned capacity

•  Maximum reduction

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reduce By - Help

 Type the amount of storage, in 4 MB increments, that you want to reduce the recovery log by in the Reduce By field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Reduce By field can contain:

• 1 to 8 numbers

 Default:  The Maximum Reduction amount

 Example:  12 (MB)

 Considerations:

• If you enter an amount in other than 4 MB increments, the reduction amount will be rounded up to the next highest 4 MB increment.


Reduce - Help

 Select Reduce to decrease the recovery log storage by the amount entered in the Reduce By field.


Volume 2 - Help

 Type a unique volume name in the Volume 2 field to add a mirrored volume to the group of mirrored database volumes.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 2 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/ads/dbvol2

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.DBVOL

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\DBVOL2.DSM

      VM - 192

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Volume 3 - Help

 Type a unique volume name in the Volume 3 field to add a mirrored volume to the group of mirrored database volumes.

 At least one of the volume fields must be filled in.

 The Volume 3 field can contain:

•  AIX - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name - case sensitive

•  MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

•  OS/2 - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  Windows - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

•  VM - 3 to 4 digit minidisk virtual address

 Example:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/dbvol3

      MVS - ADSM.BACKUP.DBVOL3

      OS/2, Windows - D:\ADSM\DBVOL3.DSM

      VM - 193

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• If a volume name already exists in this field, it cannot be updated.

• Ensure that the volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set, by formatting and reserving a VM minidisk, or by pre-allocating and formatting an AIX, OS/2, or Windows file using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

•  In the details view, a truncated name for each volume is displayed. If the volume name is longer than 17 characters, only the first 7 characters and the last 7 characters will be shown, separated by an ellipsis.

 Example: ADSM.MVS.DB.DBVOL21 would display as ADSM.MV...DBVOL21

• When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Volume 2 - Help

 The Volume 2 field displays the name of second volume of the group of mirrored database volumes.

 You can enter data in this field when it is empty. When data is entered in this field and accepted by ADSM, you cannot update it.


Volume 3 - Help

 The Volume 3 field displays the name of the third volume of the group of mirrored database volumes.

 You can enter data in this field when it is empty. When data is entered in this field and accepted by ADSM, you cannot update it.


Volume 2 - Help

 The Volume 2 field displays the name of second volume of the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 You can enter data in this field when it is empty. When data is entered in this field and accepted by ADSM, you cannot update it.


Volume 3 - Help

 The Volume 3 field displays the name of the third volume of the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.

 You can enter data in this field when it is empty. When data is entered in this field and accepted by ADSM, you cannot update it.


Database - Dump - Help

Use this window to copy the contents of the current database from ADSM to sequential access media. You can copy the database contents while the ADSM server is online.

 You can retrieve the database contents to store offline for recovery purposes.

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 You can access the Database Dump window from the File menu choice on the Database Properties view.

 To copy the contents of the current database to sequential access media:

1. Use the Estimated Size of Dump field to calculate the number of units (tape or optical disk) that are needed to hold the dump. Divide the estimated size by the capacity of a single sequential access media unit.

2. Select from the drop down list the Device Class to which you are copying the database.

3. Enter the list of volumes in the Volume Names field. If you are using offline media, then mount the first unit and reserve the other units as needed for tape or optical disk. Scratch volumes will only be used if there is not enough space to copy the database on the volumes specified.

4. Select the Dump push button to copy the contents of the database.

 Considerations:

• If the Can Use Scratch Media check box is selected, Volume Names are optional.

• Pre-label offline sequential access media to ensure the database is copied in order.

• If you use offline scratch media, be sure to label it in order.

• If you need to reload and synchronize the database for recovery purposes, refer to the DSMSERV LOADDB and DSMSERV AUDITDB commands in the ADSM Reference manual.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Estimated Size of Dump

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Estimated Size of Dump - Help

 The Estimated Size of Dump field displays the number of bytes that is currently occupied by the contents of the Database. The number of bytes in this field is calculated based  on the current size of the database, taking into consideration that one or more client backup processes may be in session at the time the database dump is being performed.

 Divide the number of bytes by the capacity of a single sequential access unit(reel, tape, cartridge or optical disk) to determine the number of units required to hold the database dump.

 This field can be refreshed by closing and then reopening the Database Dump window.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Dump - Help

 Select Dump to copy the contents of the current database tables to the sequential access media you have selected.


Dump - Help

Select Dump from the File menu to copy the contents of the current database from ADSM to sequential access media. You can copy the database contents while the ADSM server is online.

 You can retrieve the database contents to store offline for recovery purposes.

 This choice is always available.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class to which you want the database tables copied. The Device Class list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 A selection is required.

 You can select only one device class from the list.


Volume Names - Help

 Type specific volume names in the Volume Names field to indicate where you want to copy the contents of the database. Volume Names identifies the volumes that will hold the database contents offline until they are needed for recovery purposes.

 This field must be filled in if the Can Use Scratch Media check box is not selected.

 The Volume Names field can contain a list of volumes and you should use the convention for naming volumes for the device type for your platform:

• 1 to 1024 characters

 Initial value:  None

 Example:

 AIX  -  /usr/adsm/dump1,/usr/adsm/dump2

 OS/2, Windows  -  D:\ADSM\DUMP1.FIL,D:\ADSM\DUMP2.FIL

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in a Volume Name.

• If you use a list of volumes in this field, and the Can Use Scratch Media check box is selected, scratch volumes are only used if there is not enough space to copy the database to the volumes specified.


Can Use Scratch Media - Help

 Select Can Use Scratch Media to specify that you want to copy the contents of the database to any available sequential access media. If the Can Use Scratch Media check box is not selected, you must enter the volumes in the Volume Names field.

 Default:  On (use scratch media)


Database Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties view of the database. Use this notebook to view information to help you manage, backup, extend, reduce, and copy to a file information about the database.  You can also use this notebook to specify when ADSM automatically runs a full backup or incremental backup of the database.

 You can access the properties view from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows capacity and utilization information for the database.

Backup Trigger

Shows and allows you to change the settings for full and incremental backups.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Database Properties notebook to view information about the capacity and utilization of the database.

 The General section contains three pages of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•   Available space

•   Assigned capacity

•   Maximum extension

•   Maximum reduction

•   Page size

•   Total pages assigned

•   Used pages

•   Current utilization of assigned capacity

•   Maximum utilization of assigned capacity

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•   Physical Volumes

•   Buffer Pool Pages

•   Total Buffer Requests

•   Cache Hit

•   Cache Wait

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 3, select from the list below:

•   Incremental backup taken since last full backup

•   Changed since last backup

•   Percent changed

•   Last complete backup date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Backup Trigger - Help

Use the Backup Trigger section of the Database Properties notebook to specify when ADSM automatically runs a full backup or incremental backup of the database.

 The Backup Trigger section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Backup Trigger section to specify when ADSM will automatically backup the database.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Last updated by (administrator)

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Backup Database When Recovery Log Reaches - Help

 Enter the maximum percentage using the Backup Database When Recovery Log Reaches Percent Full spin buttons to specify the space used for the recovery log.  This is the point at which ADSM will perform an automatic backup of the database. ADSM deletes unnecessary recovery log records to ensure that the recovery log does not run out of space.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Backup Database When Recovery Log Reaches Percent Full field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 99

 Example:  50


Device Class For Backups - Help

 Use the Device Class for Full Backups list box to select the device class you want to use for full backups.  This list box specifies the classes  of sequential access media that are available.

 Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Device Class For Incremental Backups - Help

 Use the Device Class For Incremental Backups list box to select the device class you want to use for incremental backups. This list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available.

 Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Number of Incremental Backups per Backup Series - Help

 Enter the maximum number of incremental backups after which a full backup is required using the Number of Incremental Backups per Backup Series spin buttons.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Number of Incremental Backups per Backup Series field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 32

 Default:  6

 Example:  6


Incremental - Help

 Select Incremental to specify an incremental backup for the database.

 Each incremental backup of the database is added to the number of incremental backups run since the last full backup of the database.  The maximum number of incremental backups before a full backup is 32.

 Default:  On


Full - Help

 Select Full to specify a full backup of the database.  Each full backup of the database will reset the count for incremental backups to zero.

 A full backup is required the next time a backup is run when any of the following conditions are true:

•  The database has never been backed up

•  The maximum number of incremental backups allowed between full backups has been reached

•  The database has been extended or reduced

•  The mode setting in the Recovery Log Properties window was changed from Normal to Roll Forward

 Default:  Off


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class you want to use for backups. This list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available.

 Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can select only one device class from the list.

 This field is required.


Volume Names - Help

 Type the name of the volume or volumes you want to use for the backup in the Volume Names field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• AIX, OS/2, Windows - 1 to 1024 characters

• MVS - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

    AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

    MVS - rlvol2

    OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\rlvol2.dsm

 Considerations:

•  Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.


Backup - Help

 Select Backup to backup the contents of the database.


Recovery Log Volumes - Help

The Recovery Log Volumes object contains groups of mirrored recovery log volumes. Open Recovery Log Volumes to copy information about the recovery log volume to a file, add new mirrored volumes, delete mirrored volumes, and view information about the mirrored recovery log volumes.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Recovery Log Volumes:

•   Details

•   Properties


Database Volumes - Help

The Database Volumes object contains database volumes and, if applicable, groups of mirrored database volumes. Open Database Volumes to copy information about the database volume to a file, add new mirrored volumes, delete mirrored volumes, or view information about the mirrored database volumes.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Database Volumes:

•   Details

•   Properties


Normal - Help

 Select Normal to specify that ADSM save only those records required to restore the database if a system failure occurs.

 Use Normal if you do not wish to dedicate the large amount of recovery log disk space needed for roll forward recovery.

 Default:  On


Roll Forward - Help

 Select Roll Forward to specify that ADSM save all recovery log records that contain changes made to the database since the last time the database was backed up.  This setting ensures that the database is restored to its most current state.

 ADSM deletes any unnecessary recovery log records whenever the database is backed up.

 To restore a single database volume, roll-forward recovery is required.

 Default:  Off


Backup - Help

Select Backup to copy the contents of the database to a specific sequential device class for protection and recovery purposes.

 This choice is only available on servers that support database Backup.


Database Backup - Help

Use this window to backup the database to sequential access storage media.  You can choose from two types of backups:

 Full Backup

 Copies the entire database

 Incremental Backup

 Copies only those database pages that have been added or have changed since the last time the database was backed up

 To backup the database:

1.  Open the Database object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The properties view of the database displays.

2.  Select the File menu choice and then select Backup from the menu list.  The Database Backup window displays.

3.  Select the Incremental or Full radio button in the Type of Backup to Perform section, depending on which type of backup you want to perform. Incremental is the default setting.

4.  Select the device class to use for the backup in the Device Class combination box.

5.  Type the name of one or more volumes to use for the backup in the Volumes Names field.  For multiple volumes, separate each volume name in the list with a comma.  Do not separate the volume names with a space.  If you choose not to enter a volume list, the server will use scratch volumes for the backup.

6.  Select the Backup push button.

 Considerations:

• The maximum number of incremental backups you can perform before running a full backup is 32.

• Each full backup resets the count for incremental backups to zero.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Physical Volumes - Help

 The Physical Volumes field displays the number of physical volumes assigned to the Database.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Buffer Pool Pages - Help

 The Buffer Pool Pages field displays the number of pages in the database buffer pool. The database buffer pool provides cache storage, which allows the database pages to remain in memory for longer periods of time.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Total Buffer Requests - Help

 The Total Buffer Requests field displays the cumulative number of requests for database pages since the server was last started or since the last reset of the buffer pool.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Cache Hit - Help

 The Cache Hit field displays, as a percentage, the number of requests for cached database pages in the database buffer pool that were not read from disk.

 A high cache hit percentage indicates that the size of your database buffer pool is adequate.

 This is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Cache Wait - Help

 The Cache Wait field displays, as a percentage, the number of requests for cached database pages in the database buffer pool that were not read from disk.

 When the cache wait percentage is above 0 percent, increase the size of the database buffer pool.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Changed Pages - Help

 The Changed Pages field displays database pages that have changed since the last backup.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Database Properties notebook to view information about the capacity and utilization of the database.

 The General section contains three pages of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Assigned capacity

•  Maximum extension

•  Maximum reduction

•  Page size

•  Total pages assigned

•  Used pages

•  Current utilization of assigned capacity

•  Maximum utilization of assigned capacity

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Physical Volumes

•  Buffer Pool Pages

•  Total Buffer Requests

•  Cache Hit

•  Cache Wait

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 3, select from the list below:

•  Incremental backups taken since last full backup

•  Database backup in progress?

•  Type of database backup in progress

•  Changed since last backup

•  Percentage changed

•  Last complete backup date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Enabled - Help

 Select Enabled to specify that ADSM run backups automatically.

 Default:  Enabled


Disabled - Help

 Select Disabled to specify that ADSM not run backups automatically.

 Default:  Enabled


Recovery Log Properties - Help

This window displays the properties view of the recovery log. Use this window to view information about the capacity and utilization of the recovery log and to set the recovery log mode for backup purposes. From this window you can also extend or reduce the recovery log and copy to a file information about the recovery log.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Assigned capacity

•  Maximum extension

•  Maximum reduction

•  Page size

•  Total pages assigned

•  Used pages

•  Current utilization of assigned capacity

•  Maximum utilization of assigned capacity

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Recovery Log Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties view of the Recovery Log.  Use this notebook to view information about the capacity and utilization of the Recovery Log.  You can also use this notebook to view information to help you manage the Recovery Log, extend or reduce the Recovery Log and copy to a file information about the Recovery Log.

 You can access the properties view by selecting the Recovery Log icon from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.

 Tab for this notebook:

General

Shows capacity and utilization information of the recovery log.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Recovery Log Properties notebook to view information about the capacity and utilization of the Recovery Log.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Assigned capacity

•  Maximum extension

•  Maximum reduction

•  Page size

•  Total pages assigned

•  Used pages

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Current utilization of assigned capacity

•  Maximum utilization of assigned capacity

•  Physical Volumes

•  Log pool pages

•  Log pool utilization

•  Log pool wait

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Recovery Log Properties notebook to view information about the capacity and utilization of the Recovery Log.

 The General section contains three pages of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Available space

•  Assigned capacity

•  Maximum extension

•  Maximum reduction

•  Page size

•  Total pages assigned

•  Used pages

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Current utilization of assigned capacity

•  Maximum utilization of assigned capacity

•  Physical Volumes

•  Log pool pages

•  Log pool utilization

•  Log pool wait

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 3, select from the list below:

•  Cumulative consumption

•  Consumption reset date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Log Pool Pages - Help

The Log Pool Pages field displays the number of pages in the recovery log buffer pool.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Log Pool Utilization - Help

The Log Pool Utilization field displays the percentage of pages in the recovery log buffer pool, that were used to write changes to the recovery log.

A low percentage indicates that the size of your recovery log buffer pool is adequate.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Log Pool Wait - Help

The Log Pool Wait field displays the percentage of requests for a page that is not available because all pages are waiting to write to the recovery log.

If the percentage value is greater than 0.0, increase the size of the recovery log buffer pool.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Cumulative Consumption - Help

The Cumulative Consumption field displays the amount of recovery log space that has been consumed since the last time the recovery log was reset.  The consumption amount is a cumulative measure in megabytes, corresponding to the amount of log space used by the server.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Consumption Reset Date/Time - Help

 The Consumption Reset Date/Time field displays the date and time when the counter for cumulative consumption of the recovery log space was last reset.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Incremental Backups Taken - Help

 The Incremental Backups Taken Since Last Full Backup field displays the number of incremental backups that have been run since the last time a full backup of the database was performed.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Database Backup in Progress? - Help

 The Database Backup in Progress? field displays either a Yes or No to indicate whether a backup is currently in progress.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Type of Database Backup in Progress - Help

 The Type of Database Backup in Progress field displays the type of backup being performed on the database.  There are two types of backup: incremental backup or full backup.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Changed Since Last Backup - Help

 The Changed Since Last Backup field displays the amount of utilized space that has changed since the last backup, in megabytes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Percent Changed - Help

 The Percent Changed field displays the amount of utilized space that has changed since the last backup, in percentage.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Completed Backup Date/Time - Help

 The Last Complete Backup Date/Time field displays the date and time when the last complete backup of the database was made.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update Date/Time - Help

 The Last Update Date/Time field displays the date and time when the backup trigger information was last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update By (Administrator) - Help

 The Last Update By (Administrator) field displays the name of the last administrator who updated the information and parameters for the backup trigger operation.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Database Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Adding Mirrored Volumes to the Database

•   Backing up the Database

•   Decreasing the Size of the Database

•   Increasing the Size of the Database

•   Printing Database Information

•   Varying Database Volumes Online or Offline

•   Viewing Database Information


Increasing the Size of the Database - Help

You can increase the size of the database by adding mirrored volumes. A group of mirrored database volumes consists of up to three mirrored volumes. You can add Volume 1 only, or Volume 1 plus one or two mirrored volumes. Then you can extend the size of the database.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each database volume you are adding:

• Names of the predefined formatted or allocated volumes you are adding

• Amount of storage in 4 MB increments by which you want to extend the database

 To increase the size of the database,  expand  the Database object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored database volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Add Volume from the Edit menu. The Database Add Volume window displays.

 Step 3 	 Type the volume name in the Volume 1 field to create the database volume. You can also add the other mirrored volumes by typing the volume names in Volume 2 and/or Volume 3 fields.

 Step 4 	 Select the Show Extend Window Next check box if you want to extend the database next. The Show Extend Window Next check box is in a selected state as the default.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the group of mirrored Database volumes to the database. The Database Extend window displays so you can extend the database now.

 Step 6 	 On the Database Extend window, enter in the Extend By field the amount of storage by which you want to extend the database.  You can use the recommended Maximum Extension amount that is displayed in the Extend By field, or type another amount in 4 MB increments in this field.

 Step 7 	 Select the Extend push button to extend the database.

 Considerations

• Each volume must have a unique name.

• Extend the Database in 4 MB increments.

• You can also extend the database by selecting Extend from the File menu properties view.

• If you are adding several database volumes, it is advisable to defer extending the database until all the volumes have been added.

•  When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored database volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.

•  If you are using the database backup function and you extend the Database, you will need to perform a full backup the next time you backup the database.


Adding Mirrored Volumes to the Database - Help

You can add one or two volumes to a group of mirrored Database volumes to ensure adequate recovery in the event of a media failure. A mirrored volume can be added to an existing database volume.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each mirrored volume you are adding:

• Names of the predefined formatted or allocated volumes you are adding

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To add mirrored volumes to the database,  expand  the Database object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored database volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Locate and select the database volume that you want to work with. You must know the name of at least one mirrored volume in the group of mirrored volumes to locate it.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu, and then select Add Volume The Database Add Mirrored Volume window displays.

 Step 4 	 On the Database Add Mirrored Volume window, type the volume name in Volume 2 and/or Volume 3 fields for the additional volumes you want to add.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the volumes to the group of mirrored database volumes.  Initially, the volumes will have a status of Stale, but will eventually become synchronized with the other mirrored volumes.

 Considerations

• Each volume must have a unique name.

• You can also define mirrored volumes when you initially create the database volume. See:  Increasing the Size of the Database

• You can also add mirrored volumes to a selected database volume when you select the Open as Properties window from the File menu. Enter the names of the mirrored volumes on the Volumes page of the notebook, then select Apply to add the mirrored volumes to the database.

•  When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored database volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown can change.

• A group of mirrored volumes can contain up to three mirrored volumes.


Decreasing the Size of the Database - Help

You can delete any one of the mirrored volumes from a group of mirrored database volumes, or you can delete all volumes in the group. You do not have to reduce the database unless you are deleting the last volume in the group.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each volume you are deleting:

• Name of the database volume and its mirrored volumes

• Amount of storage in 4 MB increments by which you want to reduce the database

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To decrease the size of the database:

 Step 1 	 If you are deleting the last mirrored volume in the group of mirrored Database volumes, you need to first reduce the Database.  The next three steps describe this procedure.  Otherwise, proceed to Step 6.

 Step 2 	 Open the Database object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The properties view of the database displays.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Reduce.  The Database Reduce window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the amount of storage by which you want to reduce the database in the Reduce By field. You can use the recommended Maximum Reduction amount that is displayed in the Reduce By field or type another amount in 4 MB increments in this field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Reduce push button to reduce the database. Close the properties view when the process completes.

 Step 6 	 Expand the Database object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window, and then open the Database Volumes object. A window that contains groups of mirrored database volumes displays.

 Step 7 	 Locate the database volume and its mirrored volumes that you want to work with.

 Step 8 	 From the Edit menu, either select Delete Volume 1, Delete Volume 2, Delete Volume 3 to delete a particular mirrored volume, or select Delete All Selected Volumes to delete all volumes in the group.

 Step 9 	 When the confirmation message appears, confirm the delete. Select the Delete push button from the Mirrored Volume Delete message window to remove the specified mirrored volumes.

 Considerations

• Reduce the database in 4 MB increments.

• If you delete the last volume in a group of mirrored database volumes, the database must be reduced by at least the size of this last volume.

•  When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored database volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.

•  If you are using database backup and the mode setting in the Recovery Log properties window is set to Roll Forward, you must first change the setting to Normal before you can reduce the database.  Note that changing this setting means that you will lose the ability to restore the database to its most current state.  Restoring to a specific point in time will still be possible.  Additionally, when you set the mode back to Roll Forward, you need to run a full backup the next time you backup the database.


Varying Database Volumes Online or Offline - Help

You can make a database mirrored volume available or unavailable for maintenance, by varying it online or offline.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each volume you want to vary:

• Names of the mirrored volumes you are working with

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To vary a volume online or offline,  expand  the Database object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored database volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Locate and select the mirrored volumes you want to vary online or offline. Select Open as Properties from the File menu. On the Properties window, select the volume you want to vary.

 Step 3 	 Select the Vary Online or Offline radio button.

 Step 4 	 Select the Apply push button to complete the action.  Close the window when the process completes.

 Step 5 	 You can view Volume Set 1 Status, Volume Set 2 Status, or Volume Set 3 Status fields in the Database Details view to verify the current status of the volumes.

 Considerations

• A volume is automatically varied online when it is added.

• A volume is automatically varied offline by ADSM if there is a media problem. Remember to vary the volume online again after the problem is resolved.

• Vary a volume offline if the device requires service. Remember to vary the volume online again after the volume is available.

• You can also view the status of the volume by reopening the Properties view for the database volume and tabbing to the mirrored volume for which you want to check the status.


Viewing Database Information - Help

You can view the details for all or selected database volumes or the properties of a particular database volume. You can also view the properties of the database.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for viewing database information:

•   Viewing Database Volumes

•   Viewing the Properties of the Database


Printing Database Information - Help

You can copy information to a file for printing of the details view of all or selected database volumes and the properties view of a particular database volume. You can also copy to a file the properties view of the database.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for copying to a file for printing:

•   Printing All Database Volumes in a Details View

•   Printing Selected Database Volumes in a Details View

•   Printing the Properties of a Database Volume

•   Printing the Properties of the Database


Printing All Database Volumes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all database volumes in the details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy all the database volumes,  expand  the Database object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored database volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Select All from the Edit menu choice.

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu choice. The Database-Print to File window for details displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to which you want to copy the information in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the database information appended to an existing file. (Append is the default selection.)

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the details of all database volumes to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Database Volumes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected database volumes in the details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the database volumes you are copying to a file:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

• The name of at least one volume in the group of mirrored database volumes

 To copy selected database volumes,  expand  the Database object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Select the Database Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  Then select Open from the File menu choice.  A window that contains groups of database volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected database volumes, select the database volumes in the details view that you want to copy. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File. The Database-Print to File window for details displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to which you want to copy the information in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is the default selection.)

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the details of selected database volumes to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Printing the Properties of the Database - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Database Properties view. The file will contain the same information that is shown in the Database Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy the properties view of the database:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  The Properties view of the database displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties view. The Database Properties-Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to which you want to copy the information in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is the default selection.)

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the properties of the database to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Viewing Database Volumes - Help

You can use the details view to view the names and status of each volume in the database. To view additional information about a particular volume, open the properties view for that database volume.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for database volume sets:

• The name of at least one volume in a group of mirrored database volumes

 To view the details of all or selected database volumes,  expand  the Database object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored database volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 You can view information about all or selected database volumes, by scrolling through the details view. The details view will display the mirrored volumes that make up a group of mirrored database volumes horizontally and the volume sets vertically.

 Step 3 	 Locate and select the database volumes you want to view additional information about.

 Step 4 	 Select Open as Properties from the File menu. The properties window displays. Tab to the Summary section to view the properties for the volume. You can also tab to the volume sections to view the status of each mirrored volume. If you select multiple database volumes, multiple windows will display.

 Considerations

• Long volume names are abbreviated on the Database Icons and the Database Details view. To view the long volume name for each mirrored volume, open the properties view for the selected database volume.


Viewing the Properties of the Database - Help

You can view the properties information about the database. This information includes capacity and utilization statistics which you can use to manage the database.

 To view the properties view of the Database:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  The properties view of the database displays.


Printing the Properties of a Database Volume - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the database volume properties view. The file will contain the same information that is shown in the properties notebook for the database volume. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the database volumes you are copying to a file:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

• The name of at least one volume in the group of mirrored database volumes

 To copy the properties view of a database volume,  expand  the Database object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored database volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the database volumes whose properties you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Properties view of the database volume displays. If you select multiple database volumes, multiple windows display.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Database-Print to File window for properties displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to which you want to copy the information in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is the default selection.)

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the properties of the database volume to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Recovery Log Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Adding Mirrored Volumes to the Recovery Log

•   Decreasing the Size of the Recovery Log

•   Increasing the Size of the Recovery Log

•   Printing Recovery Log Information

•   Varying Recovery Log Volumes Online or Offline

•   Viewing Recovery Log Information


Increasing the Size of the Recovery Log - Help

A group of mirrored recovery Log volumes consists of up to three mirrored volumes and is used to manage the recovery log. You can add Volume 1 only, or Volume 1 plus one or two mirrored volumes. Then you can extend the size of the recovery log.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each recovery log volume you are adding:

• Names of the predefined formatted or allocated volumes you are adding

• Amount of storage in 4 MB increments by which you want to extend the recovery log

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To increase the size of the recovery log,  expand  the Database Recovery Log object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Recovery Log Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored recovery log volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Add Volume from the Edit menu. The Recovery Log Add Volume window displays.

 Step 3 	 Type the Volume Name in the Volume 1 field to create the recovery log volume. You can also add the other mirrored volumes by typing the volume names in the Volume 2 and/or Volume 3 fields.

 Step 4 	 Select the Show Extend Window Next check box if you want to extend the recovery log next. The Show Extend Window Next check box is in a selected state as the default.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the group of mirrored recovery log volumes to the recovery log. The Recovery Log Extend window displays so you can extend the recovery log now.

 Step 6 	 On the Recovery Log Extend window, enter in the Extend By field the amount of storage by which you want to extend the recovery log.  You can use the recommended Maximum Extension amount which is displayed in the Extend By field or type another amount in 4 MB increments in this field.

 Step 7 	 Select the Extend push button to extend the recovery log.

 Considerations

• Each volume must have a unique name.

• Extend the recovery log in 4 MB increments.

• You can also extend the recovery log by selecting Extend from the File menu in the Details or Properties views.

• If you are adding several recovery log volumes, it is advisable to defer extending the recovery log until all the volumes have been added.

•  When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored Recovery Log volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.


Adding Mirrored Volumes to Recovery Log - Help

You can add one or two volumes to a group of mirrored recovery log volumes to ensure adequate recovery in the event of a media failure. A mirrored volume can be added to an existing recovery log volume.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each mirrored volume you are adding:

• Names of the predefined formatted or allocated volumes you are adding

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To add mirrored volumes to the recovery log,  expand  the Database Recovery Log object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Recovery Log Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored recovery log volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Locate and select the recovery log volume that you want to work with. You must know the name of at least one mirrored volume in the group of mirrored volumes to locate it.

 Step 3 	 Select Add Volume from the Edit menu. The Recovery Log Add Mirrored Volume window displays.

 Step 4 	 On the Recovery Log Add Mirrored Volume window, type the Volume Name in the Volume 2 and/or Volume 3 fields for the additional volumes you want to add.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the volumes to the group of mirrored recovery log volumes.  Initially, the volumes will have a status of Stale, but will eventually become synchronized with the other mirrored volumes.

 Considerations

• Each volume must have a unique name.

• You can also define mirrored volumes when you initially create the recovery log volume. See:  Increasing the Size of the Recovery Log

• You can also add mirrored volumes to a selected recovery log volume when you select the Open the Properties window from the File menu. Enter the names of the mirrored volumes on the Volumes page of the notebook, then select Apply to add the mirrored volumes to the recovery log.

•  When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored recovery log volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.

• A group of mirrored volumes can contain up to three mirrored volumes.


Decreasing the Size of the Recovery Log - Help

You can delete any one of the mirrored volumes from a group of mirrored recovery log volumes, or you can delete all volumes in the group. You do not have to reduce the recovery log unless you are deleting the last volume in the group.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each volume you are deleting:

• Name of the recovery log volume and its mirrored volumes

• Amount of storage in 4 MB increments by which you want to reduce recovery log

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To decrease the size of the recovery log:

 Step 1 	 If you are deleting the last mirrored volume in the group of mirrored Recovery Log volumes, you need to first reduce the recovery log. The next three steps describe this procedure.  Otherwise, proceed to Step 6.

 Step 2 	 Open the Database Recovery Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The properties view of the recovery log displays.

 Step 3 	 Select Reduce from the File menu.

 Step 4 	 On the Recovery Log Reduce window, type the amount of storage by which you want to reduce the recovery log in the Reduce By field. You can use the recommended Maximum Reduction amount which is displayed in the Reduce By field or type another amount in 4 MB increments in this field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Reduce push button to reduce the recovery log. Close the properties view when the process completes.

 Step 6 	  Expand  the Database Recovery Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window, and then open the Recovery Log Volumes object. A window that contains groups of mirrored recovery log volumes displays.

 Step 7 	 Locate the recovery log volume and its mirrored volumes that you want to work with.

 Step 8 	 From the Edit menu, you can either select Delete Volume 1, Delete Volume 2, Delete Volume 3 to delete a particular mirrored volume, or you can select Delete All Selected Volumes to delete all volumes in the group.

 Step 9 	 When the confirmation message appears, confirm the delete. Select Delete push button from the Mirrored Volume Delete message window to remove the specified mirrored volumes.

 Considerations

• Reduce the recovery log in 4 MB increments.

• If you delete the last volume in a group of mirrored recovery log volumes, the recovery log must be reduced by at least the size of this last volume.

•  When volumes are added to or deleted from a group of mirrored recovery log volumes, the order in which the volumes are shown may change.

•  If you are using database backup and the mode setting in the recovery log properties window is set to Roll Forward, you must first change the setting to Normal before you can reduce the recovery log.  Note that changing this setting means that you will lose the ability to restore the database to its most current state.  Restoring to a specific point in time will still be possible.  Additionally, when you set the mode back to Roll Forward, you need to run a full backup the next time you backup the database.


Varying Recovery Log Volumes Online or Offline - Help

You can make a recovery log mirrored volume available or unavailable for maintenance by varying it online or offline.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each volume you want to vary:

• Names of the mirrored volumes you are working with

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To vary a volume online or offline,  expand  the Database Recovery Log object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Recovery Log Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored recovery log volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Locate and select the mirrored volumes you want to vary online or offline. Select Open as Properties from the File menu. On the Properties window, tab to the volume you want to vary.

 Step 3 	 Select the Vary Online or Offline radio button.

 Step 4 	 Select Apply to complete the action.

 Step 5 	 You can view Volume Set 1 Status, Volume Set 2 Status or Volume Set 3 Status fields on the Recovery Log Details window to verify the current status of the volumes.

 Considerations

• A volume is automatically varied online when it is added.

• A volume is automatically varied offline by ADSM if there is a media problem. Remember to vary the volume online again after the problem is resolved.

• Vary a volume offline if the device requires service. Remember to vary the volume online again after the volume is available.

• You can also view the status of the volume by reopening the properties view for the recovery log volume and tabbing to the mirrored volume for which you want to check the status.


Viewing Recovery Log Information - Help

You can view the details for all or selected recovery log volumes or the properties of a particular recovery log volume. You can also view the properties of the recovery log.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for viewing recovery log information:

•   Viewing Recovery Log Volumes

•   Viewing the Properties of the Recovery Log


Printing Recovery Log Information - Help

You can copy information to a file for printing of the details view of all or selected recovery log volumes and the properties view of a particular recovery log volume. You can also copy to a file the properties view of the recovery log.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for copying to a file for printing:

•   Printing All Recovery Log Volumes in a Details View

•   Printing Selected Recovery Log Volumes in a Details View

•   Printing the Properties of a Recovery Log Volume

•   Printing the Properties of the Recovery Log


Printing All Recovery Log Volumes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all recovery log volumes in the details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy all the recovery log volumes,  expand  the Database Recovery Log object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Recovery Log Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored recovery log volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and the select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list. The Recovery Log-Print to File window for details displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to which you want to copy the information in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the recovery log information appended to an existing file. (Append is the default selection.)

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the details of all recovery log volumes to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Recovery Log Volumes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected recovery log volumes in the details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the recovery log volumes you are copying to a file:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

• The name of at least one volume in the group of mirrored recovery log volumes

 To copy selected recovery log volumes:

 Step 1 	 Select the Database Recovery Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  Then select Open from the File menu choice.  A window that contains groups of mirrored recovery log volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected recovery log volumes, select the recovery log volumes in the details view that you want to copy. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File. The Recovery Log-Print to File window for details displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to which you want to copy the information in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is the default selection.)

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the details of selected recovery log volumes to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Printing the Properties of the Recovery Log - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Recovery Log Properties view. The file will contain the same information that is shown in the Recovery Log Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy the properties view of the recovery log:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database Recovery Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  The properties view of the recovery log displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties view.  The Recovery Log Properties-Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to which you want to copy the information in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is the default selection.)

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the properties of the recovery log to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Viewing Recovery Log Volumes - Help

You can use the Details view to view the names and status of each volume in the recovery log. To view additional information about a particular volume, open the properties view for that recovery log volume.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for recovery log volume sets:

• The name of at least one volume in a group of mirrored recovery log volumes

 To view the details of all or selected recovery log volumes,  expand  the Database Recovery Log object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Recovery Log Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored recovery log volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 You can view information about all or selected recovery log volumes, by scrolling through the details view. The details view will display the mirrored volumes that make up a group of mirrored recovery log volumes horizontally and the volume sets vertically.

 Step 3 	 Locate and select the recovery log volumes you want to view additional information about.

 Step 4 	 Select Open as Properties from the File menu. The properties window displays. Tab to the Summary section to view the properties for the volume. You can also tab to the volume sections to view the status of each mirrored volume. If you select multiple recovery log volumes, multiple windows will display.

 Considerations

• Long volume names are abbreviated on the Recovery Log Details view. To view the long volume name for each mirrored volume, open the properties view for the selected recovery log volume.


Viewing the Properties of the Recovery Log - Help

You can view the properties information about the recovery log. This information includes capacity and utilization statistics which you can use to manage the recovery log.

 To view the Properties view of the recovery log:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database Recovery Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  The properties view of the recovery log displays. You can view capacity and utilization information about the recovery log.


Printing the Properties of a Recovery Log Volume - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Recovery Log volume properties view. The file will contain the same information that is shown in the properties notebook for the Recovery Log volume. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the Recovery Log volumes you are copying to a file:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

• The name of at least one volume in the group of mirrored Recovery Log volumes

 To copy the properties view of a Recovery Log volume,  expand  the Database Recovery Log object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Recovery Log Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains groups of mirrored Recovery Log volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Recovery Log volumes whose properties you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Properties view of the Recovery Log volume displays. If you select multiple Recovery Log volumes, multiple windows display.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Recovery Log-Print to File window for properties displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to which you want to copy the information in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is the default selection.)

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the properties of the Recovery Log volume to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Backing Up the Database - Help

You can backup your ADSM database to sequential access volumes. Choose from two types of backups:

 Full Backup

 Copies the entire database

 Incremental Backup

 Copies only those database pages that have been added or have changed since the last time the database was backed up

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The sequential access device class to use for the backup

 To perform a full or incremental backup of the database:

 Step 1 	 Open the Database object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The properties view of the database displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the File menu choice and then select Backup from the menu list.  The Database Backup window displays.

 Step 3 	 Select the Incremental or Full radio button in the Type of Backup to Perform section, depending on which type of backup you want. Incremental is the default value.

 Step 4 	 Select the device class to use for the backup in the Device Class combination box.

 Step 5 	 Type name of one or more volumes to use for the backup in the Volumes Names field.  For multiple volumes, separate each volume name in the list with a comma.  Do not separate the volume names with a space.  If you choose not to specify volumes in this field, the server will use scratch volumes for the backup.

 Step 6 	 Select the Backup push button.

 Considerations

• The maximum number of incremental backups you can run before running a full backup is 32.

• Each full backup resets the count for incremental backups to zero.


Backing Up the Database Automatically - Help

You can instruct ADSM to automatically run a full or incremental backup of the Database when the Recovery Log reaches a given size.  This function is only available on servers that support database backup.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The sequential access device class to use for the backup

 To automatically backup the Database:

 Step 1 	 If the mode setting in the Recovery Log properties view is set to Roll Forward, then skip to Step 3.

 Otherwise, open the Database Recovery Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The properties view of the Recovery Log displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Roll Forward in the Mode for Saving Recovery Log Records section, and then select the Apply push button. Close the Recovery Log view when the process completes.

 Step 3 	 Open the Database object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The properties view of the Database displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Backup Trigger tab to display the current settings for automatic backups.

 Step 5 	 Select Enabled in the Backup Trigger Status section.

 Step 6 	 Specify the percentage of space used in the Recovery Log after which ADSM performs a backup by using the Backup When Recovery Log Reaches Percent Full spin buttons. You can set a value from 1 to 99.

 Step 7 	 Select the sequential access device class to use for backups in the Device Class for Backups list box.

 Step 8 	 Select the sequential access device class to use for incremental backups in the Device Class for Incremental Backups list box. This field is optional; if you do not specify a value here, all backups are run using the value set in the Device Class for Backups list box.

 Step 9 	 Specify the number of incremental backups that can be run before a full backup is performed by using the Number of Incremental Backups per Backup Series spin buttons.

 Step 10 	 Select the Apply push button to record the settings.

 Considerations

• The Recovery Log mode must be set to Roll Forward in order to perform automatic backups.

• After ADSM completes a backup, ADSM deletes all Recovery Log records except those required to restore the Database to its most current state.

• Unless a full backup is required, ADSM runs an incremental backup.


Nodes - Help

The Nodes object contains all of the nodes registered with the ADSM server. When you open this object, a window displays with the client nodes.

 The Nodes object opens to a Details view.  Use the view to register, update, remove, or query information for one or more nodes.

 Related Information

•  Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of the Nodes:

•  Details


Nodes Include - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the nodes you want displayed in the details view.

 To include filtered nodes in the view:

1.  Type in the node name (with or without wildcards) in the Node Name field.

2.  Select from the list, or type in, the policy domain name in the Policy Domain field.

3.  Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Nodes Details - Help

This window displays information about each node. Use this window to select the node or nodes you want to work with. From this window you can create new nodes, delete existing nodes, or select nodes to update or view.

 Data Columns

Node Name

Displays the name of the node.

Platform

Displays the operating system used by the node. For example, OS/2, AIX, or PC/DOS.  If a question mark (?) is displayed in this field, the node has never connected to the server and the server does not know the operating environment for the node.

Domain

Displays the name of the policy domain to which the node belongs.

Days Since Access

Displays the number of days that have elapsed since the node accessed the ADSM server.

Days Since Password Set

Displays the number of days that have elapsed since a new password was set for the node.

Locked

Displays "yes" if the node has access to the ADSM server, "no" if not.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. If you select multiple nodes and then select Open as Properties from the Selected menu, multiple windows are opened for processing.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Node

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node - Help

Each Node object represents an ADSM node. Select the node object you want to work with. You can open the properties view of a node to update, or view information about the node.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a Node:

•  Properties


Node Name - Help

 Type the name of the node in the Node Name field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Node Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  JSMITH

 Considerations:

• Node names must be unique.

• A node name cannot contain spaces.

• The asterisk (*) wildcard character can only be used when you specify the criteria for Include.


Password - Help

 Type the node password in the Password field. The node password is the character string that must be entered before ADSM services can be requested from the node.

 This field must be filled in if you are registering a new node.

 The Password can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  If byebye is entered as a password, the Password field will display ******.

 Considerations:

• The Password field is a protected field.  When you enter a character in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.


New Password - Help

 Type a new password in the New Password field.  Use this field to specify a new password for the object.

 This field must be filled in if you want to change the current password for an object.

 The New Password field can contain:

•  1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  admin01

 Considerations:

• The New Password field is a protected field.  When you enter a character in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.

• When you enter a new password in the New Password field, you must enter the same password in the Reenter New Password field.


Contact Information - Help

 Type any additional contact information, such as a telephone number or electronic address, in the Contact Information field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Contact Information field can contain:

• Any character

 Default:  Blank for new entry or last saved contact information for existing entry.

 Example:  Administrator for M47 - contact Shirley Jones at 9-1111

 Considerations:

• If quotes are used in this field, they must be balanced.


Policy Domain - Help

 Type the name of the policy domain to which the node is assigned to in the Policy Domain field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Policy Domain field can contain:

• The name of any policy domain defined to ADSM

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example: PD1

 Considerations:

• A policy domain name cannot contain spaces.

• A node must be assigned to one and only one policy domain.

• If the name entered is not the name of a policy domain defined to ADSM, the node will automatically be assigned to the default policy domain, STANDARD.


Always - Help

 Select Always to indicate that data sent to the server should always be compressed. If Always is selected, data will be compressed even if compression is not specified in the client options file.

 Initial Setting:  Client determined


Never - Help

 Select Never to indicate that data sent to the server should never be compressed. If Never is selected, data will not be compressed even if compression is specified in the client options file.

 Initial Setting:  Client determined


Client Determined - Help

 Select Client determined to indicate that data sent to the server should be compressed if compression is specified in the client options file. If compression is not specified in the client options file, data sent to the server should not be compressed.

 Initial Setting:  Client determined


Platform - Help

 The Platform field displays the type of operating system used by the node.

 Examples of platforms are:

• OS/2

• AIX

• PC/DOS

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.

 If a question mark (?) is displayed in this field, the node has never connected to the server and the server does not know the operating environment for the node.


Last Access - Help

 The Last Access field displays the date and time that the node last accessed the server.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Password Update - Help

 The Last Password Update field displays the date and time that the password for the node was last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Reenter New Password - Help

 Type the new password in the Reenter New Password field. This field must contain the exact character sequence entered in the New Password field.

 This field must be filled in if you are updating your current password.

 The Reenter New Password field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  If byebye is entered, the Reenter New Password field will display ******.

 Considerations:

• This field is a protected field.  When you enter a character in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.

• When you enter a new password in the New Password field, you must enter the same password in the Reenter New Password field.


Can Delete Archive Data - Help

 Select Can Delete Archive Data to give the client user of a node the authority to delete archive files.


Can Delete Backup Data - Help

 Select Can Delete Backup Data to give the client user of a node the authority to delete backup files.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Node Properties notebook to view or update the properties of a node.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the  General section to view or update information for a node.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to view information about a node.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Platform

•  Last access

•  Days since last access

•  Registered on

•  Registered by

•  Days since password set

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Password - Help

 Use the Password section of the Node Properties notebook to change, or update the password for a node.

 The Password section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Last password update

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Filespace - Help

 Use the Filespace section of the Node Properties notebook to authorize the user of a node to delete archived and, or, backed up copies of their files.

 The Filespace section contains one page of properties.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the ADSM properties for a node. Use this notebook to view, or update properties for a node.

 You can access the properties view from the File menu in a Nodes window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the properties you can update for a node.  You can update contact information, change file compression, and see registration information.

Password

Shows the password properties you can update for a node.

Filespace

Shows the check boxes that can be used to give a client user the authority to delete backed up and archived files from their assigned node.

Accounting

Shows the server communication information for the node.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to register a new node. Use this notebook to register a new node to the ADSM server.

 You can access the Add window from the Edit menu in a Nodes window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields you can use to register a new node.

Password

Shows the fields you can use to enter a new password for the node.

Filespace

Shows the check boxes you can use to specify if the node user can delete backup and archive files.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node Add Using - Help

This window uses a notebook to display some of the properties of the node you have selected. Use this notebook to register a new node using some of the same properties of the node you have selected.

 You can access the Add Using window from the Edit menu in a Nodes window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields you can use to register a new node.

Password

Shows the fields you can use to enter a new password for the node.

Filespace

Shows the check boxes you can use to specify if the node user can delete backup and archive files.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Password - Help

 Use the Password section of the Node Add notebook to set a password for a new node.

 The Password section contains one page of properties.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Node Add notebook to enter information for a new node.

 The General section contains one page of properties

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Filespace - Help

 Use the Filespace section of the Node Add notebook to authorize the user of a node to delete archived and, or, backed up copies of their files.

 The Filespace section contains one page of properties.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Locked - Help

 Select Locked to prevent a node from accessing the ADSM server.  You can deselect Locked to remove the restriction.

 An administrator can only lock and unlock nodes other than his/her own node while connected to the ADSM server.


Node Name - Help

 The Node Name field displays the name assigned to a node.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


New Node Name - Help

 Type a new name for a node in the New Node Name field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The New Node Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  Stands-1

 Considerations:

• Node names must be unique.

• A node name cannot contain spaces.

• The asterisk (*) wildcard character can only be used when you specify the criteria for Include.


Days Since Last Access - Help

 The Days Since Last Access field displays the number of days since a node last accessed the ADSM server.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Registered On - Help

 The Registered On field displays the date and time that a node was registered.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Registered By - Help

 The Registered By field displays the name of the administrator that registered a node.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Days Since Password Set - Help

 The Days Since Password Set field displays the number of days elapsed since a new password was set for a node.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Node Rename - Help

Use this window to update the name of a node. For example, you could update the node's name from Judyos2 to Judithos2.

 To rename a node:

1.  Type in the new node name in the Node Name field.

2.  Select the Rename push button to assign the new name.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reenter Password - Help

 Type the new password again in the Reenter Password field. This field must contain the exact character sequence entered in the Password field.

 This field must be filled in if you are updating the current node password.

 The Reenter Password field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  If byebye is entered, the Reenter Password field will display ******.

 Considerations:

• This field is a protected field.  When you enter a character in the field, an asterisk (*) is displayed in place of the character.

• When you enter a new password in the Password field, you must enter the same password in the Reenter Password field.


Policy Domain - Help

 Use the Policy Domain drop-down combination list box to specify the policy domain that you want to use as filter criteria for your search. Select the drop-down control to display the policy domains in the list. Select a policy domain that is listed, type in a policy domain, or leave the asterisk in the field to search all policy domains.

 This is a required field.


Policy Domain - Help

 Use the Policy Domain drop-down list box to assign a node to a policy domain. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list. Select from the list the policy domain that you want to assign a node to.

 You can choose one selection from the list.


Accounting - Help

 Use the Accounting section of the Node Properties notebook to view server communication information for the node.

 The Accounting section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Last communication method used

•  Bytes received last session

•  Bytes sent last session

•  Duration of last session

•  Percent idle wait last session

•  Percent communication wait last session

•  Percent media wait last session

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Last Communication Method Used - Help

 The Last Communication Method Used field displays the communication method that was last used by the node.  For example, TCP/IP.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Bytes Received Last Session - Help

 The Bytes Received Last Session field displays the number of bytes received by the server during the last backup, and/or, archive operation.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Bytes Sent Last Session - Help

 The Bytes Sent Last Session field displays the number of bytes sent by the node to the server during backup, and/or, archive operations.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Duration of Last Session - Help

 The Duration of Last Session field displays how long, in seconds, the most recent backup, and/or, archive session lasted.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Percent Idle Wait Last Session - Help

 The Percent Idle Wait Last Session field displays, as a percentage of the total session time, the amount of time the node was not performing any functions.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Percent Communication Wait Last Session - Help

 The Percent Communication Wait Last Session field displays, as a percentage of the total session time, the amount of time that the node waited for a communication response from the server.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Percent Media Wait Last Session - Help

 The Percent Media Wait Last Session field displays, as a percentage of total session time, the amount of time that the node waited for a removable volume to be mounted.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Node Name - Help

 Type the node name in the Node Name field. The node name you specify in this field will be used as a filter for your search criteria.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Node Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  Asterisk (*)

 Example:  Node1


Nodes Export - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the different fields you can use to export node definitions and selected file data.

 The following is a list of types of node information you can export using the Nodes Export notebook:

• Node definitions

• Backup, archive, and migrated file data

• File space definitions

 You can access the Export Nodes notebook from the File menu choice in the Details view.

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

Type of Data

Shows the node information and selected file data you can export. This can include node definitions, backup, archive, and migrated file data, and file space names.

Destination

Shows the different media to which you can export node definitions and selected file data. Select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting node definitions and selected file data. You must select the device class from the Device Class list box if you want to export node definitions and selected file data. You can specify the Volume Names you want to use. Select the Can Use Scratch media check box to use available sequential access media.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Nodes Import - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to import node definitions and selected file data.

 The following is a list of types of node information you can import using the Nodes Import notebook:

• Node definitions

• Backup, archive, and migrated file data

• File space definitions

 You can access the Nodes Import notebook from the Edit menu choice in the Nodes Details view.

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields you use to specify the nodes you want to import. You can import nodes by specifying node names and the policy domains to which they belong. Leave the asterisk (*) in the Node Names and Policy Domains fields to import all the nodes and policy domains on the specified sequential access media. These fields are required.

Type of Data

Shows the node information and selected file data you can import. This can include node definitions, backup and archive file data, migrated file data, and file space names. Select the Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export check box to change the dates on archived files to avoid possible loss of file data. You can select the Replace Existing Node Definitions check box to overwrite existing node definitions on the server.

Source

Shows the type of media from which you can import node definitions and selected file data. You can select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before importing node definitions and selected file data. You must select a device class from the Device Class list box to import node definitions and selected file data. Volume Names is a required field except on the VM server.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Type of Data - Help

 Use the Type of Data section of the Nodes Export notebook to specify the node definitions, file data, and specific file spaces you want to export.

 Archived files are files which are placed in an archive storage pool defined at the time ADSM is installed. Files are archived for long term storage.

 Backup files are versions of files placed in a backup storage pool.  Multiple backup versions of a file can exist, but only the most current version of a backup file is considered active.

 Migrated files are files moved from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 The Type of Data section contains one page.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Destination - Help

 Use the Destination section of the Nodes Export notebook to specify the device class and volume names to which you want to export node definitions and selected file data. A device class must be selected. The Can Use Scratch Media check box is selected by default. When Can Use Scratch Media is not selected, Volume Names is a required field. You can select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting node definitions or data.

 The Destination section contains one page.

 Considerations:

• If you select Preview Only, the Volume Names field and the Device Class list box are deactivated.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Nodes Import notebook to specify the nodes you want to import. You can specify nodes by individual names, and you can import nodes by specifying the policy domain to which they belong. Leave the asterisk (*) in the Node Names and Policy Domains fields to import all nodes and policy domains from the specified sequential access media.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Type of Data - Help

 Use the Type of Data section of the Nodes Import notebook to specify the node definitions, file data, and specific file spaces you want to import. This can include node definitions, backup and archive file data, migrated file data, and file space names. All file data includes node definitions. Existing file spaces cannot be replaced. Select the Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export check box to change the dates on archived files to avoid possible loss of file data. You can select the Replace Existing Node Definitions check box to overwrite existing node definitions.

 Archived files are files which are placed in an archive storage pool defined at the time ADSM is installed. Files are archived for long term storage.

 Backup files are versions of files placed in a backup storage pool.  Multiple backup versions of a file can exist, but only the most current version of a backup file is considered active.

 Migrated files are files moved from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 The Type of Data section contains one page.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Source - Help

 Use the Source section of the Nodes Import notebook to specify the device class and volume names from which you want to import node definitions and selected file data, or you can select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before importing node definitions and selected file data. You can specify the volume names you want to import. Leave  the Volume Names field blank to import all storage volumes from the specified sequential access media.

 You must select a device class from which to import node definitions and selected file data. Volume Names is a required field except on the VM server.

 The Source section contains one page.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class to which you want node definitions and selected file data exported. The Device Class list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can select only one device class from the list. A selection is required when you want to export node definitions and selected file data. A selection is not required when you select the Preview Only check box to send the results to the Activity Log for viewing.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class from which you want node definitions and selected file data imported. The Device Class list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can select only one device class from the list. A selection is required when you want to preview or import node definitions and selected file data.


Volume Names - Help

 Type specific volume names in the Volume Names field to import from those volumes that you want to import node definitions and selected file data.

 Volume names identify sequential access media volumes that have been assigned to a storage pool to store backed up or archived files.

 This field must be filled in except for the VM server.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

    AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

    MVS - rlvol2

    OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\rlvol2.dsm

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.


Node Names - Help

 Type specific node names in the Node Names field. Leave the asterisk (*) in the field to import all node definitions and selected file data from the specified sequential access media.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Node Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Example:  AMYK,ZACK

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries in this field must be separated by commas without spaces.


Policy Domains - Help

 Type specific policy domain names in the Policy Domains field. Leave the asterisk (*) in the field to import all node definitions and selected file data from all policy domains from the specified sequential access media.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Policy Domains field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Example:  EMPLOYEE_RECORDS,MANAGEMENT_RECORDS

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries in this field must be separated by commas without spaces.


File Space Names - Help

 Type specific file space names in the File Space Names field. Leave the asterisk (*) in the field to export all file spaces on the selected sequential access media.

 Entering information in this field is required.

 The File Space Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  * (all)

 Considerations:

• File space naming conventions are specific to the client node that owns the file space.

• Multiple entries in this field must be separated by commas without spaces.

• File space names are case sensitive on all platforms.


Preview Only (You Can View Results in Activity Log) - Help

 You can select Preview Only to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting node definitions and selected file data. When you select the Preview Only check box from the Nodes window, ADSM calculates number of volumes needed and reports on the types of node definitions and selected file data that are to be exported.

 Default:  Off


Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export - Help

 Select Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export to specify that you want to reset the dates on files relative to the time they are imported, avoiding immediate roll-off based on retention values specified in the management class. Files that have been stored for long periods of time can have dates that are older than the dates set for retaining files.

 If not selected, the dates for file copies are set to the values specified when the files were exported.   The actual date when the file was stored is used.

 If selected, the dates for file copies are adjusted to the date of import. The date will be changed to insure that all selected file data is imported.

 Default:  Off  (does not adjust file dates)


Replace Existing Node Definitions - Help

 Select Replace Existing Node Definitions to specify that you want to over write existing node definitions.

 Default:  Off


Can Use Scratch Media - Help

 Select Can Use Scratch Media to specify that you want to export node definitions and selected file data to available sequential access media. If Can Use Scratch Media is not selected, you must enter the volume names to which you want to export the node definitions and selected file data.

 Default:  On (use scratch media)


Node Definitions Only - Help

 Select Node definitions only to specify that you want to export only the node definitions without any file data. Node definitions are included with all types of file data.

 Default:  Node definitions only


All Archive File Data - Help

 Select All archive file data to specify that you want to export all archived files with the node definitions.

 Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

 Default:  Node definitions only


Active Backup File Data - Help

 Select Active backup file data to specify that you want to export active backup files with the node definitions.

 Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool and that still reside on the node's file system.

 Default:  Node definitions only


Active Backup, All Archive, and All Migrated File Data - Help

 Select Active backup, all Archive, and all migrated file data to specify that you want to export active backup files, all archived files, and all migrated files with the node definitions.

 Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool and that still reside on the node's file system.

 Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

 Migrated files include files moved from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Node definitions only


All Backup File Data - Help

 Select All backup file data to specify that you want to export all backup files with the node definitions.

 All Backup File Data includes both active and inactive backup files. Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool and that still reside on the node's file system. Inactive backup files include versions that are not the most recent versions or the corresponding original files that have been deleted from the client node's file system.

 Default:  Node definitions only


All Backup, Archive, and Migrated File Data - Help

 Select All backup, archive, and migrated file data to specify that you want to export all backup, archive, and migrated files with the node definitions.

 All backup file data includes both active and inactive backup files. Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool and that still reside on the node's file system. Inactive backup files include versions that are not the most recent versions or the corresponding original files have been deleted from the client node's file system.

 Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

 Migrated files include files moved from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Node definitions only


Export - Help

 Select Export to send the node definition and selected file data to the sequential access media you have selected.

 If the Preview Only check box is selected, the results will be sent to the Activity Log for viewing without exporting any node definitions or selected file data.


Import - Help

 Select Import to receive the node definitions and selected file data from the selected sequential access media.

 If the Preview Only check box is selected, the results will be sent to the Activity Log for viewing without importing any node definitions or file data.


Volume Names - Help

Type specific volume names in the Volume Names field to indicate the volumes to which you want to export node definitions and selected file data.

 Volume names identify sequential access media volumes that have been assigned to a storage pool to store backed up or archived files.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

    AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

    MVS - rlvol2

    OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\rlvol2.dsm

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.

• You can use specific volumes and scratch media to export node definitions and selected file data. The volumes you specify in the Volume Names field will be used first, and if more volumes are needed, scratch media is used for the remainder of the definitions and selected file data being exported.


Export - Help

Select Export from the File menu to export node definitions and selected file data to sequential access media or to the Activity Log for viewing before you export any data. Only those nodes included in the view are available for export.

 Export is useful for server maintenance and disaster recovery.

 This choice is always available.


Import - Help

Select Import from the Edit menu to import node definitions and selected file data from sequential access media, or you can preview the results in the Activity Log before you import any data.

 Import is useful for server maintenance, disaster recovery, and adding new servers to a network.

 This choice is always available.


Preview Only (You Can View Results in Activity Log) - Help

 You can select Preview Only to view the results in the Activity Log before importing node definitions and selected file data. When you select Preview Only from the Nodes window, ADSM calculates the number of volumes used and reports on the types of node definitions and file data that are to be imported.  All specified export volumes must be mounted and available for reading when importing.

 Default:  Off


Node Definitions Only - Help

 Select Node definitions only to specify that you want to import only the node definitions without any file data. Node definitions are included with all types of file data.

 Default:  Node definitions only


All Archive File Data - Help

 Select All archive file data to specify that you want to import all archived files with the node definitions.

 Archived file dates can be adjusted to the time they are imported by selecting the Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export check box, preventing loss of file data.

 Default:  Node definitions only


Active Backup File Data - Help

 Select Active backup file data to specify that you want to import active backup files with the node definitions.

 Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool and that still reside on the node's file system.

 Default:  Node definitions only


Active Backup, All Archive, and All Migrated File Data - Help

 Select Active backup, all archive, and all migrated file data to specify that you want to import active backup files, all archived files, and all migrated files with the node definitions.

 Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool and that still reside on the node's file system.

 Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

 Migrated files include files moved from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Node definitions only


All Backup File Data - Help

 Select All backup file data to specify that you want to import all backup files with the node definitions.

 All Backup File Data includes both active and inactive backup files. Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool and that still reside on the node's file system. Inactive backup files include versions that are not the most recent versions or the corresponding original files have been deleted from the client node's file system.

 Default:  Node definitions only


All Backup, Archive, and Migrated File Data - Help

Select All backup, archive, and migrated file data to specify that you want to import all backup, archive, and migrated files with the node definitions.

 All backup includes both active and inactive backup files. Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool and that still reside on the node's file system. Inactive backup files include versions that are not the most recent versions or, the corresponding original files that have been deleted from the client node's file system.

 Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

 Migrated files include files moved from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Node definitions only


File Space Names - Help

 Type specific file space names in the File Space Names field, or the asterisk (*) in the field causes all file spaces on the selected sequential access media to be imported.

 Entering information in this field is required.

 The File Space Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  * (all)

 Considerations:

• File space naming conventions are specific to the client node that owns the file space.

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.

• File space names are case sensitive for all platforms.


Show Storage Usage - Help

Select Show Storage Usage to display information on the storage space used by nodes. You can view and print to a file storage usage information. This information is current as of the last license audit.

 Storage used is shown in megabytes (MB).

 Show Storage Usage is available on ADSM servers that enforce license compliance.


Nodes Storage Usage - Help

This window displays information about storage used by nodes. Each row represents a node registered with the ADSM server. From this window you can view or print to a file the information about storage used by all or selected nodes. This information is current as of the last license audit.

 Data Columns

Node Name

Displays the name of a client node using the server.

Backup Storage Used (MB)

Displays the amount of backup storage in megabytes used by a node.

Archive Storage Used (MB)

Displays the amount of archive storage in megabytes used by a node.

Migration Storage Used (MB)

Displays the amount of migration storage in megabytes used by a node.

Total Storage Used (MB)

Displays the total amount of backup, archive, and migrated storage in megabytes used by a node.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Node

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node - Help

Each Node object represents a node registered with the ADSM server. Select the Node you want to work with. You can view or print to a file the storage usage information for all or selected nodes.

 Related Information

• Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Storage Usage:

•  Nodes Storage Usage Details


All Migrated File Data - Help

 Select All migrated file data to specify that you want to import all migrated files with the node definitions.

 Migrated files include files moved from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Node definitions only


All Migrated File Data - Help

 Select All migrated file data to specify that you want to export all migrated files with the node definitions.

 Migrated files include files moved from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Node definitions only


Nodes Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Copying Nodes

•   Exporting Nodes

•   Importing Nodes

•   Printing Node Information

•   Printing Node Storage Usage Information

•   Registering New Nodes

•   Removing Nodes

•   Renaming a Node

•   Updating Node Properties

•   Viewing Node Information

•   Viewing Node Storage Usage Information


Registering New Nodes - Help

A node must be registered with the ADSM server in order to use ADSM services.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each node you are registering:

• Name of the node

• Contact information

• Name of the policy domain the node will belong to

• Initial password for the node

 To register a new node:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add.  The Node-Add notebook displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the properties for the new node.  There are three tabs to the notebook.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to register the new node with the server.

 Considerations

• Each node within a policy domain must have a unique name.

• When you are registering a new node, you must completely specify all values; wildcard characters are not allowed.


Updating Node Properties - Help

To update the properties for a node:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select a node or nodes.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties.  The Node-Properties notebook displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the field you want to update.

 Step 5 	 Enter the new information for the field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.

 Considerations

•  Each node within a policy domain must have a unique name.

•  When you are entering node information, you must completely specify all values; wildcard characters are not allowed.

•  If you select more than one node to update, a window for each node you have selected is opened for processing.

•  You cannot rename a node from the Properties view of a node. You must use the Rename window available on the Edit menu from the Nodes Details view.


Removing Nodes - Help

You can delete nodes that have been registered with the ADSM server and no longer require ADSM services.  Before a node can be deleted, you must delete the node data stored in file spaces on the ADSM server. See Deleting File Spaces for instructions.

 To delete a node:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the node or nodes that you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Delete.  The Nodes-Delete window displays.

 Step 4 	 A delete confirmation window is displayed for you to verify the nodes to be deleted.  You can deselect nodes you choose not to delete.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button on the confirmation window to delete the nodes from the ADSM server.  Select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.


Viewing Node Information - Help

You can view information about a node container or selected nodes, or view the properties for specific nodes.

 To view node information:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the node you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties.  The Node-Properties window displays.

 Considerations

•  If you want to filter the nodes, select Include from the View menu in Details view.


Renaming a Node - Help

A node registered with ADSM can be renamed.

 To rename a node:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the node you want to rename.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Rename. The Node-Rename window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new name of the node in the New Node Name field. The current name of the node will display in the Node Name field on the Rename window.

 Step 5 	 Select the Rename push button to change node name.


Printing All Nodes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Nodes in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print all the nodes:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu item, and the select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu item, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Nodes - Print to File window will display.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file you want the node information sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the node information to the file you have specified.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Nodes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Nodes in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print selected nodes:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the node or group of nodes in the details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File.  The Nodes-Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file you want the node information sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected nodes to the file you have specified.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Node Properties View - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Node-Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy a properties view of a node:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the node you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, then select Open as Properties from the menu list.  The Node-Properties notebook displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window.  The Node-Print to File window will display.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected the default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the node properties information to the file you have specified.

 Considerations

• You can view the file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Node Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Nodes Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Nodes in the Details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for copying to a file for printing:

•   Printing all nodes

•   Printing selected nodes

•   Printing a nodes properties view


Importing Nodes - Help

You can import node definitions and selected file data.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• Names of nodes you want to import

• Type of data you want to import

• Device class on which the data is stored

• Volume names where the data is stored

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To import nodes with all their backup file data:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Import from the list. The Nodes Import notebook displays.

 Step 3 	 In the General section specify the names of the Nodes and Policy Domains.

 Step 4 	 In the Type of Data Section select All Backup File Data, and you can specify the file spaces you want to import.

 Step 5 	 Select the Device Class and specify the Volume Names in the Source section of the Nodes Import notebook to indicate from where you want to import data.

 Step 6 	 Select the Import push button to import the node definitions and data.

 Considerations

• Volume Names is required on all servers except for VM.

• You can import nodes by specifying the policy domains to which they belong.

• You can select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before importing any node definitions with selected file data.

• You can select the Replace Existing Node Definitions check box to over write existing node definitions.


Exporting Nodes - Help

You can export node definitions with selected file data to sequential access media.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• Names of nodes you want to export

• The type of data you want to export

• The device class to which you want to export

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To export nodes definitions with all their backup and archive file data:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Export from the list. The Nodes Export notebook displays.

 Step 3 	 In the Type of Data section select All Backup, Archive, and Migrated File Data and specify the File Spaces you want to export.

 Step 4 	 In the Destination section select the Device Class to which you want to export the node definitions and selected file data, leaving the Volume Names field blank with Can Use Scratch Media selected.

 Step 5 	 Select the Export push button to export the node definitions and selected file data.

 Considerations

• If Can Use Scratch Media is not selected, you must specify volume names.

• Select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting any node definitions  with selected file data.


Viewing Storage Usage Information - Help

You can view storage usage information for all or selected Nodes.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for viewing information:

•   Viewing storage usage information for all nodes

•   Viewing storage usage information for selected nodes


Printing Storage Usage Information - Help

You can print to a file storage usage information for all or selected Nodes.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing information to a file:

•   Printing storage usage information for all nodes

•   Printing storage usage information for selected nodes


Printing Storage Usage Information for All Nodes - Help

You can copy to a file the storage usage information for all Nodes in the Nodes - Storage Usage Details view on ADSM servers that enforce license compliance. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print storage usage information for all Nodes:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Nodes window displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Show Storage Usage from the menu list. The Nodes - Storage Usage window displays.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list. The Storage Usage - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Nodes - Storage Usage information to the specified file.

 Considerations

• This information is accurate as of the last license audit.

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Viewing Storage Usage Information for All Nodes - Help

You can view the storage usage information for all Nodes in the Nodes - Storage Usage Details view on ADSM servers that enforce license compliance.

 To view storage usage information for all Nodes:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Nodes window displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Show Storage Usage from the menu list. The Nodes - Storage Usage window displays.

 Considerations

• This information is accurate as of the last license audit.

• Storage usage is displayed in megabytes (MB).


Printing Storage Usage Information for Selected Nodes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Nodes in the Nodes - Storage Usage Details view on ADSM servers that enforce license compliance. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

• The names of the nodes you want storage usage information for

 To print selected Node Storage Usage information:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  The Nodes window displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Show Storage Usage from the menu list. The Nodes - Storage Usage window displays.

 Step 3 	 To copy storage usage information for a group of selected Nodes, select the Nodes in the Nodes - Storage Usage Details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 4 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list. The Storage Usage - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the selected Node - Storage Usage information to the specified file.

 Considerations

• This information is accurate as of the last license audit.

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Viewing Storage Usage Information for Selected Nodes - Help

You can view the storage usage information for selected Nodes in the Nodes - Storage Usage Details view on ADSM servers that enforce license compliance.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The names of the nodes you want storage usage information for

 To view storage usage information for selected Nodes:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Nodes window displays.

 Step 2 	 To view storage usage information for a group of selected Nodes, select the nodes in the Nodes window. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or using the Cntl key to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Show Storage Usage from the menu list. The Nodes - Storage Usage window displays.

 Considerations

• Storage usage is displayed in megabytes (MB).


Copying Nodes - Help

You can copy attributes of an existing node to a new node.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• Name of the new node

• Contact information for the new node

• Name of the node whose attributes you want to copy

• Initial password for the new node

 To copy an existing node:

 Step 1 	 Open the Nodes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Nodes displays.

 Step 2 	Select the node whose attributes you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add The Node-Add notebook displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the properties for the new node.  There are three tabs in the notebook.

 Step 5 	Select the Add push button to submit the new node information to the server.

 Considerations

• Each node within a policy domain must have a unique name.


Policy Domain Details - Help

This window displays information about each policy domain. Use this window to select the policy domain you want to work with. From this window you can add new policy domains, delete existing policy domains, or select policy domains to update, import, export or view.

 Data Columns

Policy Domain Name

Displays the name of a policy domain defined to an enterprise for storage management.

Activated Policy Set

Displays the policy set that was used to create the active policy set.

Activated Default Management Class

Displays the default management class for the currently active policy set.

Number of Registered Nodes

Displays the number of nodes belonging to the policy domain.

Description

Displays the purpose of the policy domain.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. If you select multiple policy domains and then select Open as Properties from the File menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Policy Domain

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Domain - Help

Each Policy Domain object represents a set of policies used to manage storage. Each policy domain contains at least one policy set if it is being used to backup and archive files. Use this object to select the policy domain you want to work with.

 In the details view for the Policy Domains, you can add new policy domains, delete existing policy domains, view policy domain information, import and export policy domains, and copy policy domain information to a file for printing. In the properties view of a policy domain, you can view, change or print policy domain information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a Policy Domain: object:

•  Details

•  Properties


Policy Domain Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties for a policy domain. Use this notebook to view or copy the policy domain information to a file for printing.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows on page 1 the policy domain name, active policy set name, default management class name, and the number of assigned nodes.  On page 2 you can view or update backup and archive retention information.

Nodes

Shows a list of all the nodes assigned to a policy domain.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Policy Domain Properties notebook to view the policy domain information.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to view information about the policy domain and its active policy set, and default management class.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to view backup and archive retention information, and information on the last update of this policy domain.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Activated policy set

•  Activation date/time

•  Days since activation

•  Default management class

•  Number of assigned nodes

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Nodes - Help

 Use the Nodes section of the Policy Domain Properties notebook to view the list of nodes assigned to a policy domain.

 The Nodes section contains one page of properties.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Description - Help

 Type the description of the policy domain in the Description field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Description field can contain:

• 0 to 255 characters

• Any character

 Default:  None

 Example:  This is the Policy Domain for Accounting

 Considerations:

• If quotes are used in this field, they must be balanced.


Policy Domain - Help

 The Policy Domain field displays the name of the policy domain.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Activated Policy Set - Help

 The Activated Policy Set field displays the name of the policy set that was used to create the active policy set.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Activation Date/Time - Help

 The Activation Date/Time field displays the date and time the active policy set was activated for a policy domain.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Days Since Activation - Help

 The Days Since Activation field displays the number of days since the policy set was activated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Default Management Class? - Help

 The Default Management Class field displays the name of the default management class for the active policy set, if a default exists.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Number of Assigned Nodes - Help

 The Number of Assigned Nodes field displays the number of nodes assigned to a policy domain.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Backup Retention - Help

 Type the number of days in the Backup Retention field. The number of days specified in this field will be used to retain inactive backup copies of a file when the management class to which the file was originally bound has been deleted, and the new management class the file is bound to also does not have a backup copy group.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Backup Retention field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 9999

 Default:  30 (days)

 Considerations:

• You can specify zero (0) in this field which means no extra versions are kept.


Archive Retention - Help

 Type the number of days in the Archive Retention field. The number of days specified in this field will be used to retain inactive archive copies of a file when the management class to which the file was originally bound has been deleted, and the new management class the file is bound to also does not have an archive copy group.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Archive Retention field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 9999

 Default:  365 (days)

 Considerations:

• You can specify zero (0) in this field which means no extra versions are kept.


Last Update By - Help

 The Last Update By field displays the name of the administrator who last updated the Backup retention and/or Archive retention fields.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update Date/Time - Help

 The Last Update Date/Time field displays the date and time the Backup retention and/or Archive retention periods were last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Policy Domain Add - Help

This window displays the fields required to add a new policy domain to ADSM. Use this window to enter the name of the policy domain and the description of the policy domain.

 You can specify the backup and/or archive retention periods for the policy domain.

 Select the Add push button when all required fields are filled in.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Domain - Help

 Type the name of the policy domain in the Policy Domain field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Policy Domain field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  DOMAIN9

 Considerations:

• The Policy Domain name must be unique.


Assigned Nodes - Help

 The Assigned Nodes list is used for viewing the nodes assigned to the policy domain.

 A node is assigned to a policy domain when it is registered to the server.  To register or remove nodes from the server, open the Nodes object.


Policy Sets Details - Help

This window displays the information about each policy set belonging to a policy domain. Use this window to select the policy set you want to work with.  From this window you can add new policy sets, delete existing policy sets (except the active policy set), activate a policy set, validate a policy set, or select policy sets to view or update.

 Data Columns

Policy Domain Name

Displays the name of a policy domain defined to an enterprise for storage management.

Policy Set Name

Displays the name of a policy set belonging to a policy domain.

Default Management Class Name

Displays the name of the management class currently assigned as the default for the policy set.

Description

Displays the description of the policy set.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. If you select multiple policy sets and then select Open as Properties from the Selected menu, multiple windows are opened for processing.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Policy Set

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Set - Help

Each Policy Set object represents a policy set belonging to a policy domain. Use this object to select the policy set you want to work with.

 In the details view for the Policy Sets, you can add new policy sets, delete existing policy sets, view policy set information, copy policy set information to a file for printing, activate and validate a policy set. In the properties view of a policy set, you can view, change or print policy set information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a Policy Set: object:

•  Details

•  Properties


Activate - Help

Select Activate to activate a policy set for a policy domain.

 Activate is only available when a policy set is selected in the details view. To activate a policy set, select the policy set you want to activate. Select the File menu and then select Activate.  The Policy Set - Activate window will display.

 When you activate a policy set, a validation check against the policy set is automatically made before the policy set is activated.


Validate - Help

Select Validate to perform a validation check on the policy set.

 Validate is only available when a policy set is selected in the details view.

 To validate a policy set, select the policy set to validate.  Select the File menu and then choose Validate.  The Policy Set - Validate window will display.


Policy Set Properties - Help

This window displays the properties for a policy set. Use this window to update the description of the policy set, or view or copy the policy set properties to a file for printing.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields in the properties window, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Policy set

•  Default management class

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Description - Help

 Type the description of the policy set in the Description field.  You can use this field to specify the purpose and use of the policy set.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Description field can contain:

• 0 to 255 characters

• Any character

 Default:  None

 Example:  This Policyset2 created for manufacturing

 Considerations:

• If quotes are used in this field, they must be balanced.


Policy Set - Help

 The Policy Set field displays the name of the policy set belonging to the policy domain.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Add Policy Set - Help

Use this window to add a policy set to a policy domain.

 Select the policy set name from the Policy Set drop down list.

 Type in a description of the policy set in the Description field.

 Select the Add push button to define the new policy set to the policy domain.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Set - Help

 Type the name of the policy set in the Policy Set field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Policy Set field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  POLICYSET2

 Considerations:

• The Policy Set name should be unique within the policy domain.


Management Class Details - Help

This window displays information about each management class belonging to a policy set. Use this window to select the management class you want to work with.  From this window you can assign a default management class, add new management classes to a policy set, delete management classes from a policy set, activate a policy set, validate a policy set, or select management classes to view or update.

 Data Columns

Policy Domain Name

Displays the name of the policy domain to which this management class belongs.

Policy Set Name

Displays the name of the policy set to which this management class belongs.

Management Class Name

Displays the name of the management class.

Default Management Class?

Displays whether the management class has been assigned as the default.

Description

Displays the purpose of the management class.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. If you select multiple management classes and then select Open as Properties from the Selected menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Management Class

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Management Class - Help

Each Management Class object represents a management class belonging to a policy set.  Use this object to select the management class you want to work with.

 In the details view of the Policy Set object, you can add new management classes, delete existing management classes, view management class information, copy management class information to a file for printing, and activate and validate a policy set. In the properties view of a management class, you can view, change or print management class information. If you would like to work with the copy groups in a management class, open the details view of the management class.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a Management Class: object:

•  Details

•  Properties


Assign Default - Help

 Select Assign Default to assign a management class as the default for a policy set.

 Assign Default is only available when one management class is selected.


Description - Help

 Type the description of the management class in the Description field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Description field can contain:

• 0 to 255 characters

• Any character

 Default:  None

 Example:  For a weekly backup of accounting files

 Considerations:

• If quotes are used in this field, they must be balanced.


Assign Default - Help

 Select Assign Default to assign the management class as the default management class for the policy set.


Management Class - Help

 The Management Class field displays the name of the management class belonging to the policy set.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update By - Help

 The Last Update By field displays the name of the administrator who last updated the management class.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update Date/Time - Help

 The Last Update Date/Time field displays the date and time the management class was last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Add Management Class - Help

This window displays the fields required to add a new management class management class to a policy set. Use this window to enter the name of the management class and the description of the management class.

 Select the Add push button when all required fields are filled in.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Management Class - Help

 Type the name of the management class in the Management Class field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Management Class field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  MGMNTCLASS2

 Considerations:

• The Management Class name should be unique within the policy set.


Include Management Classes - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the management classes you want displayed in the details view.

 To include filtered management classes in the view:

1.  Type in the management class name (with or without wildcard characters) in the Management Class field.

2.  Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Policy Domain

•  Policy Set

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Last Update By - Help

 The Last Update By field displays the name of the administrator that last updated information for the policy set.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update Date/Time - Help

 The Last Update Date/Time field displays the date and time the policy set was last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Include Policy Sets - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the policy sets you want displayed in the details view.

 To include filtered policy sets in the view:

1.  Type in the policy set name (with or without wildcards) in the Policy Set field.

2.  Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Backup Copy Group Details - Help

This window displays information about each backup copy group. Use this window to select the backup copy group you want to work with. From this window you can add new backup copy groups, delete existing backup copy groups, or select backup copy groups to view or update.

Data Columns:

Policy Domain Name

Displays the name of a policy domain defined to an enterprise for storage management.

Policy Set Name

Displays the name of a policy set belonging to a policy domain.

Management Class Name

Displays the name of the management class to which a backup copy group belongs.

Copy Group Name

Displays the name of the backup copy group.

Versions Data Exists

Displays the number of backed up versions you want to keep if the data still exists on the workstation.

Versions Data Deleted

Displays the number of backed up versions you want to keep if the data has been deleted from the workstation.

Retain Extra Versions

Displays the number of days to keep extra versions of the data in addition to the most recent backup version.

Retain Only Versions

Displays the number of days to keep the last existing version of the backed up data.  This applies only if the workstation copy has been deleted.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. If you select multiple backup copy groups and then select Open as Properties from the File menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Backup Copy Groups

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Backup Copy Group - Help

Each Backup Copy Group object represents a backup copy group defined for a management class. Select the backup copy group you want to work with.

 In the Backup Copy Groups Details view you can add new backup copy groups, delete existing backup copy groups, view backup copy groups information, and copy backup copy group information to a file for printing. In the properties view of a backup copy group, you can view, change or print backup copy group information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a Backup Copy Group:

•  Details

•  Properties


Backup - Help

Select Backup to add a backup copy group.  Only one backup copy group, STANDARD, can be defined for each management class. To add a new backup copy group named STANDARD, you must first delete the existing version of the STANDARD backup copy group.


Archive - Help

Select Archive to add an archive copy group to a management class.  Only one archive copy group, STANDARD, can be defined to a management class.  To add a new archive copy group named STANDARD, you must first delete the existing version of the STANDARD archive copy group.


Standard Backup Copy Group Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties for a backup copy group. Use this notebook to view, update or copy the copy group information to a file for printing.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the policy domain name, policy set name, management class name, copy group name and type.

Copy Control

Shows on page 1 the Copy Mode and Copy Serialization properties you can update.  On page 2 you can update the copy frequency and number of versions of backup files to keep.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Standard Backup Copy Group Properties notebook to view the backup copy group information.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the General page, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Policy set

•  Management class

•  Copy group

•  Copy type

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Control - Help

 Use the Copy Control section of the Standard Backup Copy Group Properties notebook to view or update the properties of a backup copy group.

 The Copy Control section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Copy Control section to view or update backup copy mode and backup copy serialization information.

 Use Page 2 of the Copy Control section to view or update backup copy frequency and backup version retention information.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Group - Help

 The Copy Group field displays the name of the copy group.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Copy Type - Help

 The Copy Type field displays either BACKUP or ARCHIVE as the copy type.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update By - Help

 The Last Update By field displays the name of the administrator who last updated the copy group.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update Date/Time - Help

 The Last Update Date/Time field displays the date and time the copy group was last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Modified - Help

 Select Modified to specify that files will be backed up if they have been modified, and the number of days specified in copy frequency have passed.

 Default:  Modified


Absolute - Help

 Select Absolute to specify that files will be backed up independent of whether they have been modified, and the number of days specified in the Copy Frequency field have passed.

 Default:  Modified


Static - Help

 Select Static to specify that a file must not be modified during backup.  If the file is modified during the backup process, the file is not backed up to a storage pool.

 Default:  Shared static


Shared Static - Help

 Select Shared static to specify that a file must not be modified during backup.  ADSM attempts to perform a backup as many as four times, depending on the value specified for CHANGINGRETRIES in the client user options file.  If the file or directory is modified during each backup attempt, ADSM does not back it up.

 Default:  Shared static


Dynamic - Help

 Select Dynamic to specify that the first attempt to back up a file is accepted regardless of any changes made to the file during the backup process.

 Default:  Shared static


Shared Dynamic - Help

 Select Shared dynamic to specify that the server attempts to back up a file if it is being modified.  The file is committed to the server during its last retry even if the file is being modified during the backup process.

 Default:  Shared static


Copy Frequency - Help

 Type the minimum number of days that must pass before a backup is attempted in the Copy Frequency field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Copy Frequency field can contain:

• A number between 0 and 9999

 Default:  Zero (0)

 Considerations:

• The default for this field is Zero (0).  A Zero (0) in this field means the file is eligible for backup any time the client runs an incremental backup.


If Client Data Exists - Help

 Type in the If Client Data Exists field the number of backup versions of a file you want to keep on the server if the file still exists on the workstation.

 This field must be filled in.

 The If Client Data Exists field can contain:

• A number between 1 and 9999

 Default:  2

 Considerations:

• The oldest version of a backed up file will be deleted when the maximum number of backed up copies exist, and the next backup is performed.


If Client Data is Deleted - Help

 Type in the If Client Data Is Deleted field the number of backup versions of a file you want to keep on the server if the file has been deleted from the workstation.

 This field must be filled in.

 The If Client Data Is Deleted field can contain:

• A number between 0 and 9999

 Default:  1

 Considerations:

• The oldest version of a backed up file will be deleted when the maximum number of backed up copies exist, and the next backup is performed.


Backup Copy Group Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to add a new backup copy group. Use this notebook to define the copy mode and copy serialization for files, how frequently files will be backed up and the length of time you want to retain inactive backup files on the server.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the policy domain, policy set name, management class name and copy group name.  STANDARD will be used as the name for the backup copy group.

Copy Control

Shows on page 1 the Copy Mode and Copy Serialization properties. On page 2 you can define the copy frequency and number of versions of backed up files to keep.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Backup Copy Group Add notebook to view the policy domain name, policy set name, management class name and the copy group name.  The copy group name will always be STANDARD.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Policy set

•  Management class

•  Copy Group

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Control - Help

 Use the Copy Control section of the Backup Copy Group Add notebook to define the properties of the new copy group.

 The Copy Control section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Copy Control section to define backup copy mode and backup copy serialization information.

 Use Page 2 of the Copy Control section to define copy frequency and backup version retention information.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Standard Archive Copy Group Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties for an archive copy group. Use this notebook to view, update or copy the archive copy group information to a file for printing.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the policy domain name, policy set name, management class name, copy group name and type.

Copy Control

Shows on page 1 the copy serialization properties you can update. On page 2 you can update the copy frequency and length of time to retain archive versions of a file.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Standard Archive Copy Group Properties notebook to view the archive copy group information.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Policy set

•  Management class

•  Copy group

•  Copy type

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Control - Help

 Use the Copy Control section of the Standard Archive Copy Group Properties notebook to view or update the properties of an archive copy group.

 The Copy Control section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Copy Control section to view or update archive copy serialization information.

 Use Page 2 of the Copy Control section to view or update the length of time to retain archive versions of a file, or change the destination storage pool.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2 of the Copy Control tab, select from the list below:

•  Copy frequency

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Frequency - Help

 The Copy Frequency field displays Command.  Command means that archive processes must be user initiated by a command.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Archive Copy Group Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to add a new archive copy group Use this notebook to define the copy serialization for files, and the length of time you want to retain archived files on the server.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the policy domain name, policy set name, management class name and copy group name.  STANDARD will be used as the name for the archive copy group.

Copy Control

Shows on page 1 the Copy Serialization properties.  On page 2 you can define the length of time you want to retain archived versions of files.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Archive Copy Group Add notebook to specify the policy domain name, policy set name, and management class name to which the archive copy group will belong.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output field for the page, select from the list below:

•  Copy group

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Control - Help

 Use the Copy Control section of the Standard Archive Copy Group notebook to specify the properties of the new copy group.

 The Copy Control section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Copy Control section to define archive copy serialization information.

 Use Page 2 of the Copy Control section to define the length of time to retain archive versions of a file.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Archive Copy Group Icon - Help

The Archive copy group icon represents the archive retention information for a management class.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Copy Groups:

•  Details

•  Properties


Assign Default - Help

Select Assign Default to make the selected management class in the current view the default management class.  The STANDARD Backup and STANDARD Archive copy groups for the management class will be used as the defaults for backing up or archiving files.

 To assign a management class as the default management class, choose Assign Default from the File menu choice.


Policy Sets Activate - Help

Use this window to activate a policy set for a policy domain. You can get the results of the activate request either in a file or displayed your workstation.

 Deselect Print File to see the results of the activate request displayed on your workstation.

 Select Print File to send the results of the activate request to a file you can print.  Specify the name of the file you want the results sent to in the File Name field. Select the Append check box if you want to add the results to an existing file.

 Select the Activate push button to send the activate request to the server.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Client Window - Help

 Select Client Window to see, on your workstation, the results of the activate or validate request.


Print File - Help

 Select Print File to send the results of an activate request to a file for printing.


Policy Set Validate - Help

Use this window to validate validate a policy set. You can get the results of the validate request either in a file or displayed on you workstation.

 Deselect Print File to see the results of the validate request displayed on your workstation.

 Select Print File to send the results of the validate request to a file you can print.  Specify the name of the file you want the results sent to in the File Name field. Select the Append check box if you want to add the results to an existing file.

 Select the Validate push button to send the validate request to the server.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Validate - Help

 Select Validate to verify that a policy set has a valid copy group assigned to it.


Activate Results - Help

Use this window to see the results of an Activate request. Results will be displayed in the Messages list box.

 Select the OK push button to close the window.


Number of Days - Help

 Type in the Number of Days field the length of time you want to retain all backup files, other than the most recent version, on the server.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Number of Days field can contain:

• A number between 0 and 9999

 Default:  30

 Considerations

• If you leave this field blank, the default value (30) will be used.


No Limit - Help

 Select No Limit to retain all backup copies, other than the most recent version, indefinitely.


Policy Domains Include - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the policy domains you want displayed in the details view.

 To include filtered policy domains in the view:

1.  Type in the policy domain name (with or without wildcard characters) in the Policy Domain field.

2.  Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Activate - Help

 Select Activate to activate a policy set for a policy domain.


Backup Copy Group Icon - Help

The Backup copy group icon represents the backup retention information for a management class.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Copy Groups:

•  Details

•  Properties


Number of Days - Help

 Type in the Number of Days field the length of time you want to retain archive files on the server.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Number of Days field can contain:

• A number between 0 and 9999

 Default:  365

 Considerations

• If you leave this field blank, the default value (365) will be used.


Copy Policy Sets, Mng't Classes, and Copy Groups - Help

 Select Copy Policy Sets, Management Classes, and Copy Groups to add to the new policy domain the policy sets, management classes, and copy groups belonging to the policy domain you are copying.


Policy Domain Add Using - Help

This window displays the fields required to add a new policy domain using the attributes of an existing policy domain. Use this window to enter the name of the new policy domain. You can update the description of the new policy domain, the backup and archive retention periods, and specify that all policy sets, management classes and copy groups belonging to the existing policy domain be copied to the new policy domain.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy All Management Classes and Copy Groups - Help

 Select Copy All Management Classes and Copy Groups to add to the new policy set the management classes, and copy groups belonging to the policy set you are copying.


Add Using Policy Set - Help

This window displays the fields required to add a new policy set using the attributes of an existing policy set. Use this window to enter the name of the new policy set. You can update the description of the new policy set, and specify that all management classes and copy groups belonging to the existing policy set be copied to the new policy set.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Policy Domain

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy All Copy Groups - Help

 Select Copy All Copy Groups to add to the new management class the copy groups belonging to the management class you are copying.


Add Using Management Class - Help

This window displays the fields required to add a new management class using the attributes of an existing management class. Use this window to enter the name of the new management class. You can update the description of the new management class, and specify that all copy groups belonging to the existing management class will be copied to the new management class.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Policy Domain

•  Policy Set

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


No Limit - Help

 Select No Limit to retain the last remaining copy of a deleted file indefinitely.


Number of Days - Help

 Type in the Number of Days field the length of time you want to retain on the server the last remaining copy of a deleted file.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Number of Days field can contain:

• A number between 0 and 9999

 Default:  60


No Limit - Help

 Select No Limit to retain archive versions of a file indefinitely.


Destination Storage Pool - Help

 Use the Destination Storage Pool drop-down combination list box to see a list of predefined backup storage pools. Select the drop-down control to display the backup storage pools in the list. Type in the entry field, or select from the list the backup storage pool name to which the files will be backed up.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Destination Storage Pool entry field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Example:  BACKUPPOOL


Destination Storage Pool - Help

 Use the Destination Storage Pool drop-down combination list box to see a list of predefined archive storage pools. Select the drop-down control to display the archive storage pools in the list. Type in the entry field, or select from the list the archive storage pool name to which the files will be archived.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Destination Storage Pool entry field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Example:  ARCHIVEPOOL


Policy Domain Name - Help

 Type the policy domain name in the Policy Domain Name field. The policy domain you specify in this field will be used as a filter for your search criteria.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Policy Domain field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?0 wildcard character

 Default:  Asterisk (*)

 Example:  PolicyDom1


Validate Results - Help

Use this window to see the results of a Validate request. Results will be displayed in the Messages list box.

 Select the OK push button to close the window.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Set Name - Help

 Type the policy set name in the Policy Set Name field. The policy set you specify in this field will be used as a filter for your search criteria.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Policy Set field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  Asterisk (*)

 Example:  PolicySetForDom1


Management Class Name - Help

 Type the management class name in the Management Class Name field. The management class you specify in this field will be used as a filter for your search criteria.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Management Class field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  Asterisk (*)

 Example:  ManClas2


Default Management Class? - Help

 The Default Management Class? field displays "yes" if this is the default management class, "no" if it is not the default management class.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Policy Import - Help

Use this window to import policy definitions from sequential access media. You can preview policy and schedule information in the activity log before importing any definitions. The following definitions will be imported from the volume and device class you specify:.

• Policy domain definitions

• Policy set definitions, including the ACTIVE policy set

• Management class definitions, including the DEFAULT management class

• Backup and Archive copy group definitions

• Schedule definitions defined for each policy domain

• Associations between client nodes and schedules

 You can access the Policy Import window from the Edit menu choice in the Policy Details view.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Domains - Help

 Type specific policy domain names in the Policy Domains field to import definitions from only those policy domains you specify. You can leave the asterisk (*) in the field without specifying a policy domain name to import all policy information from the volumes specified in the Volume Names field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Policy Domains field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question Mark (?) wildcard character

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries in this field must be separated by commas without spaces.


Volume Names - Help

 Type specific volume names in the Volume Names field to import definitions from only those volumes you specify. You can leave the Volumes Names field blank for the VM server.

 Volume names identify volumes that have been assigned to a storage pool to store backed up or archived files.

 This field must be filled in, except on the VM server.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question Mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/r1vol2

      MVS - r1vol2

      OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\r1vol2.dsm

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class from which you want policy and schedule definitions imported.  The Device Class list box lists the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can select only one device class from the list.  A selection is required when you want to preview or import policy and schedule definitions.


Replace Existing Policies and Schedules - Help

 Select Replace Existing Policies and Schedules to specify that you want existing policy and schedule definitions to be replaced. Replacing existing policy and schedule definitions causes existing policy and schedule definitions to be over written by the definitions you are importing.

 Default:  Off


Preview Only (You Can View Results in Activity Log) - Help

 Select Preview Only to specify that you want to view the import results before importing policy and schedule definitions.  The results can be viewed in the activity log.  When you select Preview Only from the Policy window, ADSM calculates and reports on the types of policy and schedule definitions that are to be imported.  All specified export volumes must be mounted and available for reading when importing.

 Default:  Off


Policy Export - Help

Use this window to export policy definitions.  You can preview policy and schedule information in the activity log before exporting any definitions. The following definitions for each policy domain will be exported to the volume and device class you specify:

• Policy domain definitions

• Policy set definitions, including the ACTIVE policy set

• Management class definitions, including the DEFAULT management class

• Backup and Archive copy group definitions

• Schedule definitions defined for each policy domain

• Associations between client nodes and schedules

 You can access the Policy Export window from the File menu choice in the Policy Details view.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume Names - Help

 Type specific volume names in the Volume Names field to export policy and schedule definitions to the volumes you specify. You can leave the Volumes Names field blank for the VM server.

 Volume names identify volumes that have been assigned to a storage pool to store backed up or archived files.

 This field must be filled in, except on the VM server.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question Mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

      AIX - /usr/adsm/r1vol2

      MVS - r1vol2

      OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\r1vol2.dsm

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.

• You can use specific volumes and scratch media to export policy and schedule definitions.  The volumes you specify in the Volume Names field will be used first, and if more volumes are needed, scratch media is used for the remainder of the definitions being exported.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class to where you want policy and schedule definitions exported.  The Device Class list box lists the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can select only one device class from the list.  A selection is required when you want to export policy and schedule definitions.  A selection is not required when you select the Preview Only check box to view policy and schedule information in the activity log before exporting any definitions.


Can Use Scratch Media - Help

 Select Can Use Scratch Media to specify that you want to export selected definitions to any sequential access media that is available.  If Can Use Scratch Media is not selected, you must enter the volume names to which you want to export the policy and schedule definitions.

 Default:  On (use scratch media)


Preview Only (You Can View Results in Activity Log) - Help

 Select Preview Only to specify that you want to view the export results before exporting policy and schedule definitions.  The results can be viewed in the activity log.  When you select Preview Only from the Policy window, ADSM calculates and reports on the types of policy and schedule definitions that are to be exported.

 Default:  Off


Import - Help

 Select Import to receive the specified policy and schedule definitions from the selected sequential access media.

 If Preview Only is selected, the results will be sent to the Server activity log for viewing without importing any policy or schedule definitions.


Export - Help

 Select Export to send the specified policy and schedule definitions to the selected sequential access media.

 If Preview Only is selected, the results will be sent to the Server activity log for viewing without exporting any policy or schedule definitions.


Export - Help

Select Export from the File menu choice to export policy definitions, and schedule definitions, for all objects displayed in the Policy Details view. You can export the policy and schedule definitions to sequential access media, or view the export results in the Server activity log.

 You can export all or part of a server to sequential access media so that data can be stored off-site for disaster recovery purposes, or transferred to another server.


Export - Help

Select Export from the File menu choice to export policy definitions, and schedule definitions for objects you have selected in the Policy Details view. You can export the policy and schedule definitions to sequential access media, or view the export results in the Server activity log.

 You can export all or part of a server to sequential access media so that data can be stored off-site for disaster recovery purposes, or transferred to another server.


Import - Help

Select Import from the Edit menu choice to import policy definitions, and schedule definitions, from the sequential access media you specify. You can import the policy and schedule definitions to sequential access media, or view the import results in the Server activity log.

 You can import all or part of the server policy definitions to restore a server, or to set up a new server.


Policy Domains - Help

The Policy Domains object contains the policy domains used to manage storage requirements for the enterprise.  Each policy domain can contain policy sets, management classes, and copy groups.

 The Policy Domains object opens to an details view.  Use the view to add, delete, update, import, export, view or print policy domain information.

  Expand the Policy Domains object to display the Policy Sets, Management Classes, Archive Copy Groups, and Backup Copy Groups objects.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Policy Domains:

•  Details

•  Properties


Policy Sets - Help

The Policy Sets object contains the policy sets that are defined to the enterprise.  Each policy set contains information about the policy domain it belongs to, and the default management class assigned to each policy set.

 The Policy Sets object opens to a details view.  Use the view to add, delete, update, activate, validate, view, or print policy set information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Policy Sets:

•  Details

•  Properties


Management Classes - Help

The Management Classes object contains management classes that define how files are managed for the nodes registered to a policy domain.

 The Management Classes object opens to a details view.  Use the view to add, delete, update, assign a default management class, view, or print management class information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Management Classes:

•  Details

•  Properties


Archive Copy Groups - Help

The Archive Copy Groups object contains the archive copy groups that define how files are archived for the nodes registered to a policy domain.  Each archive copy group contains information about the policy domain, policy set, and management class it belongs to.

 The Archive Copy Groups object opens to a details view.  Use the view to add, delete, update, view, or print archive copy group information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Archive Copy Groups:

•  Details

•  Properties


Backup Copy Groups - Help

The Backup Copy Groups object contains the backup copy groups that define how files are backed up for the nodes registered to a policy domain.  Each backup copy group contains information about the policy domain, policy set, and management class it belongs to.

 The Backup Copy Groups object opens to a details view.  Use the view to add, delete, update, view, or print backup copy group information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Backup Copy Groups:

•  Details

•  Properties


Policy Domain - Help

 Use the Policy Domain list box to assign a new policy set to a policy domain. Select the drop-down control to display all the policy domains in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Management Class Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties for a policy domain. Use this notebook to view or copy the policy domain information to a file for printing.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the policy domain name, policy set name, management class name and its description.

Migration

Shows the properties that you can select to define the type of space management for the new management class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General tab section of the Management Class - Properties notebook to display the name of the policy domain, policy set, management class and its description.  This section also displays information on the last update that was done on the policy domain.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Policy set

•  Management class

•  Description

•  Default management class?

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Migration - Help

 Use the Migration section of the Management Class Properties notebook to view or update space management properties for a management class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Automatic Migration and Selective Migration - Help

 Select Automatic migration and selective migration to specify that files can be selected for migration, and that ADSM will migrate files automatically after a specified number of days of non-usage.

 Default:  None


Selective Migration Only - Help

 Select Selective migration only to specify that files will be migrated only when the user selects files for migration.

 Default:  None


None - Help

 Select None to specify that files are not eligible for selective or automatic migration.

 Default:  None


After Days of Non-Usage - Help

 Enter the number of days using the After Days of Non-Usage spin buttons to specify the number of days that must elapse since a file was last accessed before the file is eligible for automatic migration.

 This field must be filled in if you specify automatic migration.

 The After Days of Non-Usage field can contain:

• A number between 0 and 9999

 Default:  1

 Initial value:  1

 Considerations:

• This field is available only if the Automatic Migration and Selective Migration radio button is selected.


Backup Version Must Exist - Help

 Select Backup Version Must Exist to specify that a backup copy of a file must exist in ADSM storage before the active copy is migrated for space management.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Storage Pool Destination for Migrated Files - Help

 Use the Storage Pool Destination for Migration list box to select a storage pool to which files will be migrated. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Management Class Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields required to add a new management class.  Use this notebook to select the policy domain and policy set to which the management class will belong, and to enter the name and description of the new management class.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields used to define policy domain, policy set, management class name and its description.

Migration

Shows the properties used to define the type of space management for the new management class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General tab section of the Management Class Add notebook to select the policy domain and policy set to which the management class will belong, and to enter the name and description of the new management class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Migration - Help

 Use the Migration tab section of the Management Class Add notebook to select properties used for defining the type of space management for a new management class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Domain - Help

Use the Policy domain drop-down list box to select the name of the policy domain to which the new management class will belong.  Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Policy Set - Help

Use the Policy set drop-down list box to select the name of the policy set to which the new management class will belong.  Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Management Class - Add Using - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields required to add a new management class by using the attributes of an existing management class.  Use this notebook to display the policy domain and policy set whose attributes you want to copy, and to enter the name and description of the new management class.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields used to define policy domain, policy set, the new management class name and its description.

Migration

Shows the properties that you can select to define the type of space management for the new management class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General tab section of the Management Class Add Using notebook to select the policy domain and policy set whose attributes you want to use, and to enter the name of the new management class.

You can update the description of the new management class, and specify that all copy groups belonging to the existing management class will be copied to the new management class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Migration - Help

 Use the Migration tab section of the Management Class - Add Using notebook to select the properties you can use to define the type of space management for a new management class.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Archive Copy Groups Details - Help

This window displays information about each archive copy group. Use this window to select the archive copy group you want to work with. From this window you can add new archive copy groups, delete existing archive copy groups, or select archive copy groups to view or update.

Data Columns:

Policy Domain Name

Displays the name of a policy domain defined to an enterprise for storage management.

Policy Set Name

Displays the name of a policy set belonging to a policy domain.

Management Class Name

Displays the name of the management class to which an archive copy group belongs.

Copy Group Name

Displays the name of the archive copy group.

Retain Archive Version

Displays the number of days to keep the archived version of the data.  There can be only one version of archived data.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. If you select multiple archive copy groups and then select Open as Properties from the File menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Archive Copy Groups

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Archive Copy Group - Help

Each Archive Copy Group object represents an archive copy group defined for a management class. Select the archive copy group you want to work with.

 In the Archive Copy Groups Details view you can add new archive copy groups, delete existing archive copy groups, view archive copy groups information, and copy archive copy group information to a file for printing. In the properties view of an archive copy group, you can view, change or print archive copy group information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of an Archive Copy Group:

•  Details

•  Properties


Add Using Backup Copy Group - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to add a new backup copy group by using the attributes of an existing backup copy group.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the policy domain, policy set name, management class name and copy group name.

Copy Control

Shows on page 1 the copy mode and copy serialization properties. On page 2, you can define the properties for copy frequency and the destination storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Backup Copy Group Add Using notebook to view the policy domain name, policy set name, management class name and the copy group name.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Policy set

•  Management class

•  Copy Group

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Control - Help

 Use the Copy Control section of the Backup Copy Group Add Using notebook to define the properties of the new backup copy group.

 The Copy Control section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Copy Control section to define backup copy mode and backup copy serialization information.

 Use Page 2 of the Copy Control section to define how frequently files will be backed up and the length of time you want to retain inactive backup files on the server.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Archive Copy Group Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties of the archive copy group.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the policy domain, policy set name, management class name, copy group name, and the copy type name.  STANDARD will be used as the name for the copy group.

Copy Control

Shows on page 1 the copy serialization properties. On page 2, you can view the information for copy frequency and destination storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Archive Copy Group Properties notebook to view the policy domain name, policy set name, management class name, copy group name, and copy type.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Policy set

•  Management class

•  Copy group

•  Copy type

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Control - Help

 Use the Copy Control section of the Archive Copy Group Properties notebook to view or define the copy serialization status.

 The Copy Control section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Copy Control section to view the copy serialization information.

 Use Page 2 of the Copy Control section to view the copy frequency information.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Frequency - Help

 The <field name> field displays <explain the contents of the field>.

 Possible values for this field include:

• <value>

• <value>

• <value>


Policy Domain - Help

 Use the Policy Domain list box to specify the policy domain to which the new copy group will belong. Select the drop-down control to display all the policy domains in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Policy Set - Help

 Use the Policy Set list box to specify the policy set to which the new copy group will belong. Select the drop-down control to display all the policy sets in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Management Class - Help

 Use the Management Class list box to specify the management class to which the new copy group will belong. Select the drop-down control to display all the management classes in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Add Using Archive Copy Group - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to add a new archive copy group by using the attributes of an existing archive copy group. Use this notebook to view or update the properties of the existing archive copy group whose attributes you want to copy.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields used to define the properties of the new archive copy group.

Copy Control

Shows on page 1, the copy serialization information, and on page 2, the fields you can use to define the copy frequency and the destination storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Archive Copy Group Add Using notebook to view information about the policy domain name, policy set name, management class name to which the copy group will belong.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Policy domain

•  Policy set

•  Management class

•  Copy group

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Copy Control - Help

 Use the Copy Control section of the Archive Copy Group - Add Using notebook to view the properties of the existing archive copy group that you want to use for the new archive copy group.

 The Copy Control section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Copy Control section to view the copy serialization information.

 Use Page 2 of the Copy Control section to view the information for copy frequency and for the destination storage pool that you want to use.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Backup Copy Groups Include - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the backup copy groups you want displayed in the details view.

To include filtered backup copy groups in the view:

1. Fill in the fields for policy domain, policy set, and management class.

2. Select the Include or the Apply button to filter the view.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Archive Copy Groups Include - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the archive copy groups you want displayed in the details view.

To include filtered archive copy groups in the view:

1. Fill in the fields for policy domain, policy set, and management class.

2. Select the Include or the Apply button to filter the view.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


No Limit - Help

 Select No Limit to retain all backup versions of client data if the data exists on the file system.


No Limit - Help

 Select No Limit to retain all backup versions of client data if the data is deleted from the file system.


Policy Tasks - Help

Select the object you want to see a task list and task help for:

•   Policy Domains

•   Policy Sets

•   Management Classes

•   Backup Copy Groups

•   Archive Copy Groups


Policy Domain Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Copying Policy Domains

•   Defining Policy Domains

•   Deleting Policy Domains

•   Exporting Policy Domains

•   Importing Policy Domains

•   Printing Policy Domain Information

•   Updating Policy Domain Properties

•   Viewing Policy Domain Information


Defining Policy Domains - Help

You can define a new policy domain for storage management purposes.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy domain you are defining:

• The purpose of the policy domain

• The policy domain name

• A description of the policy domain

• The policy set, management class and copy groups that will belong to the policy domain

 To define a policy domain:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Policy Domain Add window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the properties for the new policy domain.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to submit the new policy domain to the server.

 Considerations

• You must define a policy set for the new policy domain before it can be used for storage management.

• You can copy existing policy domain attributes to a new policy domain.  See copying a policy domain for instructions.


Copying Policy Domains - Help

You can copy existing policy domain attributes to a new policy domain.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy domain you are copying:

• The purpose of the policy domain

• The policy domain name

• A description of the policy domain

• The policy set, management class and copy group that will belong to the policy domain.

 To copy a policy domain:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy domain you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Policy Domain Add window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new name for the new policy domain.

 Step 5 	 Select the Copy All Policy Sets, Management Classes, and Copy Groups check box to add the storage management policies of the existing policy domain to the new policy domain.

 Step 6 	 Select the Add push button to submit the new policy domain to the server.

 Considerations

• You must define a policy set for the new policy domain before it can be used for storage management if the existing policy set was not copied.


Updating Policy Domains - Help

You can update the properties for a policy domain.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy domain you are updating:

• The policy domain name

• New description of the policy domain

• New backup and archive copy group retention period information

 To update a policy domain:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select an existing policy domain, or policy domains.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu, and then select Open as Properties. The Policy Domain - Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the field you want to update.

 Step 5 	 Enter the new properties for the policy domain.

 Step 6 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.


Deleting Policy Domains - Help

You can delete a policy domain no longer needed for storage management purposes.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy domain you are deleting:

• The policy domain name

 To delete a policy domain:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy domain or policy domains you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu, and then select Delete. The Policy Domains Delete window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify the policy domains to be deleted.  You can deselect policy domains you choose not to delete.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button to remove the policy domain or policy domains from the server.  Select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.

 Considerations

• When you delete a policy domain, the policy set and management class belonging to the policy domain will also be deleted.


Viewing Policy Domains - Help

You can view the properties view of a policy domain.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy domain you are viewing:

• The policy domain name

 To view a policy domain:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy domain you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Policy Domain - Properties window displays.


Printing Policy Domain Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Policy Domain Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Policy Domains in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all policy domains in a details view

•   Printing selected policy domains in a details view

•   Printing a policy domain properties view


Printing All Policy Domains - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all policy domains in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the policy domains you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to.

 To print all the policy domains:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu time, and the select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu item, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Policy Domain Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the policy domain information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the policy domain information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected by default)

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the policy domain information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Policy Domains - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected policy domains in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the policy domains you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print selected policy domains:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy domains you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu item, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Policy Domain Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the policy domain information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the policy domain information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the policy domain information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Policy Domains Properties View - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Policy Domain Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the policy domains you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print a properties view of the policy domains:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy domain you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties from the menu list.  The Policy Domain-Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button.  The Policy Domain - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to which the policy domain information will be sent in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the policy domain information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the policy domain information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Policy Set Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Activating a Policy Set

•   Copying Policy Sets

•   Defining Policy Sets

•   Deleting Policy Sets

•   Printing Policy Set Information

•   Updating Policy Set Properties

•   Validating a Policy Set

•   Viewing Policy Set Information


Defining Policy Sets - Help

You can define a new policy set for storage management purposes.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy set you are defining:

• The purpose of the policy set (see your system administrator)

• The policy set name

• A description of the policy set

• The management classes and copy groups that will belong to the policy set

 To define a policy set, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Add Policy Set window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the properties for the new policy set.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to submit the new policy set to the server.

 Considerations

• You must define a management class for the new policy set before it can be used for storage management.

• You can copy existing policy set attributes to a new policy set.  See copying a policy set for instructions.


Copying Policy Sets - Help

You can copy existing policy set attributes to a new policy set.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy set you are copying:

• The purpose of the policy set (see your system administrator)

• The policy set name

• A description of the policy set

• The management classes and copy groups that will belong to the policy set

 To copy a policy set, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy set you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Add Policy Set window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new name for the new policy set.

 Step 5 	 Select the Copy All Management Classes, and Copy Groups check box to add the storage management policies of the existing policy set to the new policy set.

 Step 6 	 Choose the Add push button to submit the new policy set to the server.


Updating Policy Sets - Help

You can update the description for a policy set.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy set you are updating:

• The policy set name

• New description of the policy set

 To update a policy set, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy set you want to update.  (You can update any policy set except the ACTIVE policy set.)

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Policy Sets Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new description for the policy set.

 Step 5 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.


Deleting Policy Sets - Help

You can delete policy sets from a policy domain.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy set you are deleting:

• Name of the policy set

 To delete a policy set, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy set you want to delete.  (You can delete any policy set except the ACTIVE policy set.)

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Delete. The Policy Sets Delete window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify the policy sets to be deleted.  You can deselect policy sets you choose not to delete.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button to remove the policy set or policy sets from the server.  Select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.


Viewing Policy Sets - Help

You can view the properties view of a policy set.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each policy set you are viewing:

• The policy set name

 To view a policy set, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy set you want to view.  You can view any policy set.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Policy Set Properties window displays.


Activating a Policy Set - Help

You can make a policy set active for a policy domain.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the policy set you are activating:

• The policy set name

 To activate a policy set, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy set you want to activate.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu, and then select Activate. The Policy Set Activate window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select Client Window if you want the results of the activate displayed on your workstation. (Client Window is selected as the default).

 Step 5 	 Select Print File and enter the file name you want the results sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the results appended to an existing file. (When you select the Print File check box, Append will be selected as the default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Activate push button to activate the policy set.

 Considerations

• The policy set is automatically validated before it is activated.


Validating a Policy Set - Help

You can perform a validation check on a policy set.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the policy set you are validating:

• The policy set name

 To validate a policy set, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy set you want to validate.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Validate. The Policy Sets Validate window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select Client Window to display the results of the validate to your terminal screen. (Client Window is selected as the default).

 Step 5 	 Select Print File and enter the file name you want the results sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the results appended to an existing file. (When you select the Print File check box, Append will be selected as the default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Validate push button to validate the policy set.


Printing Policy Set Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Policy Set Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Policy Sets in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all policy sets in a details view

•   Printing selected policy sets in a details view

•   Printing a policy set properties view


Printing All Policy Sets - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Policy Sets in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the policy sets you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to.

 To print all the policy sets, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu item, and then select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu item, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Policy Sets Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the policy set information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the policy set information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the policy set information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Policy Sets - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected policy sets in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the policy sets you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print selected policy sets, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.  A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy sets you want to copy to a file for printing

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu item, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Policy Sets Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the policy set information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the policy set information appended to an existing file.  (Append will be selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the policy set information to the file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Policy Sets Properties View - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Policy Set Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the policy sets you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print a properties view of the policy set, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Sets object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Policy Sets displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the policy sets you want to copy to a file for printing.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties from the menu list. The Policy Set-Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list. You can also select the Print to File push button. The Policy Set Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file the policy set information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the policy set information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the policy set information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Management Class Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Assigning a Default Management Class

•   Copying Management Classes

•   Defining Management Classes

•   Deleting Management Classes

•   Printing Management Class Information

•   Updating Management Class Properties

•   Viewing Management Class Information


Defining Management Classes - Help

You can define a new management class for storage management purposes.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each management class you are defining:

• The management class name

• A description of the management class

• The policy domain and policy set to which the management class will belong

 To define a management class, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Add Management Class window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the properties for the new management class.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to add the new management class to the policy set.

 Considerations

• You can copy existing management class attributes to a new management class.  See copying management classes for instructions.


Copying Management Classes - Help

You can copy existing management class attributes to a new management class.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each management class you are defining:

• The management class name

• A description of the management class

• The policy domain and policy set to which the management class will belong

 To copy a management class, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the management class you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Add Using Management Class window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new name for the new management class.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the new management class to the policy set.


Updating Management Classes - Help

You can update the description of a management class.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each management class you are updating:

• The management class name

• A description of the management class

• The policy domain and policy set to which the management class will belong

 To update a management class, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the management class you want to update.  (You can update any management class except the management class in the ACTIVE policy set.)

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Management Class - Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new description for the management class.

 Step 5 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes.


Deleting Management Classes - Help

You can delete management classes from a policy set.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each management class you are deleting:

• The management class name

• Policy domain, and policy set, to which the management class belongs

 To delete a management class, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the management class you want to delete. (You can delete any management class except the management class for the ACTIVE policy set.)

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Delete. The Delete Management Classes window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify the management classes to be deleted.  You can deselect management classes you choose not to delete.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button to remove the management class or management classes from the server.  Select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.


Viewing Management Classes - Help

You can view the properties for a management class.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each management class you are viewing:

• The management class name

• The policy domain and policy set to which the management class belongs

 To view a management class, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the management class you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Management Class Properties window displays.


Assigning a Default Management Class - Help

You can assign a management class as the default for a policy set.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the management class you are assigning as the default:

• The management class name

 To assign a default management class, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the management class you want to assign as the default.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Assign Default. The new default management class will be assigned.

 Considerations

• There can be only one default management class for each policy set.


Printing Management Class Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Management Class Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Management Classes in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all management classes in a details view

•   Printing selected management classes in a details view

•   Printing a management class properties view


Printing All Management Classes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Management Class in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the management classes you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print all the management classes, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Management Classes - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the policy set information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file the management class information will be sent to in the  File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the management class information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Management Classes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected management classes in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the management classes you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print selected management classes, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the management classes you want to copy to a file for printing.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Management Classes - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the management class information will be sent to in the  File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the management class information to the file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Management Class Properties - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Management Class Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the management class you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print the properties view of the management class, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Management Classes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Management Classes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the management class you want to copy to a file for printing.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties from the menu list.  The Management Class Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button in the properties window. The Management Class - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file the management class information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the management class information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the management class information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Backup Copy Group Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Copying Backup Copy Groups

•   Defining Backup Copy Groups

•   Deleting Backup Copy Groups

•   Printing Backup Copy Group Information

•   Updating Backup Copy Group Properties

•   Viewing Backup Copy Group Information


Defining Backup Copy Groups - Help

You can define a new backup copy group for storage management purposes. The backup copy group will be used to determine how the server backs up files and how the backup files are managed.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each backup copy group you are defining:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group will belong

• The copy group name

• The storage pool destination

• How frequently files will be backed up

• The copy mode for files associated with this copy group

• The copy serialization mode for files associated with this copy group

• The number of backup versions for existing files

• The number of backup versions for deleted files

• The retention period, in days, for all but the most recent backup copy

• The retention period, in days, for the last remaining backup copy

 To define a backup copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Backup Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Add Backup Copy Group notebook displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the properties for the new backup copy group.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to add the new backup copy group to a management class.

 Considerations

• You can define an archive copy group to define policy for archive files bound to a management class.


Defining Archive Copy Groups - Help

You can define a new archive copy group for storage management purposes. The archive copy group will be used to determine how the server archives files and how the archive files are managed.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each archive copy group you are defining:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group will belong

• The storage pool destination

• The copy serialization mode for files associated with this copy group

• The retention period, in days, to keep the archive version

 To define an archive copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Archive Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Archive Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Add Archive Copy Group notebook displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the properties for the new archive copy group.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to add the new archive copy group.

 Considerations

• If an archive copy group already exists in a management class,  you will have to delete the existing copy group before adding a new archive copy group. See Deleting an Archive Copy Group for instructions.

• Only one archive copy group can exist for a management class.


Updating Backup Copy Groups - Help

You can update the properties for a backup copy group. The backup copy group is used to determine how the server backs up files and how the backup files are managed.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each backup copy group you are updating:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group will belong

• The storage pool destination

• How frequently files will be backed up

• The copy mode for files associated with this copy group

• The copy serialization mode for files associated with this copy group

• The number of backup versions for existing files

• The number of backup versions for deleted files

• The retention period, in days, for all but the most recent backup copy

• The retention period, in days, for the last remaining backup copy

 To update a backup copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Backup Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the backup copy group you want to update.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Backup Copy Group Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the fields you want to update and enter new information.

 Step 5 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes.


Updating Archive Copy Groups - Help

You can update the properties for an archive copy group. The archive copy group is used to determine how the server archives files and how the archive files are managed.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each archive copy group you are updating:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group will belong

• The storage pool destination

• The retention period, in days, for the archive files.

 To update an archive copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Archive Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Archive Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the archive copy group you want to update.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Archive Copy Group Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the fields you want to update and enter new information.

 Step 5 	 Select the Apply push button to make the changes.


Deleting Backup Copy Groups - Help

You can delete the backup copy groups from a management class.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each backup copy group you are deleting:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group belongs

 To delete a backup copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Backup Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the copy group you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Delete. The Delete Copy Groups window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify the backup copy groups to be deleted.  You can deselect backup copy groups you choose not to delete.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button to remove backup copy groups from the server.  Select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.


Deleting Archive Copy Groups - Help

You can delete the archive copy group from a management class.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the archive copy group you are deleting:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group belongs

 To delete an archive copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Archive Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Archive Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the archive copy group you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Delete.

 Step 4 	 Verify the archive copy groups to be deleted.  You can deselect archive copy groups you choose not to delete.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button to remove archive copy groups from the server.  Select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.


Viewing Backup Copy Groups - Help

You can view the properties for a backup copy group.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the backup copy group you are viewing:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group belongs

• The backup copy group name (Standard)

 To view a backup copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Backup Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the backup copy group you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The backup copy group Properties window displays.


Viewing Archive Copy Groups - Help

You can view the properties for an archive copy group.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the archive copy group you are viewing:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group belongs

 To view an archive copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Archive Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Archive Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the archive copy group you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Archive Copy Group Properties window displays.


Printing Backup Copy Group Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the backup copy group Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Backup Copy Groups in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all backup copy groups

•   Printing selected backup copy groups

•   Printing a backup copy group properties view


Printing Archive Copy Group Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the archive copy group Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected archive copy groups in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all archive copy groups

•   Printing selected archive copy groups

•   Printing an archive copy group properties view


Printing All Backup Copy Groups - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all backup copy groups in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each copy group you are printing:

• Name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print all backup copy groups in a details view format, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Backup Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Backup Copy Groups - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the backup copy group information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select Append if you want the backup copy group information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the backup copy group information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing All Archive Copy Group Information - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all archive copy groups in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for each copy group you are printing:

• Name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print all archive copy groups in a details view format, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Archive Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Archive Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Archive Copy Groups - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the archive copy group information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select Append if you want the archive copy group information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the archive copy group information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Backup Copy Groups - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected backup copy groups in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the copy group you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print a selected backup copy group in a details view format, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Backup Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the backup copy group you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Backup Copy Groups - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the backup copy group information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select Append if you want the backup copy group information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the backup copy group information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Archive Copy Group Information - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected archive copy groups in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the copy group you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print a selected archive copy group in a details view format, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Archive Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Archive Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the archive copy group you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The Archive Copy Groups - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the archive copy group information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select Append if you want the archive copy group information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the archive copy group information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Backup Copy Group Properties - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the backup copy group Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the copy group you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print a properties view of a backup copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Backup Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the backup copy group you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties.  The Backup Copy Group Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File pushbutton.  The Backup Copy Groups - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to which the backup copy group information will be sent in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select Append if you want the backup copy group information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default)

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the backup copy group information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing an Archive Copy Group Properties View - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the archive copy group Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the copy group you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print a properties view of an archive copy group, expand the Policy Domains object, and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Archive Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Archive Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the archive copy group you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties.  The Archive Copy Group Properties window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File pushbutton.  The Archive Copy Groups - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to which the archive copy group information will be sent in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select Append if you want the archive copy group information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default)

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the archive copy group information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Importing Policy Domains - Help

You can import all or part of the policy definitions and schedule definitions from a server.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• Policy Domain names you want to import

• Device class on which the definitions are stored

• Volume names where the data is stored

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To import policies and schedule definitions:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administrator) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Import.  The Policy-Import window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the names of the policy domains you want to import in the Policy domains field.

 Step 4 	 Enter the sequential access device name in the Device class drop-down list box field from where the policies will be imported.

 Step 5 	 Enter the names of the volumes in the Volumes names field from where the policies will be imported.

 Step 6 	 Select the Import push button to import the policy definitions and schedule definitions.

 Considerations

• You can select the Preview Only check box to view the results of the import in the activity log before importing any policy or schedule definitions.

• The following definitions will be imported from the volume and device class you specify:

-Policy domain definitions

-Policy set definitions, including the ACTIVE policy set

-Management class definitions, including the DEFAULT management class

-Backup and Archive copy group definitions

-Schedule definitions defined for each policy domain

-Associations between client nodes and schedules


Exporting Policy Domains - Help

You can export all or part of the policy definitions and schedule definitions to a server.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• Device class on which to store the definitions

• Volume names where the data is to be stored

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To export policies and schedule definitions:

 Step 1 	 Open the Policy Domains object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administrator) window.  A window that contains Policy Domains displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Export. The Policy-Export window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the sequential access device name in the Device class drop-down list box field to where the policies will be exported.

 Step 4 	 Select the names of the volumes in the Volumes names field to where the policies will be exported.

 Step 5 	 Select the Export push button to export the policy definitions and schedule definitions.

 Considerations

• If scratch media is not used, you must specify volume names.

• You can select the Preview Only check box to view the results of the export in the activity log before exporting any policy or schedule definitions.

• The following definitions will be exported from the volume and device class you specify:.

-Policy domain definitions

-Policy set definitions, including the ACTIVE policy set

-Management class definitions, including the DEFAULT management class

-Backup and Archive copy group definitions

-Schedule definitions defined for each policy domain

-Associations between client nodes and schedules


Archive Copy Group Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Copying Archive Copy Groups

•   Defining Archive Copy Groups

•   Deleting Archive Copy Groups

•   Printing Archive Copy Group Information

•   Updating Archive Copy Group Properties

•   Viewing Archive Copy Group Information


Copying a Backup Copy Group - Help

You can copy existing backup copy group properties to add a new backup copy group.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group will belong

• The copy group name

 To copy a backup copy group, expand the Policy Domains object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Backup Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the backup copy group you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Add Backup Copy Group notebook displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter or change any properties required for the new backup copy group.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the new backup copy group.


Copying an Archive Copy Group - Help

You can copy existing archive copy group properties to add a new archive copy group.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The policy domain, policy set, and management class to which the copy group will belong

 To copy a archive copy group, expand the Policy Domains object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Archive Copy Groups object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Archive Copy Groups displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the archive copy group you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Add Archive Copy Group notebook displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter or change any properties required for the new archive copy group.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the new archive copy group.


Server - Help

The Server object allows you to manage server operations.

 The Server object opens to a Properties view. Use the view to add, update, or view the properties of the server.

 Expand the Server object to display the Activity Log, Processes, Sessions, and Sequential Volume History objects.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Server:

• Properties

Licensed Servers

Non-Licensed Servers


Sessions - Help

The Sessions object contains all current client sessions.

 The Sessions object opens to a Details view. Use the view to print or to view details of the client sessions, or to cancel client sessions.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Sessions:

•  Details


Processes - Help

The Processes object contains all current administrative background processes.

 The Processes object opens to a Details view. Use the view to print or to view the status of the processes or to cancel selected processes.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Processes:

•  Details


Activity Log - Help

The Activity Log object contains a record of status messages issued by the server.

 The Activity Log object opens to a Details view. Use the view to print or to view all or selected sections of the activity log.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Activity Log:

•  Details


Disable - Help

Select Disable to make the server unavailable to general users. Use Disable when you are performing administrative maintenance tasks.

Note:   Current node activity is allowed to complete, but no new activity is allowed to start.

 Disable is available unless the server is already disabled.


Enable - Help

Select Enable to permit new node activity to resume after using Disable.

 Enable is available unless the server is already enabled.


Halt - Help

Select Halt to shut down the server.

 Halt should be preceded with Disable, to allow the orderly completion of work in progress prior to shutting down the system.

Note:   Halt forces the server to shutdown and results in the canceling of all client sessions and processes even if they are not complete. Halt also closes the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.


Cancel All Sessions - Help

Select Cancel All Sessions to cancel all client node sessions.

Note:   Cancel All Sessions causes the immediate cancelation of all client node sessions.

 The server should be Disabled prior to canceling all client node sessions. Clients will reconnect automatically unless the server is disabled.


Sessions Details - Help

This window displays the details of the client sessions. Use this window to view or cancel client sessions, or to print the details of client sessions to a file.

 Data Columns

Session Number

Displays the numeric identification of the client session assigned by the server.

Comm Method

Displays the type of communications protocol used to communicate with the server.

Sess State

Displays the status of the client session. Possible values for this field are Start, End, Run, Idle Wait, Send Wait, Receive Wait or (?) for unknown state.

Wait Time

Displays the amount of time that the server has been in the current state shown.

Bytes Sent

Displays the total number of bytes sent to the client in this session.

Bytes Recvd

Displays the total number of bytes received from the client in this session.

Sess Type

Displays whether this client is an administrator or a node.

Platform

Displays the operating system used by the client. For example, OS/2, AIX, or PC/DOS. If a question mark (?) is displayed in this field, the platform is unknown.

Client Name

Displays the node name or the administrator name associated with this client session.

User Name

Displays the name of the user of the client running the session.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the client session that you want to view, cancel, or print.

 Considerations:

• The User Name column applies to Unix backup/archive clients on servers that support user name information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Session

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Session - Help

Each Session represents a client node session or administrative client session. Select the client sessions you want to work with. You can view or print details of the client sessions or cancel client sessions.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Sessions:

•  Sessions Details


Cancel Session - Help

Select Cancel Session to cancel the selected client session.

 This choice is available when objects have been selected.


Process Details - Help

This window displays the properties or details of the server background processes. Use this window to view or to print the status of the processes or to cancel selected processes.

 Data Columns

Process Number

Displays the numeric identification of the process.

Description

Displays the server background process associated with the process number.

Status

Displays the state or the condition that the process is in at the time this information is displayed.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the Process that you want to view or cancel.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Process

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Process - Help

Each Process represents a server background process. Select the processes you want to work with. You can view or print the status of the processes or cancel processes.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Processes:

•  Details


Cancel Process - Help

Select Cancel Process to cancel the selected background processes.

 This choice is available when objects have been selected.


Activity Log Details - Help

This window displays the entries in the Activity Log. Use this window to view or to print all or selected sections of the activity log.

 The default starting point for the display of the activity log entries is one hour before the current server date and time.

 Data Columns

Date and Time

Displays when the message was written to the activity log.

Message

Displays the message that was recorded by the server.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the Activity Log entries that you want to print to file.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Activity Log

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Activity Log - Help

Each Activity Log entry represents a status message issued by the server. Select the entries you want to work with. You can view or print Activity Log entries.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of the Activity Log.

•  Details


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Server Properties notebook to view or update the properties of the server.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to manage the server name, accounting records, password authorization and expiration period, activity log retention, and registration.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to view the server availability and the dates of installation and of the last restart of the server.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for Page 2, select from the list below:

•  Availability

•  Installation Date

•  Restart Date

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Accounting Records - Help

 Select Accounting Records to specify whether accounting records are created at the end of each client session.

 The initial value is set to Off at the time that the server is installed.


Password Authentication - Help

 Select Password Authentication to specify if client users will require a password in order to access the server.

 The initial value is set to On at the time that the server is installed.


Activity Log Retention Period - Help

 Type the number of days the entries in the server activity log are to be retained in the Activity Log Retention Period field.

 To stop the log, set the activity log retention to 0. To re-start the log, set the value to a non-zero value.

Note:   Entries in the activity log will be purged as they exceed the specified retention period.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Activity Log Retention Period can contain:

• A number from 0 to 9999

 Default:  None

 Example:  1

 Considerations:

•  The initial value of this field is set to 1 day at the time that the server is installed.


Password Expiration Period - Help

 Type the number of days the Node and Administrator passwords are to remain active in the Password Expiration Period field.

 Upon expiration of this period, users are prompted to change their passwords.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The password expiration period can contain:

• A number from 1 to 9999

 Default:  None

 Example:  60

 Considerations:

•  The initial value of this field is set to 90 days at the time that the server is installed.


Open - Help

 Select Open to allow nodes to register themselves to ADSM. Otherwise, the nodes can be added only by the ADSM systems or policy administrators.

 During Open Registration, when an unregistered workstation attempts to contact the server, the server prompts the user for a password and contact information to dynamically register the workstation as a node.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Closed - Help

 Select Closed to allow nodes to be registered only by an ADSM systems or policy administrator. Otherwise, any client user may add nodes to the server.

 Initial Setting:  On


Availability - Help

 The Availability field displays the availability of the server.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Installation Date - Help

 The Installation Date field displays the date and time when the server was first installed.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Restart Date - Help

 The Restart Date field displays the date and time when the server was last started.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Sessions Include - Help

Use this window to specify the client session number you want displayed in the Details view. Type the number of the client session you want to include in the Session Number field.

 Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Considerations:

• The only valid values for the Session Number field are a number for one administrative client session or one client node session; or an asterisk (*) for all client node sessions. No other wildcard character combinations are valid.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Session Number - Help

 Type the identification number of the client session in the Session Number field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Session Number can contain:

• A numeric value

• '*' for all

 Default: *  for all

 Example:  12

 Considerations:

• The only valid values for the Session Number field are a number for one administrative client session or one client node session; or an asterisk (*) for all client node sessions. No other wildcard character combinations are valid.


Process Number - Help

 Type the process number in the Process Number field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Process Number can contain:

• A numeric value

• '*' for all

 Default: *  for all

 Example:  12

 Considerations:

• The only valid values for the Process Number field are a number for one process or an asterisk (*) for all processes. No other wildcard character combinations are valid.


Search Message Text - Help

 Type the message text in the Search Message Text field. The message IDs and the message text will be searched for matches.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Message Text can contain:

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Wildcard characters

 Default: *  for all

 Example:  activity log pruning

 Considerations:

• Search text is not case-sensitive.


Processes Include - Help

Use this window to specify the process number you want displayed in the Details view. Type the number of the process you want in the Process Number field.

 Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Considerations:

• The only valid values for the Process Number field are a number for one process or an asterisk (*) for all processes. No other wildcard character combinations are valid.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Activity Log Include - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the activity log entries you want displayed in the Details view.

 To include filtered activity log entries in the view:

1. Select from the following:

• Enter the range of dates and times using the Message Times spin buttons or select the default check boxes.

• Type the message ID in the Message ID field.

• Type the message text in the Search Message Text field.

2. Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Considerations:

• The refresh time for the activity log include can be lengthy if the range of times and dates is great.

• You must deselect the check boxes if you want to update the Date or Time fields.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Activity Log From Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Date spin buttons to be used as the beginning point for the data included in the Activity Log Details view.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Date can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 to the current year

 Default:  Current Date

 Example:  03 / 29 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.

• You must deselect the One Hour Before Current Server Date and Time check box if you want to update the Date field.


Activity Log From Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Time spin buttons to be used as the beginning point for the data included in the Activity Log Details view.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Time can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Default:  One hour before current time

 Example:  01 : 00

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time

• You must deselect the One Hour Before Current Server Date and Time check box if you want to update the Time field.


Activity Log To Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Date spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the data included in the Activity Log Details view.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Date can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 to the current year

 Default:  Current Date

 Example:  05 / 22 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.

• You must deselect the Current Server Date and Time check box if you want to update the Date field.


Activity Log To Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Time spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the data included in the Activity Log Details view.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Time can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Default:  Current time

 Example:  23 : 59

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time

• You must deselect the Current Server Date and Time check box if you want to update the Time field.


Message ID - Help

 Type the numeric portion of the message ID in the Message ID field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Message ID can contain:

• A numeric value

• '*' for all

 Default:  *  for all

 Example:  1609

 Considerations:

• The only valid values for the Message ID field are a number for one message or an asterisk (*) for all messages. No other wildcard character combinations are valid.


Server Name - Help

 Type a new server name in the Server Name field to change the server name.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Server Name can contain:

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• 1 to 64 characters

 Default:  Current server name

 Example:  OSSERVER


One Hour Before Current Server Date and Time - Help

 Select One Hour Before Current Server Date and Time to use the current server date and a time of one hour before the current server time as a beginning point for the data that will be included in the Details view. You must deselect the One Hour Before Current Server Date and Time check box if you want to update the Date or Time fields.

 Default:  On


Current Server Date and Time - Help

 Select Current Server Date and Time to use the current server date and time as an ending point for the data that will be included in the Details view. You must deselect the Current Server Date and Time check box if you want to update the Date or Time fields.

 Default:   On


Include - Help

Select Include to specify the filter criteria for the objects you want to display in the current view.


Cancel - Help

Use this window to confirm the objects you have selected to cancel. All the objects in the list are in a "selected" state. You can deselect from the list the objects you do not want to cancel.

 To cancel selected objects:

1.  Verify that you want to cancel all the selected objects displayed in the scrollable list box.

2. Select the Cancel push button to cancel all objects that are still selected. Select the Return push button if you want to close the window without canceling objects.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Cancel List Box - Help

 The Cancel list box displays objects you have selected to be canceled. The objects in the list are in a selected state when the list displays. You can deselect an item if you do not want it canceled.


Cancel Processes - Help

 Select Cancel Processes to cancel the selected processes displayed in the window.

 Before you cancel a process, consider that you will not be able to recover it.


Return - Help

 Select Return to close the window without making changes.


Cancel Sessions - Help

 Select Cancel Sessions to cancel the selected sessions displayed in the window.

 Before you cancel a session, consider that you will not be able to recover it.


Server Export - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the different fields you can use to export server control information and selected file data.

 Server control information includes:

• Administrator definitions

• Node definitions

• Policy and Scheduling definitions

 File data includes:

• File Space definitions

• Authorization rules

• Files from Storage Pools

 You can access the Server Export notebook from the File menu choice in the Server Details view.

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

Type of Data

Shows the server control information and selected backup and archive file data you can export.

Destination

Shows the different media to which you can export server control information and selected file data. You must specify the Device Class you want to use. You can specify the Volume Names you want to use, or ADSM will use available scratch media. Select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting server control information or selected file data.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Considerations

• If you select Preview Only, the Volume Names field and the Device Class list box are deactivated.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Server Import - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to import server control information and selected file data.

 Server control information includes:

• Administrator definitions

• Node definitions

• Policy and Scheduling definitions

 File data includes:

• File Space definitions

• Authorization rules

• Files from Storage Pools

 You can access the Server Import notebook from the File menu choice in the Server Details view.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

Type of Data

Shows the server control information and backup and archive file data you can import. Select the Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export check box to change the dates on archived files to avoid possible loss of file data. You can select the Replace Existing Server Control Information check box to overwrite existing server control information.

Source

Shows the type of media from which you can import server control information and file data. You can select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before importing server control information or file data. You must select a device class from which to import. Volume Names is a required field except on the VM server.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Type of Data - Help

 Use the Type of Data section of the Server Export notebook to specify the server control information and selected backup and archive file data you want to export. All types of file data, backup and archive, include server control information.

 Archived files are files which are placed in an archive storage pool defined at the time ADSM is installed. Files are archived for long term storage.

 Backup files are versions of files placed in a backup storage pool. Multiple backup versions of a file can exist, but only the most current version of a backup file is considered active.

 The Type of Data section contains one page.

 Considerations

• Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

• File data consists of file space definitions, authorization rules, and groups of files from Storage Pools.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Type of Data - Help

 Use the Type of Data section of the Server Import notebook to specify the server control information and selected backup and archive file data you want to import. All file data includes server control information. Existing file spaces cannot be replaced. Select the Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export check box to change the dates on archived files to avoid possible loss of file data. You can select the Replace Existing Server Control Information check box to overwrite existing server control information.

 Archived files are files which are placed in an archive storage pool defined at the time ADSM is installed. Files are archived for long term storage.

 Backup files are versions of files placed in a backup storage pool. Multiple backup versions of a file can exist, but only the most current version of a backup file is considered active.

 The Type of Data section contains one page.

 Considerations

• Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

• File data consists of file space definitions, authorization rules, and groups of files from Storage Pools.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Destination - Help

 Use the Destination section of the Server Export notebook to specify the device class and volume names to which you want to export server control information and selected file data. A device class must be selected. The Can Use Scratch Media check box is selected by default. When Can Use Scratch Media is not selected, Volume Names is a required field. You can select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting server control information or data.

 The Destination section contains one page.

 Considerations

• Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

• File data consists of file space definitions, authorization rules, and groups of files from Storage Pools.

• If you select Preview Only, the Volume Names field and the Device Class list box are deactivated.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Source - Help

 Use the Source section of the Server Import notebook to specify the device class and volume names from which you want to import server control information and selected file data. You can select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before importing server control information or selected file data. You can specify the volume names you want to import, or leave Volume Names blank to import all storage volumes from the specified device class.

 You must select a device class from which to import server control information and selected file data. Volume Names is a required field except on the VM server.

 The Source section contains one page.

 Considerations

• Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

• File data consists of file space definitions, authorization rules, and groups of files from Storage Pools.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class to which you want server control information and selected file data exported. The Device Class list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can select only one device class from the list. A selection is required when you want to export server control information and selected file data. A selection is not required when you select the Preview Only check box to view server control information in the Activity Log before exporting any information.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class list box to select the device class from which you want server control information and selected file data imported. The Device Class list box specifies the types of sequential access media that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can select only one device class from the list. A selection is required when you want to preview or import server control information and selected file data.


Volume Names - Help

 Type specific volume names in the Volume Names field to import server control information and selected file data from those volumes that you specify.

 Volume names identify sequential access media volumes that have been assigned to a storage pool to store backed up or archived files.

 This field must be filled in, except for the VM server.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

    AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

    MVS - rlvol2

    OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\rlvol2.dsm

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.


Volume Names - Help

 Type specific volume names in the Volume Names field to indicate the volumes to which you want to export server control information and selected file data. You can leave the Volume Names field blank to include all volumes from the selected device class.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Volume Names field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Examples:

    AIX - /usr/adsm/rlvol2

    MVS - rlvol2

    OS/2, Windows - d:\adsm\rlvol2.dsm

 Considerations:

• Multiple entries must be separated by commas without spaces.


Preview Only (You Can View Results in Activity Log) - Help

 You can select Preview Only to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting server control information and selected file data. When you select Preview Only from the Server window, ADSM calculates the number of volumes needed and reports on the types of server control information and selected file data that are to be exported.

 Default:  Off


Preview Only (You Can View Results in Activity Log) - Help

 You can select Preview Only to view the results in the Activity Log before importing server control information and selected file data. When you select Preview Only from the Server window, ADSM calculates the number of volumes used and reports on the types of server control information and selected file data that are to be imported. All specified export volumes must be mounted and available for reading when importing.

 Default:  Off


Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export - Help

 Select Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export to specify that you want to reset the dates on files relative to the time they are imported, avoiding immediate roll-off based on retention values specified in the management class. Files that have been stored for long periods of time can have dates that are older than the dates set for retaining files.

 If not selected, the dates for file copies are set to the values specified when the files were exported. The actual date when the file was stored is used.

 If selected, the dates for file copies are adjusted to the date of import. The date will be changed to insure that all selected file data is imported.

 Default:  Off  (does not change file dates.)


Replace Existing Server Control Information - Help

 Select Replace Existing Server Control Information to specify that you want to overwrite existing server control information. Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

 Default:  Off


Can Use Scratch Media - Help

 Select Can Use Scratch Media to specify that you want to export server control information and selected file data to any sequential access media that is available. If Can Use Scratch Media is not selected, you must enter the volume names to which you want to export the server control information and selected file data.

 Default:  On (use scratch media)

 Considerations

•  If the Device Class File is selected, the Volume Names field must be left blank.


Server Control Information Only - Help

 Select Server Control Information Only to specify that you want to export only the server control information without any file data. Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

 Server control information is included with all types of file data.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


All Archive File Data - Help

 Select All Archive File Data to specify that you want to export all archived files with the server control information.

 Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


Active Backup File Data - Help

 Select Active Backup File Data to specify that you want to export active backup files with the server control information.

 Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool, or they can still reside on the node's file system.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


Active Backup, All Archive, and All Migrated File Data - Help

 Select Active Backup, All Archive, and All Migrated File Data to specify that you want to export active backup files, all archived files, and all migrated files with the server control information.

•  Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool or that still reside on the node's file system.

•  Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

•  Migrated files include files moved for space management purposes from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


All Backup File Data - Help

 Select All Backup File Data to specify that you want to export all backup files with the server control information.

 All Backup File Data includes both active and inactive backup files. Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool or that still reside on the node's file system. Inactive backup files include versions that are not the most recent versions or the corresponding original files that have been deleted from the client node's file system.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


All Backup, Archive, and Migrated File Data - Help

 Select All Backup, Archive, and Migrated File Data to specify that you want to export all backup, archive, and migrated files with the server control information.

•  All backup file data includes both active and inactive backup files. Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool or that still reside on the node's file system. Inactive backup files include versions that are not the most recent versions or the corresponding original files that have been deleted from the client node's file system.

•  Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

•  Migrated files include files moved for space management purposes from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


Export - Help

 Select Export to send the server control information and selected file data to the sequential access media you have selected.

 If the Preview Only check box is selected, the results will be sent to the Activity Log for viewing without exporting any server control information or selected file data.


Import - Help

 Select Import to receive the server control information and selected file data from the selected sequential access media.

 If the Preview Only check box is selected, the results will be sent to the Activity Log for viewing without importing any server control information or file data.


Export - Help

Select Export from the File menu to export server control information and selected file data to sequential access media or to the Activity Log for viewing before you export any data. Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions. File data consists of file space definitions, authorization rules, and groups of files from Storage Pools.

 Export is useful for server maintenance and disaster recovery.

 This choice is always available.


Import - Help

Select Import from the File menu to import server control information and selected file data from selected sequential access media, or you can preview the results in the Activity Log before you import any data. Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions. File data consists of file space definitions, authorization rules, and groups of files from Storage Pools.

 Import is useful for server maintenance, disaster recovery, and adding new servers to a network.

 This choice is always available.


Server Control Information Only - Help

 Select Server Control Information Only to specify that you want to import only the server control information without any file data. Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

 Server control information is included with all types of file data.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


All Archive File Data - Help

 Select All Archive File Data to specify that you want to import all archived files with the server control information.

 Archived file dates can be adjusted to the time they are imported by selecting the Adjust File Copy Dates for Time Elapsed Since Export check box, preventing loss of file data.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


Active Backup File Data - Help

 Select Active Backup File Data to specify that you want to import active backup files with the server control information.

 Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool, or that still reside on the node's file system.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


Active Backup, All Archive, and All Migrated File Data - Help

 Select Active Backup, All Archive, and All Migrated File Data to specify that you want to import active backup files, all archived files, and all migrated files with the server control information.

•  Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool, or that still reside on the node's file system.

•  Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

•  Migrated files include files moved for space management purposes from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


All Backup File Data - Help

 Select All Backup File Data to specify that you want to import all backup files with the server control information.

 All Backup File Data includes both active and inactive backup files. Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool, or that still reside on the node's file system. Inactive backup files include versions that are not the most recent versions or the corresponding original files that have been deleted from the client node's file system.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


All Backup, Archive, and Migrated File Data - Help

 Select All Backup, Archive, and Migrated File Data to specify that you want to import all backup, archive, and migrated files with the server control information.

•  All backup includes both active and inactive backup files. Active backup files are the most recent versions of files that have been placed in a backup storage pool or that still reside on the node's file system. Inactive backup files include versions that are not the most recent versions or the corresponding original files that have been deleted from the client node's file system.

•  Archived files include file data that has been placed in an archive storage pool for long term storage.

•  Migrated files include files moved for space management purposes from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


Licensed Capacity - Help

 The Licensed Capacity field displays the amount of storage allowed for backup and archive data and the ADSM database, as defined in the license terms.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Licensed Client Connections - Help

 The License Client Connections field displays the number of client nodes allowed, as defined in the license terms.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Days Between Automatic License Audits - Help

 Enter the number of days that you would like between automatic license audits using the Days Between Automatic License Audits spin buttons.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Days Between Automatic License Audits field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 30

 Default:  30

 Example:  30


Last Audit was Performed - Help

 The Last Audit was Performed field displays the date and time at which the last license audit was performed on the ADSM server. The license compliance information displayed in the server properties notebook is valid as of this date and time.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Server Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties of the server. Use this notebook to view or update properties of the server. You can also manage server operations from this window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the properties you can update for the server.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Sequential Volume History - Help

The Sequential Volume History object contains information gathered by the ADSM server for the following volume types:

• Volumes containing a backed up ADSM database

• Volumes containing exported administrator, node, policy, or server data

• Sequential access storage pool volumes that have been reused, added, or deleted

 The Sequential Volume History object opens to a Details view. Use the view to determine the following:

• Which backup volumes to use to restore a database to a specific point in time

• Which volumes to use to import administrator, node, policy, or server data

• Which sequential access storage pool volumes need to be audited after performing a point-in-time restore of the database

• Which sequential access storage pool volumes need to be returned to a user's tape management system after a point-in-time restore of the database

• Which sequential access storage pool volumes no longer exist

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Sequential Volume History:

•  Details


Migration Storage Used - Help

 The Migration Storage Used field displays the amount of storage used for migrated files.

 Migrated files include files moved for space management purposes from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds. This information is current as of the last license audit that was executed on the server.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


All Migrated File Data - Help

 Select All Migrated File Data to specify that you want to import all migrated files with the server control information.

 Migrated files include files moved for space management purposes from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


All Migrated File Data - Help

 Select All Migrated File Data to specify that you want to export all migrated files with the server control information.

 Migrated files include files moved for space management purposes from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.

 Default:  Server Control Information Only


Backup Device Configuration - Help

Select Backup Device Configuration to backup the Device Configuration to a file or files.

 The Backup Device Configuration menu choice is available in the Server Properties view.


Device Configuration Backup - Help

Use this window to specify a file or files in which to store a backup copy of the ADSM server Device Configuration which consists of the following information:

• Device class definitions

• Drive definitions

• Library definitions

 If your ADSM database is damaged or lost and must be restored using a database backup series or an offline salvage dump, Device Configuration information must be available before ADSM can restore the database.

 To backup Device Configuration:

1. Type the name of the file or files in the File Names field, or leave the field blank to use the default in the options file.

2. Select the Backup push button to backup Device Configuration.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


File Names - Help

 Type a file name or names in the File Names field to which Device Configuration information will be backed up. The file names must meet your workstation naming conventions.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 Default:  Last used value

 Example:

     AIX - /home/bill/backup

     OS/2, Windows - D:\BACKUP.FIL

 Considerations:

• If this field is left blank, the server will use the value specified in the options file.

• The File Names may include a path designation.

• Separate each file name with a comma and no intervening spaces.


Backup - Help

 Select Backup to backup the Device Configuration.


Volume History Details - Help

This window displays information about each Volume History entry. Use this window to select the Volume History entry or entries you want to work with. The default view displays all Volume History information that exists on this server. From this window you can backup Volume History information to a file, or print or delete the information.

 Data Columns

Date and Time

Displays the date and time the volume was used for a backup operation.

Volume Type

Displays the type of data that was sent to a volume.

Series Number

Displays the database backup series to which a full or incremental backup belongs.

Operation Number

Displays the sequence number of an operation within a database backup series.

Volume Sequence

Displays the sequence number of a volume within an operation.

Device Class

Displays the device class used for the volume.

Volume Name

Displays the name assigned to the volume.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Volume History entry

 Considerations:

• The Series Number and Operation Number columns are not displayed for Version 1 servers.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume History - Help

Each Volume History entry represents information that the ADSM server collects for the following types of volumes:

• Volumes containing a backed up ADSM database

• Volumes containing exported administrator, node, policy, or server data

• Sequential access storage pool volumes that have been reused, added, or deleted

 Select the entry or entries you want to work with.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Volume History:

•  Details


Backup - Help

Select Backup to backup Volume History information to a file or files.


Volume History Backup - Help

Use this window to specify a file or files in which to store a backup copy of Volume History information.

 Backing up the Volume History ensures that a copy is available if it becomes necessary to perform a point-in-time restore of the ADSM database.

 To backup the Volume History:

1. Type the file names in the File Name(s) field, or leave the field blank to use the default in the options file.

2. Select the Backup push button to backup the Volume History.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


File Names - Help

 Type a file name or names in the File Names field to which Volume History information will be backed up. The file names must meet your workstation naming conventions.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 Default:  Last used value

 Example:

     AIX - /home/bill/backup

     OS/2, Windows - D:\BACKUP.FIL

 Considerations:

• If this field is left blank, the server will use the value specified in the options file.

• The File Names may include a path designation.

• Separate each file name with a comma and no intervening spaces.


Backup - Help

 Select Backup to backup the Volume History information to a file or files.


Volume History Include - Help

Use this window to specify the filters for the Volume History information you want to include in the Volume History Details view.

 To include Volume History objects:

1. Use the input fields to specify the message date and time range.

2. Use the radio buttons to specify the type of volume history to include.

3. Select the Apply or the Include push button.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Date spin buttons to be used as the beginning point for the data included in the Volume History Details view.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Date can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 to the current year

 Initial Value:   01/01/1993

 Default:  Last used value

 Example:  03 / 29 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.


Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Time spin buttons to be used as the beginning point for the data included in the Volume History Details view.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Time can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Initial Value:   00:00

 Default:  Last used value

 Example:  01 : 00

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time


Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Date spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the data included in the Volume History Details view.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Date can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 to the current year

 Default:  Current Date

 Example:  05 / 22 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.


Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Time spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the data included in the Volume History Details view.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Time can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Default:  Current time

 Example:  23 : 59

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time


All - Help

 Select All to specify that all types of Volume History are to be included in the Details view.

 Initial Setting:  On


Database Backup Volumes - Help

 Select Database Backup Volumes to specify that only database backup volumes are to be included in the Details view.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Export Volumes - Help

 Select Export Volumes to specify that only volumes that have been used in exporting server information are to be included in the Details view.

 Initial Setting:  Off


New Sequential Access Storage Volumes - Help

 Select New Sequential Access Storage Volumes to specify that only volumes that have been added to a storage pool are to be included in the Details view.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Reused Sequential Access Storage Volumes - Help

 Select Reused Sequential Access Storage Volumes to specify that only sequential access storage volumes that have been reclaimed and reused are to be included in the Details view.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Deleted Sequential Access Storage Volumes - Help

 Select Deleted Sequential Access Storage Volumes to specify that only volumes that have been deleted from a storage pool are to be included in the Details view.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Volume History Delete - Help

Use this window to specify the criteria for the Volume History information you want to delete.

 To delete Volume History information:

1. Use the input fields to specify the date and time prior to which Volume History information will be deleted.

2. Use the radio buttons to specify the type of Volume History to delete.

3. Select the Delete push button to delete the Volume History information, or Cancel to cancel the delete action.

 Considerations:

• You should not delete Volume History information until you have restored the ADSM database at a later time than the time you specify for a delete operation.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Date spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the data to be deleted from the Volume History.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Date can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 to the current year

 Initial Value:  Current date

 Default:  Last used value

 Example:  05 / 22 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.


Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Time spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the data to be deleted from the Volume History.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Time can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Initial Value:  Current time

 Default:  Last used value

 Example:  23 : 59

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time


All - Help

 Select All to specify that all types of Volume History are to be deleted.

 Initial Setting:  On


Database Backup Volumes - Help

 Select Database Backup Volumes to specify that only database backup volumes are to be deleted.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Export Volumes - Help

 Select Export Volumes to specify that only export volumes are to be deleted.

 Initial Setting:  Off


New Sequential Access Storage Volumes - Help

 Select New Sequential Access Storage Volumes to specify that only new sequential access storage volumes are to be deleted.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Reused Sequential Access Storage Volumes - Help

 Select Reused Sequential Access Storage Volumes to specify that only reused sequential access storage volumes are to be deleted.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Deleted Sequential Access Storage Volumes - Help

 Select Deleted Sequential Access Storage Volumes to specify that only volumes that have been deleted from a storage pool are to be deleted.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Server Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties of the server. Use this notebook to view or update properties of the server. You can also manage server operations from this window.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the properties you can update for the server.

License

Shows server license terms and compliance information

 This information is valid for ADSM servers that enforce license compliance.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Audit License Terms - Help

Select Audit License Terms to start a process that compares the current server configuration with the terms of the current server license. Audit License Terms applies to ADSM servers that enforce license compliance.

 Selecting Audit License Terms will display an acknowledgement window which will show the background process id. You can monitor the activity log of the Server object to see when the process completes.

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 For more information regarding the License Audit, consult your Server License Agreement.


License - Help

 Use the License section of the Server notebook to view server license terms and to specify the period between automatic license audits. The License section is available only for ADSM servers that enforce license compliance.

 The License section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the License section to view the time when the last audit occurred, and to set the audit period.

 Use Page 2 of the License section to view the data obtained from the server for licensed factors in comparison with the terms of the server license agreement.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Last Audit was Performed

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Licensing Details

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Licensing Details - Help

 The Licensing Details field displays the data obtained from the server for licensed factors in comparison with the terms of the server license agreement. This information is current as of the last license audit that was executed on the server.

 For more information regarding the data displayed in this field, consult your Server License Agreement.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Database Dump Volumes - Help

 Select Database Dump Volumes to specify that only database dump volumes are to be included in the Details view.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Database Dump Volumes - Help

 Select Database Dump Volumes to specify that only database dump volumes are to be deleted.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Server Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

 Server Tasks

• Activity Log Tasks

• Processes Tasks

• Sequential Volume History Tasks

• Server Object Tasks

• Sessions Tasks


Updating Server Properties - Help

You can update properties of the server.

 To Update Server Properties:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the field or control you want to update.

 Step 3 	 Update the field or control with the new information.

 Step 4 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.


Viewing Server Information - Help

You can view server information.

 To View the Server Information:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 View the pages of the Server Properties notebook, selecting the page forward control to view subsequent pages.


Printing Server Properties - Help

You can copy properties of the server to a file. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To Print Server Properties:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Server - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the properties of the Server to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Enabling the Server - Help

To Enable the Server:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Enable from the File Menu.


Disabling the Server - Help

You can disable the server.

 To Disable the Server:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Disable from the File Menu.

 Considerations

•  Disable makes the server unavailable to client node sessions in order to perform maintenance tasks.

•  Notify Administrators and users that you plan to disable the server.


Halting the Server - Help

You can halt the server to stop all ADSM activity.

 To Halt the Server:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Halt from the File Menu.

 Considerations

•  When Halt is performed, all user activity stops immediately and no Administrator activity is possible.

•  Halt forces the server to shutdown and results in the canceling of all client sessions and processes even if they are not complete.

•  Halt closes the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window.


Viewing Sessions - Help

You can view details of client sessions.

 To View Sessions, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sessions object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains client sessions displays.

 Step 2 	 View the client sessions or select Include from the View menu to specify the client session number you want displayed in the Details view.

 Step 3 	 Type the client session number in the Session number field and select the Include push button to view the specified information.


Viewing Processes - Help

You can view details of processes.

 To View Processes, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Processes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains server processes displays.

 Step 2 	 View the list of processes or select Include from the View Menu to specify the process number you want displayed in the Details view.

 Step 3 	 Type the process number in the Process Number field and select the Include push button to view the required information.


Viewing the Activity Log - Help

You can view activity log entries.

 To View the Activity Log, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Activity Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains server activity log entries displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Include from the View Menu to specify filters for the activity log entries you want displayed in the Details view.

 Step 3 	 Use the default date and time range, or deselect the date and time check boxes and use the spin buttons to enter the Message times range. If desired, type the Message id and/or Search message text in the appropriate fields in the Activity Log Include window.

 Step 4 	 Select the Include push button to view the required information.


Canceling Selected Sessions - Help

You can cancel selected client sessions.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The ID numbers of the client sessions to cancel

 To cancel selected client sessions, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sessions object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains client sessions displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the client sessions in the Details view you want to cancel.

 Step 3 	 Select Cancel Session from the File menu.

 Step 4 	 A cancel confirmation window is displayed for you to verify the client sessions to be canceled. You can deselect client sessions you choose not to cancel.

 Step 5 	 Select the Cancel sessions push button on the confirmation window to cancel the selected client sessions from the ADSM server. Select the Return push button to not cancel any of the client sessions.

 Considerations

•  Nodes will reconnect automatically unless the server is disabled.


Canceling Selected Processes - Help

You can cancel selected processes.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The ID numbers of the processes to cancel

 To cancel selected processes, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Processes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains server processes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the processes in the Details view you want to cancel.

 Step 3 	 Select Cancel Process from the File menu.

 Step 4 	 A cancel confirmation window is displayed for you to verify the processes to be canceled. You can deselect processes you choose not to cancel.

 Step 5 	 Select the Cancel processes push button on the confirmation window to cancel the selected processes from the ADSM server. Select the Return push button to not cancel any of the processes.

 Considerations

•  ADSM might delay the cancelation if the process to be canceled is currently waiting for a tape to be mounted.


Printing All Sessions - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Sessions in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for client sessions you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print client sessions, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sessions object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains client sessions displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Sessions - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the Sessions information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Sessions information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing All Processes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Processes in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Processes you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print Processes, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Processes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains server processes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Processes - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the Processes information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Processes information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing All Activity Log objects - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Activity Log entries in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Activity Log objects you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print Activity Log objects, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Activity Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains server activity log entries displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Activity Log - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the Activity Log information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Activity Log information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Sessions - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Sessions in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Sessions:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print selected client sessions, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sessions object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains client sessions displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected client sessions, select the client sessions in the details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Sessions - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected client sessions to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Processes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Processes in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Processes:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print selected Processes, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Processes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains server processes displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected Processes, select the Processes in the details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Processes - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected Processes to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Activity Log objects - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Activity Log entries in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the Activity Log:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print selected Activity Log objects, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Activity Log object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains server activity log entries displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected Activity Log objects, select the objects in the details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Activity Log - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected Activity Log objects to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Canceling All Sessions - Help

You can cancel all client node sessions.

 To cancel all client node sessions, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sessions object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains client sessions displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Cancel All Sessions from the File menu to cancel all of the client node sessions.

 Considerations

•  Nodes that are canceled while in the Idle Wait state will reconnect automatically the next time an action is performed unless the server is disabled.


Monitoring Processes - Help

You can monitor processes for long running operations.

 The ADSM server may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. If the ADSM server starts a process, a message box displays with a process number for each process that has been initiated. Use the process numbers to monitor the progress of the processes.

 To monitor the completion of a long running operation, you must periodically refresh the Processes Details view in the Server object until the processes for the operation no longer appear in the view.

 Upon completion of the process, view the results in the Activity Log window of the server.

 To Monitor Processes, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Processes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains server processes displays.

 Step 2 	 View the list of processes or select Include from the View menu to specify the process number you want displayed in the Details view.

 Step 3 	 Type the process number in the Process Number field and select the Include push button to view the required information.

 Step 4 	 The processes for the long running operation are displayed if they have not yet completed. To refresh the view, select Refresh Now from the View menu in the Processes Details view. When the processes no longer appear in the view, they have completed.


Importing Server - Help

You can import a server, including its file data.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• Type of data you want to import

• Device class on which the data is stored

• Volume names where the data is stored

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To import a server with all its backup file data:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Import from the File menu. The Server Import notebook displays.

 Step 3 	 Select All Backup File Data in the Type of Data section.

 Step 4 	 Select the Device Class and specify the Volume Names in the Source section of the Server Import notebook to indicate from where you want to import data.

 Step 5 	 Select the Import push button to import the server control information and selected file data.

 Considerations

• Volume Names is required on all servers except for VM.

• Select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before importing any server control information or file data.

• Select Replace Existing Server Control Information to overwrite existing information.

• Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

• File data consists of file space definitions, authorization rules, and groups of files from Storage Pools.


Exporting Server - Help

You can export server control information and selected file data to sequential access media.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The type of data you want to export

• Device class on which the data is to be stored

• Volume names where the data is to be stored

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To export a server with all its backup and archive file data and server control information:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Export from the File menu. The Server Export notebook displays.

 Step 3 	 Select All Backup and Archive File Data in the Type of Data section.

 Step 4 	 Select the Device Class to which you want to export the server control information and selected file data, leaving the Volume Names field blank and the Can Use Scratch Media check box selected.

 Step 5 	 Select the Export push button to export the server control information and selected file data.

 Considerations

• If scratch media is not used, you must specify Volume Names.

• Select the Preview Only check box to view the results in the Activity Log before exporting any server control information or file data.

• Server control information includes Administrator definitions, Node definitions, and Policy and Scheduling definitions.

• File data consists of file space definitions, authorization rules, and groups of files from Storage Pools.


Auditing License Terms - Help

You can manually audit the license terms for ADSM servers that enforce license compliance.

 This action may create a background process that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To audit the ADSM license terms:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Audit License Terms from the File menu. This will start a process that compares the current server configuration with the terms of the current server license. An acknowledgement window displays which will show the background process id.

 Step 3 	 View the License section of the Server Properties Notebook to see the results of the audit when the process ends.

 Considerations

• You can monitor the Activity Log in the Server object to see when the license audit completes.

• You can cancel the license audit by opening the Processes object and selecting Cancel Process from the Selected menu.

• You must refresh the Server Properties Notebook view if it was open when you selected Audit License Terms.


Backing Up Device Configuration - Help

You can backup Device Configuration information.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To backup Device Configuration:

 Step 1 	 Open the Server object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Backup Device Configuration from the File menu.

 Step 3 	 Type the name of the file or files you want to send the information to in the File Names field, or leave the field blank to use the default in the options file.

 Step 4 	 Select the Backup push button to backup the ADSM server device configuration.

 Considerations

• If your ADSM database is damaged or lost and must be restored using a database backup series or an offline salvage dump, Device Configuration information must be available before ADSM can restore the database.


Viewing Volume History Information - Help

You can view Volume History information.

 To view Volume History information, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sequential Volume History object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Volume History information displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Include from the View menu to specify filters for the Volume History entries you want displayed in the Details view.


Backing Up Volume History Information - Help

You can backup Volume History information to a file or files for database recovery purposes.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To backup Volume History information, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sequential Volume History object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Volume History information displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Backup from the File menu. The Volume History - Backup window displays.

 Step 3 	 Type the name of the file or files you want the Volume History information to be sent to in the File Names field, or leave the field blank to use the default in the options file.

 Step 4 	 Select the Backup push button to backup Volume History information.

 Considerations

• To print Volume History information to a file for viewing, see Printing All Volume Histories or Printing Selected Volume Histories.

• Backing up the Volume History ensures that a copy is available if it becomes necessary to perform a point-in-time restore of the ADSM database.


Printing All Volume Histories - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Volume History entries in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print all Volume History entries, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sequential Volume History object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Volume History information displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Select All from the Edit menu.

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Volume History - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Volume History information to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.

• To backup the Volume History for recovery at a later date, see Backing Up Volume History Information


Printing Selected Volume Histories - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Volume History entries in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To print selected Volume History entries, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sequential Volume History object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Volume History information displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected Volume History entries, select the entries in the Details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Volume History - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the selected Volume History entries to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.

• To backup the Volume History for recovery at a later date, see Backing Up Volume History Information


Deleting Volume History Information - Help

You can delete Volume History information.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The Date and Time. Volume History information prior to this date and time will be deleted.

• The type of Volume History information to delete

 To delete Volume History information, expand the Server object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Sequential Volume History object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains Volume History information displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Delete from the Edit menu. The Volume History - Delete window displays.

 Step 3 	 Use the spin buttons to select the Date and Time. Volume History information prior to this date and time will be deleted.

 Step 4 	 Select the radio button which specifies the type of Volume History to be deleted.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button to delete the Volume History information.

 Considerations

• You should not delete Volume History information until you have restored the ADSM database at a later time than the time you specify for a delete operation.


Activity Log Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

• Printing all Activity Log objects in a details view

• Printing selected Activity Log objects in a details view

• Viewing the Activity Log


Server Object Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

• Auditing License Terms

• Backing up Device Configuration

• Disabling the Server

• Enabling the Server

• Exporting the Server

• Halting the Server

• Importing a Server

• Printing Server Properties

• Updating Server Properties

• Viewing Server Information


Sessions Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

• Canceling All Sessions

• Canceling Selected Sessions

• Printing all Sessions in a details view

• Printing selected Sessions in a details view

• Viewing Sessions


Processes Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

• Canceling Selected Processes

• Monitoring Processes

• Printing all Processes in a details view

• Printing selected Processes in a details view

• Viewing Processes


Sequential Volume History Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

• Backing up Volume History Information

• Deleting Volume History Information

• Printing All Volume History Information

• Printing Selected Volume History Information

• Viewing Volume History Information


Storage Pools - Help

The Storage Pools object represents a collection of named storage pools containing volumes, used by the server to store backup versions or archive copies of users' files.

 The Storage Pools object opens to an details view. Use the view to add, delete, backup, restore, view, or print storage pool information.

 Expand the Storage Pools object to display the Storage Pool Volumes object.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Storage Pools:

•  Details


Storage Pool Details - Help

This window displays information about each storage pool defined to ADSM. ADSM supports two types of storage pools, one that contains random access media, and the other that contains sequential access media. Use this window to select the storage pools you want to work with. From this window you can create new storage pools, delete existing storage pools, view and update the properties of selected storage pools, or copy to a file information about all or selected storage pools.

 Data Columns

Storage Pool

Displays the name of a storage pool containing either random access media or sequential access media.

Device Class

Displays the name of the device class to which a storage pool is assigned. The device class is one of the predefined device classes: DISK, CARTRIDGE or REEL or one defined by your administrator.

Pool Type

Displays whether a storage pool is a primary storage pool or a copy storage pool.

Next Storage Pool

Displays the name of a storage pool used to store migrated data or files that are not accepted by this storage pool. Unaccepted storage pools are those whose access mode is read only or unavailable or whose high migration threshold has been reached. Unaccepted files are those that exceed the maximum file size for the current storage pool.

Estimated Capacity (MB)

Displays an estimate of the amount of data, in megabytes, which a storage pool can store. For random access media, this also includes any volumes that are varied offline. For sequential access media, this also includes any volumes that have an access mode of unavailable or read only and all scratch volumes.

Percent Utilized

Displays an estimate of the amount of data actually stored in a storage pool. For random access media, this is specified as a percentage of the estimated capacity, including cached data and data that resides on volumes varied offline. For sequential access media, this is specified as a percentage of the number of active bytes on each sequential volume and the estimated capacity of all volumes in the storage pool.

Percent Available for Migration

Displays an estimate of the percent of capacity that is available for migration. For random access media, this is specified as a percentage of the estimated capacity, excluding cached data  but including data on volumes varied offline. For sequential access media, this is specified as a percentage of the number of volumes in the storage pool that contain a least one byte of active data.

High Migration Threshold

Displays the point at which migration for a storage pool can begin. When the Percent Available for Migration reaches this threshold, migration begins.

Low Migration Threshold

Displays the point at which migration for a storage pool can stop. When the Percent Available for Migration reaches this threshold, migration stops.

Migration in Progress

Displays whether or not the migration process is activated for a storage pool. If the Percent Available for Migration is greater than the High Migration Threshold, migration starts.

Volume being Migrated

Displays the name of the volume being migrated if the migration process is in progress for a storage pool. If the migration process is not in progress, this field is blank. This field is only applicable to storage pools containing sequential access media.

Elapsed Migration Time (seconds)

Displays the amount of time that has passed since the current migration process started. If the migration process is not in progress, this value indicates the amount of time needed to complete the previous migration process. Each time the server is restarted, this value is reset to zero.

Amount Migrated (MB)

Displays the amount of data, in megabytes, that has been migrated since the current migration process was started. If the migration process is not in progress, this value indicates the amount of data migrated during the previous migration process. Each time the server is restarted, this value is reset to zero.

Caching Enabled

Displays whether or not caching is activated for a storage pool. This field is only applicable to storage pools containing random access media.

Collocation Enabled

Displays whether or not collocation is activated for a storage pool. This field is only applicable to storage pools containing sequential access media.

Reclamation Threshold

Displays the point at which reclamation of fragmented data on a volume in a storage pool starts. This field is only applicable to storage pools containing sequential access media.

Reclamation in Progress

Displays whether or not reclamation is activated for a storage pool. The percentage of reclaimable space for each volume is compared to the Reclamation Threshold to determine if reclamation should start. This field is only applicable to storage pools containing sequential access media.

Volume being Reclaimed

Displays the name of the volume being reclaimed if the reclamation process is in progress for a storage pool. If the reclamation process is not in progress, this field is blank. This field is only applicable to storage pools containing sequential access media.

Maximum Size File

Displays the maximum size of a file that can be stored in a storage pool.

Maximum Scratch Volumes

Displays the maximum number of scratch volumes that you want ADSM to use for archiving, backing up, and migrating files and also for collocation and reclamation. This field is only applicable to storage pools containing sequential access media.

Access Mode

Displays how data in a storage pool can be accessed. Possible access modes are: Read/write, Read Only and Unavailable. The storage pool access mode controls the use of its volumes for backup/archive/restore/retrieve of client data.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the storage pool that you want to add, update, delete or view. If you select multiple storage pools and then select Open as Properties from the File menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Storage Pool

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Storage Pool - Help

Each Storage Pool object contains a group of volumes that store backup or archive data. ADSM supports two types of storage pools, one that contains random access media and the other that contains sequential access media. Select the storage pool you want to work with. You can open the properties view of a storage pool to view or update information about the storage pool.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a Storage Pool object:

•  Details

•  Properties for Random Access Media

•  Properties for Sequential Access Media


Primary Storage Pool Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields and controls you can use to add a new storage pool containing either random access media or sequential access media. Use this notebook to add descriptive information, assign settings and limits, and specify features unique to either the random access media or sequential access media.

 You can access the Add notebook by selecting Add from the Edit menu on the Storage Pool Details view.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields used to identify a storage pool, to specify the maximum file size it will accept and to set the access mode of the storage pool.

Migration

Shows the fields used to specify migration threshold settings and the name of the next storage pool used in migration.

Device Class

Shows the device class assigned to a storage pool. You can also specify settings unique to storage pools containing either random access media or sequential access media.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Primary Storage Pool Add notebook to enter information about the properties of a new storage pool.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 Use the General page to identify the storage pool, set the storage pool access mode, specify whether a copy storage pool is to be created automatically for the storage pool, and specify the maximum size of a file allowed in a storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Storage Pool Name- Help

 Type the name of the storage pool, which is the destination for either backup or archive files, in the Storage Pool Name field. A storage pool can contain either random access media or sequential access media and can be used for backup or archive of data. A copy storage pool can only contain sequential access media.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Storage Pool Name field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Example:  FASTDISKPOOL

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the storage pool name.

• ADSM provides two predefined random access media storage pools, BACKUPPOOL and ARCHIVEPOOL.


Description - Help

 Type the information that describes the usage of the storage pool in the Description field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Description field can contain:

• 0 to 255 characters

• Any character

 Default:  None

 Example:  Backup files will be stored on fast disk media

 Considerations:

• If quotes are used in this field, they must be balanced.


Maximum Size - Help

 Type a file size amount for this storage pool in the Maximum Size field. This amount is used with a multiplier, from the list which follows this field, to calculate the maximum size file that this storage pool can contain. If a file exceeds the maximum size, it is stored in the next storage pool that can accept that file size.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Maximum Size field can contain:

• 1 to 6 numbers that specify the maximum size of the storage pool

 Default:  None

 Example:  360

 Considerations:

• Zero is not allowed in this field.

• If the No Size Limit check box is selected, the entries in the Maximum Size fields are unavailable.

• At least one of your storage pools should have the No Size Limit check box selected so there is always a storage pool to which files can be stored.

• You can check the No Limit check box if you want to backup or archive files of any size.


Low - Help

 Enter the lowest percentage of storage pool occupancy required to stop migration using the Low spin buttons.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Low field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 99

 Default:  70

 Example:  You can stop migration when occupancy reaches 50 percent by setting this field to 50 and you can start migration when occupancy reaches 80 percent by setting the HIGH field to 80.

 Considerations:

• You can specify 0 to permit migration to empty the storage pool.

• You can specify 99 to prevent migration from occurring for this storage pool.

• It is possible for the migration percent to fall below this threshold due, to file spaces belonging to one owner being migrated at one time.


High - Help

 Enter the highest percentage of storage pool occupancy required to start migration using the High spin buttons.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The High field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 100

 Default:  90

 Example:  You can start migration when occupancy reaches 80 percent by setting this field to 80 and you can stop migration when occupancy reaches 50 percent by setting the LOW field to 50.

 Considerations:

• You can specify 100 to prevent migration from occurring for this storage pool.


Maximum Size - Help

 Use the Maximum Size drop down list box to view the storage multipliers that are available. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list. Select from the list the multiplier that you want to use with the Maximum Size field amount to calculate the maximum file size a storage pool can contain. Multipliers available are:

• Bytes

• Kilobytes

• Megabytes

• Gigabytes

• Terabytes

 You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Considerations:

• The default is Bytes.

• Type a file size amount in the Maximum Size field, which precedes this drop down list box.

• If the No Size Limit check box is selected, the Maximum Size fields are unavailable.


Next Pool - Help

 Use the Next Pool drop down list box to view a list of the storage pools that are available for migrating data to if the original storage pool cannot accept migrated data or files. Unaccepted storage pools are those whose access mode is read only or unavailable or whose migration threshold has been reached. Unaccepted files are those that exceed the maximum size for the current storage pool.

 Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list. Select from the list the storage pool that you want to migrate data to if the current storage pool cannot accept it.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Considerations:

• Select the None check box if you want to prevent migration from occurring from this storage pool.


Read/write - Help

 Select Read/write access mode to allow archive and backup data to be read from or written to volumes within the storage pool.

 Default:  Access Mode is Read/write


Read Only - Help

 Select Read Only access mode to allow archive and backup data to be read from volumes within the storage pool.

 If ADSM is unable to write to a storage pool volume defined as Read/write, it will automatically change the access mode to Read Only.

 Default:  Access Mode is Read/write


Unavailable - Help

 Select Unavailable access mode to specify that none of the volumes within the storage pool can be accessed by the server.

 If ADSM is unable to read from a storage pool volume defined as Read/write or Read Only, it will automatically change the access mode to Unavailable.

 Default:  Access Mode is Read/write


No Size Limit - Help

 Select No Size Limit if there is no limit to the size of a file to be stored in a storage pool. If you select this check box, the Maximum Size fields are unavailable.

 Default:  On(No Size Limit is active)


None - Help

 Select None to specify no migration will occur from this storage pool and there is no Next Storage Pool for clients to use if more data is to be stored and this storage pool is full.

 Default:  On(No migration will occur)


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class section of the Storage Pool Add notebook to assign the new storage pool to an existing device class and to assign properties specific to a storage pool containing either random access media or sequential access media.

 The Device Class section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Device Class page to specify which device class to assign to a storage pool. You can specify caching for random access media and collocation, reclamation and number of scratch volumes for sequential access media.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Maximum Scratch Volumes - Help

 Type the maximum number of scratch volumes that you want ADSM to be able to use. This information ensures you have sufficient space for backing up, archiving or migrating files to a storage pool containing sequential access media and also ensures sufficient space for reclamation and collocation.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Maximum Scratch Volume field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 100000000

 Default:  0

 Example:  5

 Considerations:

• If you do not specify an amount, no scratch volumes are requested by ADSM.

• If your installation has a finite set of sequential access media volumes available to ADSM or you do not use scratch media, specify 0 scratch volumes and define each sequential access volume to a storage pool.


Reclamation Threshold - Help

 Enter a percentage at which you want to initiate reclamation of fragmented data on a volume in a storage pool using the Reclamation Threshold spin buttons. Use reclamation to free entire sequential access media volumes so new data can be stored on them.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Reclamation Threshold can contain:

• A number from 1 to 100

 Default:  60 percent (primary storage pool)

             100 percent (copy storage pool)

 Example:  75 percent

 Considerations:

• Specify an amount greater than 50 percent to make it possible to combine the data stored on two volumes onto a single output volume.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class drop down list box to view the device classes available. A device class is a grouping of storage devices which have similar availability, performance and storage characteristics. The device class is one of the predefined device classes: DISK for all platforms, CARTRIDGE for MVS, or REEL or CARTRIDGE for VM. Your administrator can also define other device class types for your installation with the DEFINE DEVCLASS command.

 Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list. Select from the list the Device Class that you want to assign to this storage pool.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Yes - Help

 Select Yes to specify collocation is activated for a storage pool that contains sequential access media. Collocation gathers backup or archive data together for a client file space. ADSM attempts to keep data from a client file space on a minimum number of sequential access volumes. This helps reduce the number of media mounts needed to restore or retrieve files from sequential access media storage. It takes the server additional time to collocate this data.

 Default:  No (Collocation is not active)


No - Help

 Select No to specify collocation is deactivated for storage pools containing sequential access media. ADSM uses all available space on each sequential access media volume before selecting a new volume. While this provides better utilization of the individual media, the files for users will become scattered across many volumes requiring a larger number of mounts to recover this data.

 Default:  No (Collocation is not active)


Yes - Help

 Select Yes to specify caching is activated for storage pools containing random access media. Caching leaves behind a duplicate copy of data that was migrated to another storage pool during migration and improves the retrievability of files.

 Default:  Yes (Caching is active)


No - Help

 Select No to specify caching is deactivated for storage pools containing random access media. More disk space is made available because a copy is not left behind when migrating data from one storage pool to another.

 Default:  Yes (Caching is active)


Storage Pool Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields and controls you use to update and view the properties of a storage pool containing random access media. Use this notebook to view and update general and migration information about the storage pool.

 You can access this notebook by selecting Open as Properties from the File menu on the Storage Pool Details view.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows information which identifies the storage pool, its properties and gives update history.

Migration

Shows information about migration activity and migration statistics for this storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Storage Pool Properties notebook for random access media to view and update information about the storage pool.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to update the storage pool description and to view capacity and utilization information, device class name, and update history.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to update access mode and maximum file size.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Storage pool

•  Storage pool type

•  Estimated capacity

•  Percent utilized

•  Device class

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Storage Pool - Help

 Use the Storage Pool drop down list box to select a storage pool.

 You can choose only one selection from the list. This field is required.


Device Class - Help

 The Device Class field displays the name of the device class to which a storage pool is assigned.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update By - Help

 The Last Update By field displays the name of the administrator who defined or last updated the properties of this storage pool.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update Date/Time - Help

 The Last Update Date/Time field displays the date and time the properties of this storage pool were defined or last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Estimated Capacity - Help

 The Estimated Capacity field displays an estimate of the amount of data, in megabytes, that a storage pool can store. Before volumes are added to a storage pool, the estimated capacity is zero. For random access media, this includes any volumes that have been varied offline. For sequential access media, this is an estimate because of the variable nature of the media, and includes any volumes that have an access mode of unavailable or read only and all scratch volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Percent Utilized - Help

 The Percent Utilized field displays an estimate of the amount of data actually stored in the storage pool. For random access media, this is specified as a percentage of the estimated capacity, including cached data and data that resides on volumes varied offline. For sequential access media, this is specified as a percentage of the number of active bytes on each volume and the estimated capacity of all volumes in the storage pool.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Migration - Help

 Use the Migration section of the Storage Pool Properties notebook for random access media to view and update the migration information for a storage pool. Migration is the process of moving data from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by high and low migration threshold settings.

 The Migration section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Migration section to view information about migration activity and migration statistics for the storage pool.

 Use Page 2 of the Migration section to specify when migration should begin and end for this storage pool, to specify which storage pool the data should be migrated to, and to activate or deactivate caching.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Migration in progress

•  Elapsed migration time

•  Amount migrated

•  Percent available for migration

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Migration In Progress - Help

 The Migration In Progress field displays whether or not the migration process is activated. If the Percent Available for Migration is greater than the High Migration Threshold, migration can start.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Elapsed Migration Time - Help

 The Elapsed Migration Time field displays the amount of time that has elapsed since migration started, if the migration process is in progress. If the migration process is not in progress, this value indicates the amount of time needed to complete the previous migration process. Each time the server is restarted this value is reset to zero.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Amount Migrated - Help

 The Amount Migrated field displays the amount of data, in megabytes, that has been migrated if the migration process is in progress. If the migration process is not in progress, this value indicates the amount of data migrated during the previous migration process. Each time the server is restarted, this value is reset to zero.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Percent Available for Migration - Help

 The Percent Available for Migration field displays the percent of estimated capacity that is available for migration. As the migration and reclamation processes generate empty volumes, this number decreases. For random access media, this is specified as a percentage of the estimated capacity including cached data and data that resides on volumes varied offline. For sequential access media, this is specified as a percentage of the number of active bytes on each volume and the estimated capacity of all volumes in the storage pool.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Storage Pool Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields and controls you use to update and view the properties of a storage pool containing sequential access media. Use this notebook to view and update general, migration and reclamation information about the storage pool.

 You can access this notebook by selecting Open as Properties from the File menu on the Storage Pool Details view.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows information which identifies the storage pool, its properties and gives update history.

Migration

Shows information about migration activity and migration statistics for this storage pool.

Reclamation

Shows information about reclamation activity and reclamation statistics for this storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Storage Pool Properties notebook for sequential access media to view and update the miscellaneous properties of a storage pool.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to update the storage pool description and to view capacity and utilization information, device class name, specify copy storage pool names, and update history.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to update access mode and maximum file size, specify the maximum number of scratch volumes and to activate or deactivate collocation.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Storage pool

•  Storage pool type

•  Estimated capacity

•  Percent utilized

•  Device class

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Migration - Help

 Use the Migration section of the Storage Pool Properties notebook for sequential access media to view and update migration information for a storage pool. Migration is the process of moving data from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by high and low migration threshold settings.

 The Migration section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Migration section to view information about migration activity and migrations statistics for the storage pool.

 Use Page 2 of the Migration section to specify when migration should begin and end for this storage pool, and to which storage pool this data should be migrated.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Migration in progress

•  Elapsed migration time

•  Amount migrated

•  Percent available for migration

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reclamation - Help

 Use the Reclamation section of the Storage Pool Properties notebook for sequential access media to view and update reclamation information for a storage pool. Reclamation is the process of consolidating data from many sequential access media volumes onto a single new sequential access volume.

 The Reclamation section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Reclamation page to view information about reclamation activity within the storage pool, and to specify at what point reclamation is to begin for the storage pool.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Reclamation in progress

•  Volume being reclaimed

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reclamation In Progress - Help

 The Reclamation in Progress field displays whether or not reclamation is currently in progress within this storage pool. The percentage of reclaimable space for each individual volume is compared to the Reclamation Threshold to determine if reclamation should start.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Volume Being Reclaimed - Help

 The Volume Being Reclaimed field displays the name of the volume currently being reclaimed if reclamation is in progress. If no reclamation is in progress for this storage pool, this field is blank.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Storage Pools Include - Help

Use this window to specify the filter criteria for the storage pools you want to display in the Storage Pool Details view. Each storage pool is identified by a unique storage pool name.

 To include filtered storage pools in the view:

1. Type the storage pool name (with or without wildcard characters) in the Storage Pool Name field.

2. Select whether you want to include all storage pools, primary storage pools only, or copy storage pools only in the Pool Type section.

3. Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Random Access Volumes Details - Help

This window displays information about each storage pool volume that is assigned to a storage pool containing random access media. Use this window to select the volumes you want to work with. From this window you can create new volumes, delete existing volumes, view or update properties of selected volumes, copy to a file information about all or selected volumes, select volumes to audit, vary volumes online and offline, list information about what is stored on each volume, and move data from one or more volumes to other volumes in this or another storage pool.

 Data Columns

Volume

Displays the name of a random access storage pool volume.

Estimated Capacity (MB)

Displays an estimate of the amount of data, in megabytes, which a storage pool volume can store. This is the real capacity of the volume.

Percent Utilized

Displays an estimate of the amount of data actually stored on a storage pool volume. This value is a percentage of the estimated capacity, including cached data.

Volume Status

Displays the state of a storage pool volume. Valid statuses are: Online, Offline, Filling, Full or Empty.

Access Mode

Displays how data on the storage pool volume can be accessed. Possible access modes are: Read/write, Read Only and Unavailable. The storage pool volume access mode controls the use of volumes for any purpose. This includes backup/archive/retrieval/restore of client data and system processes such as varying of volumes and movement of data during migration.

Device Class

Displays the name of the device class to which a volume's storage pool  is assigned. Random access media storage pool volumes have a predefined device class type of DISK.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the random access volumes that you want to add, delete, audit, vary online or offline, print, list contents, move data from, update or view. If you select multiple volumes and then select Open as Properties from the Selected menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Random Access Volume

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Random Access Volume - Help

Each Random Access Volume object contains stored backup or archive data for clients. Select the volumes you want to work with. You can open the properties view of a volume to view or update properties of the volume.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a Random Access Volume:

•  Details

•  Properties


Move Data - Help

Select Move Data from the File menu to move data from selected volumes to other volumes in the same or different storage pool. The data on the volume being moved is inaccessible to users until the move data completes.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Move Data is only available when one or more volumes has been selected.


Audit - Help

Select Audit from the File menu to fix and/or report any inconsistencies existing between information on backup and archive data stored in the database and the actual data stored on a storage pool volume. The data on the volume being audited is inaccessible to users until the audit completes.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 Audit is only available when one or more volumes has been selected.


Vary - Help

Select Vary from the File menu to make a random access volume available or unavailable to the ADSM server.

 Vary is always available. Both the Online and Offline options are available regardless of the actual status of the selected volumes. If a volume is offline and the request is for Vary Offline, then an error message is returned. If a volume is online and the request is for Vary Online, then an error message is returned.


Online - Help

Select Vary Online from the File menu to make the selected random access volume available to a storage pool.

 If a volume is online and the request is for Vary Online, then an error message is returned.

 Vary Online is only available when a volume has been selected.


Offline - Help

Select Vary Offline from the File menu to make the selected random access volume unavailable to a storage pool.

 If a volume is offline and the request is for Vary Offline, then an error message is returned.

 Vary Offline is only available when a volume has been selected.


List Volume Content to File - Help

Select List Volume Content to File to list in a file the information about archive and backup data stored on selected storage pool volumes. This action will produce a list of every file and directory information that exists on a volume.

 Since the output generated from this action can be extremely large, it is recommended that you reduce the size of the output by using the filtering criteria.

 List Volume Content to File is only available when one or more volumes have been selected.


Storage Pool Volumes Details - Help

This window displays information about each storage pool volume that is assigned to a storage pool containing sequential access media or random access media. Use this window to select the volumes you want to work with.

From this window you can create new volumes, delete existing volumes, view or update properties of selected volumes, copy to a file information about all or selected volumes, select volumes to audit, list information about what is stored on each volume, and move data from one or more volumes to other volumes in this storage pool or another storage pool.

 Data Columns

Volume

Displays the name of the storage pool volume.

Storage Pool

Displays the name of the storage pool to which the volume has been assigned.

Device Class

Displays the device class for the storage pool volume.

Estimated Capacity (MB)

Displays an estimate of the amount of data, in megabytes, which a storage pool volume can store. This is an estimate of the capacity of a volume.

Percent Utilized

Displays an estimate of the actual amount of data stored on a storage pool volume. This value is a percentage of the number of active bytes on a volume and the estimated capacity of the volume.

Volume Status

Displays the state of a storage pool volume. Valid statuses are: Filling, Full or Empty.

Access Mode

Displays how data on a volume can be accessed. Possible access modes are: Read/write, Read Only and Unavailable. The storage pool volume access mode controls the use of volumes for any purpose. This includes backup/archive/retrieve/restore of client data and system processes such as movement of data during migration and reclamation.

Scratch Volume

Displays whether or not a volume is a scratch volume. Scratch volumes are used for backing up, archiving and migrating data and also for collocation and reclamation.

Percent Reclaimable

Displays an estimate of the amount of reclaimable space on a storage pool volume if reclamation has been activated for this volume. This value is a percentage of the estimated capacity of the volume.

Error State

Displays whether or not a volume is in an error state. If this volume in an error state, it cannot be written to. You should then move the data from this volume to another volume and delete this volume from the storage pool to which it belongs.

Number of Mounts

Displays the number of times the volume has been mounted. Use the information in this field along with Date Last Written, Date Last Read, and Number of Write Passes to monitor the usage of sequential access media volumes. These wear indicators can be used for setting rules for when to audit or delete volumes.

Number of Writeable Sides

Displays the number of recording surfaces for sequential access media. The value in this field is two for optical storage pool volumes and one for all other volume types.

Date Last Written

Displays the approximate date on which the volume was last written. Use the information in this field along with Number of Mounts, Date Last Read, and Number of Write Passes to monitor the usage of sequential access media volumes. These wear indicators can be used for setting rules for when to audit or delete volumes.

Number of Write Passes

Displays the number of times the volume has been filled or written to from the beginning of the unit to the end of the unit. Use the information in this field along with Number of Mounts, Date Last Read, and Date Last Written to monitor the usage of sequential access media volumes. These wear indicators can be used for setting rules for when to audit or delete volumes.

Number of Write Errors

Displays the total number of write errors that have occurred while writing to this volume since it was defined for use by the server. You should audit this volume if this amount is not zero.

Date Last Read

Displays the approximate date on which the volume was last read. Use the information in this field along with Number of Mounts, Date Last Written, and Number of Write Passes to monitor the usage of sequential access media volumes. These wear indicators can be used for setting rules for when to audit or delete volumes.

Number of Read Errors

Displays the total number of read errors that occurred while reading from this volume since it was defined for use by the server. You should audit this volume if this amount is not zero.

Device Class

Displays the name of the device class to which the volume's storage pool is assigned. Sequential access media storage pool volumes can be defined by your administrator using the DEFINE DEVCLASS command.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the sequential access volumes that you want to add, delete, audit, print, list contents, move data from, update or view. If you select multiple volumes and then select Open as Properties from the File menu, multiple windows are opened.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Sequential Access Volume

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Sequential Access Volume - Help

Each Sequential Access Volume object contains stored backup or archive data for clients. Select the volumes you want to work with. You can open the properties view of a volume to view or update properties of a volume.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Sequential Access Volume:

•  Details

•  Properties


Add Volume - Help

This window displays the fields and controls you use to add a  new storage pool volume to either a storage pool containing random access media or sequential access media. Use this window to add a volume and set its access mode. You can access the Add volume window by selecting Add from the Edit menu on a details view for storage pool volumes.

 To add a new volume to a storage pool:

1. The name of the storage pool you are adding a volume to will display.

2. Type the volume name in the Volume Name field.

3. Select an access mode if different than the default of Read/write.

4. Select the Add push button to add the new volume to the storage pool.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Storage pool

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume Name - Help

 Type the name of either the random access or sequential access volume in the Volume Name field, using the naming convention for the device type you are adding.

 This field must be filled in.

 Server Specific Information

 Select a platform from the list below. A window displays that will give you the device types and naming conventions for the device types available for your platform.

•   AIX

•   MVS

•   OS/2

•   VM

•   Windows


Read/write - Help

 Select Read/write access mode to allow data to be read from or written to a storage pool volume.

 Default:  Access Mode is Read/write.


Read Only - Help

 Select Read Only access mode to allow data to be read from a storage pool volume.

 If ADSM is unable to write to a volume defined as Read/write, it will automatically change the access mode to Read Only.

 Default:  Access Mode is Read/write.


Unavailable - Help

 Select Unavailable access mode to specify that data cannot be read from or written to a storage pool volume.

 If ADSM is unable to read from a volume defined as Read/write or Read Only, it will automatically change the access mode to Unavailable.

 Default:  Access Mode is Read/write.


Random Access Volume Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields and controls you use to work with a storage pool volume that is assigned to a storage pool containing random access media. Use this notebook to view general statistics and information about the volume and update its access mode.

 You can access the Random Access Volume Properties notebook by selecting Properties from the File menu on the details view for storage pool volumes.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Displays miscellaneous information and statistics about the volume.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume - Help

 The Volume field displays the name of the random access or sequential access volume.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Estimated Capacity - Help

 The Estimated Capacity field displays an estimate of the amount of data, in megabytes, which can be stored on a storage pool volume. Before data is backed up or archived to a volume, the estimated capacity is zero. For random access media, this is the real capacity of the volume. For sequential access media, this is an estimate due to the variable nature of the media.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Percent Utilized - Help

 The Percent Utilized field displays an estimate of the actual amount of space occupied by backup and archive data on a storage pool volume. For random access media, this value is a percentage of the total estimated capacity of the volume, including cached data. For sequential access media, this value is a percentage of the number of active bytes on the volume and the estimated capacity of the volume.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Volume Status - Help

 The Volume Status field displays the current state of a storage pool volume.  Valid statuses are:

• Empty - The volume contains no data.

• Filling - The volume is accepting backup and archive data, or receiving migrated or moved data and not full.

• Full - The volume is full and cannot accept any more data.

• Offline - The random access volume is not available for use by ADSM and any data on the volume is unavailable.

• Online - The random access volume is available for use by ADSM.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Sequential Access Volume Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields and controls you use to work with a storage pool volume that is assigned to a storage pool containing sequential access media. Use this notebook to view general statistics and information about the volume and update its access mode.

 You can access the Sequential Access Volume Properties notebook by selecting Open as Properties from the File menu on the details view for storage pool volumes.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows information and statistics about this volume.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of this notebook to view and update the properties of a sequential access volume.

 The General section contains three pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to view volume capacity information, utilization information and update history.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to view information about the status of the volume and to update the access mode.

 Use Page 3 of the General section to view sequential access volume history statistics.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Storage pool

•  Volume

•  Estimated capacity

•  Percent utilized

•  Device class

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Error state

•  Volume status

•  Scratch volume

•  Percent reclaimable

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 3, select from the list below:

•  Number of mounts

•  Number of writeable sides

•  Date last written

•  Number of write passes

•  Number of write errors

•  Date last read

•  Number of read errors

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Scratch Volume - Help

 The Scratch Volume field displays whether or not this is a scratch volume. Scratch volumes are used for backing up, archiving and migrating data and also for collocation and reclamation.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Percent Reclaimable - Help

 The Percent Reclaimable field displays an estimate of the amount of reclaimable space on a storage pool volume, if reclamation has been activated for this volume. This value is specified as a percentage of the estimated capacity of the volume. It is compared against the Reclamation Threshold of the storage pool for this volume to determine when reclamation begins.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Error State - Help

 The Error State field displays whether or not a volume is in an error state. Volumes in an error state cannot be written to. When a volume is in an error state, you should move the data from this volume to another volume and delete this volume from the storage pool to which it belongs.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Number of Mounts - Help

 The Number of Mounts field displays the number of times the volume has been mounted. Use the information in this field along with Date Last Written, Date Last Read, and Number of Write Passes to monitor the usage of sequential access media volumes. These wear indicators can be used for setting rules for when to audit or delete volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Number of Writable Sides - Help

 The Number of Writable Sides field displays the number of sides that can be written on for sequential access media. The value in this field is two for optical storage pool volumes and one for all other volume types.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Date Last Written - Help

 The Date Last Written field displays the approximate date that data was last written to a volume. Use the information in this field along with Number of Mounts, Date Last Read, and Number of Write Passes to monitor the usage of sequential access volumes. These wear indicators can be used for setting rules for when to audit or delete sequential access volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Number of Write Passes - Help

 The Number of Write Passes field displays the number of times the volume has been filled or written to from the beginning of the unit to the end of the unit. Use the information in this field along with Number of Mounts, Date Last Read, and Date Last Written to monitor the usage of sequential access volumes. These wear indicators can be used for setting rules for when to audit or delete sequential access volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Number of Write Errors - Help

 The Number of Write Errors field displays the total number of write errors that have occurred while writing to this volume since it was defined to the server. You should audit this volume if this field is not zero.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Date Last Read - Help

 The Date Last Read field displays the approximate date that data was last read from on this volume. Use the information in this field along with Number of Mounts, Date Last Written, and Number or Write passes to monitor the usage of sequential access volumes. These wear indicators can be used for setting rules for when to audit or delete volumes.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Number of Read Errors - Help

 The Number of Read Errors field displays the total number of read errors that have occurred while reading from this volume since it was defined by the server. You should audit this volume if this field is not zero.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Include Volumes - Help

Use this window to specify the filter criteria for the storage pool volumes you want displayed in the details view for Storage Pool Volumes. Each storage pool volume is identified by a unique storage pool volume name.

 To include filtered storage pool volumes in the view:

1. Type or select from the list the storage pool name in the Storage Pool Name drop-down combination box.

2. Type the storage volume name (with or without wildcard characters) in the Volume Name field.

3.  Select additional filter criteria, such as Volume Status and Device Class, if needed.

4. Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Discard Data - Help

 Select Discard Data to explicitly delete all data stored on the specified volumes.

Note:   If you select Discard Data, all references to this data in the database will be deleted, making the data on these volumes unrecoverable.

 Default: Off(Discard Data is not active)


Move Data Volumes - Help

This window displays the fields you use to move backup or archive data from the listed storage pool volumes to available volumes in this or another storage pool. Use this window when you want to use a volume for another purpose, when a volume is damaged or when you want to save a file before you delete it.

 You can access this window by selecting Move Data Volumes from the File menu on the details view for a random access or sequential access volume.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To move data from one volume to another:

1. Verify you want to move all the volumes displayed in the From These Volumes list. You can de-select any volumes you decide not to move.

2. Select a target storage pool from the To This Storage Pool drop down list.

3. Select the Move Data push button to move the data from one volume to another.

 Considerations:

• Upon completion of the move data, refresh any open windows which contain information that might have been affected by the move.

• The data on the volumes being moved is inaccessible to users until the move data completes.

• If the move data is being done to erase all data from a volume so it can be deleted, it is recommended that you set the access mode of the volume to Read Only.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


From These Volumes - Help

 From These Volumes list box displays the source volumes you can move data from. Verify you want to move all the volumes selected to another volume in an available storage pool. You can de-select any volumes you decide not to move.


To This Storage Pool - Help

 Use the To This Storage Pool drop down list box to select a target storage pool. This list displays all storage pools containing random access or sequential access media. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list. Select from the list the storage pool that you want to move a volume to. You can select the same storage pool that this volume is on.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Move Data - Help

 Select Move Data to move the data from the selected source volumes to volumes in the specified target storage pool.


List Volume Content to File - Help

This window displays the fields you use to list the contents of storage pool volumes to a file for printing. The list includes information about files and directories belonging to backup-archive clients. You can filter the files you want to list. Use this window to list contents of files when a volume is damaged, before you audit a volume and request ADSM to fix inconsistencies, before you move one volume to another volume, or before you delete a volume from a storage pool.

 You can access the List Content to File window by selecting List Volume Content to File from the File menu on the details view for a random access or sequential access volume.

 To list the content of a volume to a file:

1. Verify that you want to list all the volumes displayed in the Volumes list. You can de-select any volumes you decide not to list.

2. Since the contents of volumes can be extremely large, it is recommended that you limit your output by using any or all of the following filter criteria:

• Node Name

• File Space Name

• Damaged Files

• Copied Files

• File types (backup, archive, spacemanaged, or all)

• Number of files on a volume starting at the beginning or the end of a volume, or All files on a volume

3. Type the name of the file you want the information listed to in the File Name field.

4. Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to the specified file. The Append check box is in a selected state as a default.

5. Select the List to File push button to list the filtered information to the file you have specified.

Note:   If the file does not exist, it will be created. If the file already exists, it will be replaced unless the Append check box is selected. Append adds data to the end of the file.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node Name - Help

 Type the name of the node that you want to use as filter criteria in the Node Name field.

 This field is optional.

 The Node Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore(_), period(.), hyphen(-), plus(+), or, ampersand(&)

• Asterisk(*) wildcard character

• Question mark(?) wildcard character

 Default:  * for All

 Example:

 If you want to list all of the backup files for the node bill, then:

1. Enter bill in the Node Name field

2. Leave the asterisk in the File Space Name field

3. Leave All selected in the Damaged Files and Copied Files list boxes

4. Select Backup in the File Type list box

5. Select All for Number of Files On Volume radio button

6. Enter the file name to which you want to list the volume contents in the File Name field

7. Select the List to File push button

 Considerations:

• A node name cannot contain spaces.


File Space Name - Help

 Type the name of the file space you want to use as filter criteria in the File Space Name field.

 This field is optional.

 The File Space Name field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Asterisk(*) wildcard character

• Question mark(?) wildcard character

 Default:  * for All

 Example:

 If you want to list all of the backup files for the node bill, then:

1. Enter bill in the Node Name field

2. Leave the asterisk in the File Space Name field

3. Leave All selected in the Damaged Files and Copied Files list boxes

4. Select Backup in the File Type list box

5. Select All for Number of Files On Volume radio button

6. Enter the file name to which you want to list the volume contents in the File Name field

7. Select the List to File push button

 Considerations:

• The file space naming conventions are specific to the client node that owns the file space.

• A file space name cannot contain spaces.

• File space names are case sensitive for all platforms.


First - Help

 Type the number of files to be listed starting at the beginning of the volume in the First field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The First field can contain:

• A number from 1 to the maximum number of files that you have on a volume

 Default:  None

 Example:  10 will list information about the first 10 files stored on the volume

 Considerations:

• If you specify an amount greater than the maximum number of files, the maximum number of files will be copied.


Last - Help

 Type the number of files to be listed starting at the end of the volume in the Last field. Files will be listed in reverse order.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Last field can contain:

• A number from 1 to the maximum number of files that you have on a volume

 Default:  None

 Example:  15 will list information about the last 15 files stored on the volume, in reverse order

 Considerations:

• If you specify  an amount greater than the maximum number of files, the maximum number of files will be copied.


All - Help

 Select All to list information about all files stored on a volume.

 Default:  All(List All files)


First - Help

 Select First to list information about files stored on a volume starting at the beginning of the volume. Type the number of files you want to list in the field next to First radio button.

 Default:  All(List All files)


Last - Help

 Select Last to list information about files stored on a volume starting at the end of a volume. Contents are listed in reverse order. Type the number of files you want to list in the field next to Last radio button.

 Default:  All (List All files)


Both - Help

 Select All to list the contents of all Backup, Archive, and Migrated file spaces.

 Default:  All(List contents of All file spaces)


Archive - Help

 Select Archive to list the contents of Archive file spaces.

 Default:  All(List contents of All file spaces)


Backup - Help

 Select Backup to list the contents of Backup file spaces.

 Default:  Both(list contents of Both file spaces)


List to File - Help

 Select List to File to list to the specified file information about files and directories stored on each selected volume. You can send this file to a printer or use the file as input to a spreadsheet.

Note:   If the file does not exist, it will be created. If the file already exists, it will be replaced unless the Append check box is selected. Append adds data to the end of the file.


Migration - Help

 Use the Migration section of the Storage Pool Add notebook to specify when migration activity should begin and end for the new storage pool, and to which storage pool this migrated data should be stored. Migration is the process of moving data from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by high and low migration threshold settings.

 The Migration section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Migration page to set migration thresholds and specify the next storage pool to be used in migration.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of this notebook to view and update the properties of a random access volume.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to view volume capacity information, utilization information and update history.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to view information about the status of the volume and to update the access mode.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Storage pool

•  Volume

•  Estimated capacity

•  Percent utilized

•  Device class

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Volume status

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volumes - Help

 The Volumes list box displays volumes you have selected to work with. The objects in the list are in a selected state when the list displays. You can de-select any volumes you decide not to work with.


Audit Volumes - Help

This window displays the fields you use to audit files on storage pool volumes. ADSM checks logical inconsistences between the database and storage pool volumes. Use this window when ADSM is unable to write to or read from a volume that has Read/write or Read Only access mode, when a volume is damaged, or when a database or recovery log error occurs.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To audit a file on a volume:

1. Verify you want to audit all the volumes displayed in the Volumes list. You can de-select any volumes you do not want to audit.

2. Select Fix Inconsistencies check box if you want ADSM to fix inconsistencies, as they are detected, between database information and the storage pool volume.

3. Select Include Files Spanning Multiple Volumes if you are auditing sequential access media volumes and a file can span multiple volumes.

4. Select the Summary of Audit Results radio button to send just summary messages to the Activity Log. If you want to send an indication of each inconsistency along with the summary messages to the Activity Log, select the Each Inconsistency and a Summary of Audit Results radio button.

5. Select the Audit push button to complete the audit for the storage pool volume.

 Considerations:

• The data on the volume being audited is inaccessible to users until the audit completes.

• If you select the Fix Inconsistencies check box, ADSM corrects the inconsistencies as they are detected by deleting any database records that point to nonexistent files on a volume.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Fix Inconsistencies - Help

 Select Fix Inconsistencies to have ADSM fix inconsistencies, as they are detected, between the database and storage pool volumes. ADSM deletes any database records that point to nonexistent files on a volume.

 Default:  Off(Fix Inconsistencies is not active)


Include Files Spanning Multiple Volumes - Help

 Select Include Files Spanning Multiple Volumes to audit files that span multiple sequential access media volumes. ADSM server determines if a file is stored on more than one volume. It will then start the audit process on the first volume on which the file resides.  If that volume is not one of the volumes selected to be audited, only that portion of the volume containing the file is audited.

 Default:  On(Include Files Spanning Multiple Volumes is active)


Summary of Audit Results - Help

 Select Summary of Audit Results to have only a summary of the audit results recorded in the Activity Log of the server object.

 Default:  Off (Summary of Audit Results is not active)


Each Inconsistency and a Summary of Audit Results - Help

 Select Each Inconsistency and a Summary of Audit Results to have a report of each discovered inconsistency and a summary of the audit results recorded in the Activity Log of the server object.

 Default:  On(Each Inconsistency and a Summary of Audit Results is active)


Audit - Help

 Select Audit to audit the selected volumes.


Storage Pool Name- Help

 Type the name of the storage pool which will be used as a filter for your search criteria in the Storage Pool Name field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Storage Pool Name field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  * for all

 Example:  *STORAGEPOOL


Volume Name- Help

 Type the name of either the random access or sequential access volume in the Volume Name field, in order to filter your search criteria. Specify the naming convention for the device you are using.

 This field must be filled in.

 Server Specific Information

 Select a platform from the list below. A window displays that will give you the device types and naming conventions for the device types available for your platform.

•   AIX

•   MVS

•   OS/2

•   VM

•   Windows


Volume Being Migrated - Help

 The Volume Being Migrated field displays the name of the volume currently being migrated if migration is in progress. If no migration is in progress for this storage pool, this field is blank.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


AIX Volume Names - Help

The AIX Volume Name field can contain:

• 8MM Tape - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape volume name

• CARTRIDGE - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape cartridge volume name

• DISK - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name

• FILE - 1 to 250 character fully qualified name of file containing the volume data

• 3.5 Magneto Optical Disk - 1 to 32 character alphanumeric optical disk volume name

• 5.25 Optical Disk - 1 to 32 character alphanumeric optical disk volume name

 Example:

 8MM Tape - tape01

 CARTRIDGE - cart01

 DISK - /usr/adsm/disk01

 FILE - /usr/adsm/file01

 3.5 Optical Disk - 3.5optbackup01

 5.25 Optical Disk - 5.25optbackup01

 Considerations:

• AIX volume names are case sensitive.

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• Ensure that the tape or cartridge volume is predefined by labeling it with a VOLSER using the ADSM adsmlbl utility.

• Ensure that the disk volume is pre-allocated and formatted by using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

• Ensure that the optical disk volume is predefined by labeling and preformatting it with the ADSM adsmlbl utility.

• FILE device types do not have to be predefined.


MVS Volume Names - Help

The MVS Volume Name field can contain:

• CARTRIDGE - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape cartridge volume name

• DISK - 1 to 44 character VSAM linear data set name

 Example:

 CARTRIDGE - CART01

 DISK - ADSM.BACKUP.DATA01

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• Ensure that the tape cartridge volume is predefined by labeling it with a standard VOL1 tape label.

• Ensure that a random access volume is predefined by allocating a MVS linear data set.


OS/2 Volume Names - Help

The OS/2 Volume Name field can contain:

• 8MM Tape - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape volume name

• DISK - 1 to 256 character fully qualified file name

• FILE - 1 to 250 character fully qualified name of the file containing the volume data

• LAN3995 - 1 to 32 character alphanumeric optical disk volume name for each side of the optical cartridge

• 3.5 Magneto Optical Disk - 1 to 32 character alphanumeric optical disk volume name

• 5.25 Optical Disk - 1 to 32 character alphanumeric optical disk volume name

 Example:

 8MM Tape - TAPE01

 DISK - D:\USR\ADSM\DISK01.BU

 FILE - D:\USR\ADSM\FILE01.FIL

 LAN3995 - OPTBACKUPA1

 3.5 Optical Disk - 3.5OPTBACKUP01

 5.25 Optical Disk - 5.25OPTBACKUP01

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• Ensure that the tape volume is predefined by labeling it with a VOLSER using the ADSM adsmlbl utility.

• Ensure that the optical volume is predefined by labeling and formatting it with the ADSM adsmlbl utility.

• Ensure that the disk volume is pre-allocated and formatted by using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

• FILE device types do not have to be predefined.


VM Volume Names - Help

The VM Volume Name field can contain:

• CARTRIDGE - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape cartridge volume name

• DISK - 3 to 4 digit mini-disk virtual address

• REEL - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape volume name

 Default:  None

 Example:

 CARTRIDGE - CART01

 DISK - 191

 REEL - REEL01

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• Ensure that the tape or tape cartridge volume is predefined by labeling it with a standard VOL1 tape label.

• Ensure that the disk volume is predefined by formatting and reserving a VM mini-disk.


Storage Pool - Help

 The Storage Pool field displays the name of the storage pool that this volume is assigned to.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Windows Volume Names - Help

The Windows Volume Name field can contain:

• 4MM/8MM/DLT Tape - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape volume name

• DISK - 1 to 25556 character fully qualified file name

• FILE - 1 to 250 character fully qualified name of the file containing the volume data

 Example:

 4MM/8MM/DLT Tape - TAPE01

 DISK - D:\USR\ADSM\DISK01.BU

 FILE - D:\USR\ADSM\FILE01.FIL

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• Ensure that the tape volume is predefined by labeling it with a VOLSER using the ADSM adsmlbl utility.

• Ensure that the disk volume is pre-allocated and formatted by using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

• FILE device types do not have to be predefined.


DISK Volume - Help

Each DISK Volume object contains stored backup and archive client node data located on disk drives.

 Select the volumes you want to work with. You can open the details view for Storage Pool Volumes to view information for all displayed volumes, or open a selected volume as a properties notebook to view or update information about the volume.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a random access volume:

•  Details

•  Properties


Storage Pool Volumes - Help

The Storage Pool Volumes object contains storage pool volumes located on randomly or sequentially accessed storage devices managed by the ADSM server. All storage pool volumes are assigned to a storage pool to store backed up or archived files.

 The storage pool volumes object opens to details view. Use the view to add, delete, audit, restore, or vary on or off a storage pool volume. You can also move data from one volume to another.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of storage pool volumes:

•  Details


Backup - Help

Select Backup to create backup copies of files that are stored in the selected primary storage pools. The backup copies are stored in a copy storage pool.

 Backup is available when one or more storage pools are selected.

 To backup selected storage pools to copy storage pools, select Backup.


Restore - Help

Select Restore to restore files to a primary storage pool The files are restored from the one or more copy storage pools to which these files had been backed up.

 To restore files to a primary storage pool, select Restore.


Add Primary Storage Pool - Help

Select Add Primary Storage Pool to create a new primary storage pool. Use the Primary Storage Pool Add window to enter information about the new storage pool.

 To add a primary storage pool, select Add Primary Storage Pool.


Add Copy Storage Pool - Help

Select Add Copy Storage Pool to create a new copy storage pool. Use the Copy Storage Pool Add window to enter information about the new copy storage pool.

 To add a copy storage pool, select Add Copy Storage Pool.


Restore - Help

Select Restore to restore files which are stored on one or more volumes in the same primary storage pool. The files are restored from the one or more copy storage pools to which these files had been backed up.

 Restore is available when one or more storage pool volumes are selected.


None - Help

 Select None to specify that you do not want to automatically copy files to a copy storage pool when files are stored in the primary storage pool.

 Default:  Off


Copy Storage Pool Names - Help

 Type the name of the copy storage pool in the Copy Storage Pool Names field.  Files will be automatically copied to this copy storage pool when files are stored in its corresponding primary storage pool.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Copy Storage Pool Names field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  Copy1

 Considerations:

• A primary storage pool and a copy storage pool cannot have the same name.

• You can specify a list of copy storage pools in which you want to produce copies by separating the names with commas.  Do not include spaces between the names and the commas.


Copy Storage Pool Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields and controls you can use to add a new copy storage pool containing sequential access media. Use this notebook to add descriptive information, assign settings and limits, and specify features unique to the sequential access media.

 You can access the Add notebook by selecting Add Copy Storage Pool from the Edit menu on the Storage Pools Details view.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the fields used to identify a copy storage pool, to specify the maximum file size it will accept and to set the access mode of the copy storage pool.

Device Class

Shows the device class assigned to a copy storage pool. You can also specify settings unique to storage pools containing sequential access media.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Copy Storage Pool Add notebook to enter information about the properties of a new copy storage pool.

 The General section contains one page of properties.

 Use the General page to identify the copy storage pool, set the copy storage pool access mode, and specify the maximum size of a file allowed in a copy storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class section of the Copy Storage Pool Add notebook to assign the new copy storage pool to an existing device class and to assign properties specific to a copy storage pool containing either random access media or sequential access media.

 The Device Class section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Device Class page to specify which device class to assign to a copy storage pool. You can specify caching for random access media and collocation, reclamation and number of scratch volumes for sequential access media.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reuse Delay - Help

 Type the number of days that must elapse after all files have been deleted from a volume before that volume can be rewritten in the Reuse Delay field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Reuse Delay field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 9999

 Default:  0

 Example:  180

 Considerations:

• The default for this field is 0, which means that a volume can be rewritten as soon as all files have been deleted from the volume.


Storage Pool Type - Help

 The Storage Pool Type field displays whether the storage pool is a primary storage pool or a copy storage pool.

 Possible values for this field include:

• Copy

• Primary

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Copy Storage Pool Names - Help

 Type the name of the copy storage pool in the Copy Storage Pool Names field.  Files will be automatically copied to this copy storage pool when files are stored in its corresponding primary storage pool.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Copy Storage Pool Names field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  None

 Example:  Copy1

 Considerations:

• A primary storage pool and a copy storage pool cannot have the same name.

• You can specify a list of copy storage pools in which you want to produce copies by separating the names with commas.  Do not include spaces between the names and the commas.


Storage Pool Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields and controls you use to update and view the properties of a storage pool containing sequential access media. Use this notebook to view and update general, migration and reclamation information about the storage pool.

 You can access this notebook by selecting Open as Properties from the File menu on the Storage Pool Details view.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows information which identifies the storage pool, its properties and gives update history.

Migration

Shows information about migration activity and migration statistics for this storage pool.

Reclamation

Shows information about reclamation activity and reclamation statistics for this storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Copy Storage Pool Properties notebook for sequential access media to view and update the miscellaneous properties of a copy storage pool.

 The General section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to update the copy storage pool description, set the reuse delay, and to view capacity and utilization information, device class name, and update history.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to update access mode and maximum file size, specify the maximum number of scratch volumes and to activate or deactivate collocation.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Storage pool

•  Storage pool type

•  Estimated capacity

•  Percent utilized

•  Device class

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Reuse Delay - Help

 Type the number of days that must elapse after all files have been deleted from a volume before that volume can be rewritten in the Reuse Delay field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Reuse Delay field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 9999

 Default:  0

 Example:  180

 Considerations:

• The default for this field is 0, which means that a volume can be rewritten as soon as all files have been deleted from the volume.


Destroyed - Help

 Select Destroyed to specify the volume will not be mounted for either read or write access.

 Use this access mode to designate primary volumes for which all files are to be restored.

 Default:  Access mode is Read/write.


Copy Storage Pool Volumes Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields and controls you use to work with a copy storage pool volume that is assigned to a storage pool containing sequential access media. Use this notebook to view general statistics and information about the volume and update its access mode.

 You can access the Copy Storage Pool Volume Properties notebook by selecting Open as Properties from the File menu on the details view for storage pool volumes.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows information and statistics about this volume.

Reclamation

Shows information about reclamation activity and reclamation statistics for this storage pool.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of this notebook to view and update the properties of a sequential access volume.

 The General section contains three pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the General section to view volume capacity information, utilization information and update history.

 Use Page 2 of the General section to view information about the status of the volume and to update the access mode.

 Use Page 3 of the General section to view sequential access volume history statistics.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 1, select from the list below:

•  Storage pool

•  Volume

•  Estimated capacity

•  Percent utilized

•  Device class

•  Last update by

•  Last update date/time

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 2, select from the list below:

•  Error state

•  Volume status

•  Scratch volume

•  Percent reclaimable

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for page 3, select from the list below:

•  Number of mounts

•  Number of writeable sides

•  Date last written

•  Number of write passes

•  Number of write errors

•  Date last read

•  Number of read errors

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Offsite - Help

 Select Offsite to specify that the volume is at an offsite location.

 Use this value to designate offsite volumes so that:

• You will know which volumes are offsite

• Mount requests will not be generated for these volumes

• Data can be reclaimed or moved from offsite volumes by retrieving files from other storage pools

• Empty, offsite scratch volumes will not be deleted from the copy storage pool.

 Default:  Access mode is Read/Write.


Backup - Help

Use this window to create backup copies of files that are stored in a primary storage pool.

 To backup all or selected primary storage pools to copy storage pools:

1.  Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

2.  Depending on which primary storage pools you want to backup, do one of the following:

•  To backup all primary storage pools, select the File menu choice and then select Backup from the menu list.

•  To backup selected primary storage pools to a copy storage pool, select one or more storage pools in the window.  Then, from the File menu choice, select Backup.  The Backup window displays.

3.  Select the name of the copy storage pool to which you want the specified primary storage pools backed up in the Copy Storage Pool Name list box.

4. Specify additional parallel processes in the Maximum Processes section.  Increasing the number of processes can increase the performance of the backup operation.

5.  Select the Backup push button.

 Considerations

• With additional parallel processes, ensure that there is a drive available for each process.

• To preview the files affected by a backup and the space required for these files without actually performing a backup, select the Yes radio button in the Preview Options section.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


No - Help

 Select No to specify that you do not want to preview the backup operation before it it actually performed.

 Default:  No


Yes - Help

 Select Yes to specify that you only want to preview the backup operation.

 The preview option displays the number of files that will be copied if you perform the backup, along with the space these files will occupy in the target copy storage pool.

 Default:  No


Primary Storage Pool - Help

 The Primary Storage Pool field displays the name of the primary storage pool for which backup copies are to be produced.


Copy Storage Pool Name - Help

 Use the Copy Storage Pool Name list box to select the copy storage pool in which backup copies will be produced.  Select the drop-down control to display names in the list. Select from the list the copy storage pool to which you want to copy the files.

 You can select only one name from the list. This field must be filled in.

 Considerations:

• A primary storage pool and a copy storage pool cannot have the same name.


Maximum Processes - Help

 Enter the number of maximum parallel processes that will be used for backing up files using the Maximum Processes spin buttons.

 Using multiple parallel processes can help increase the performance of the backup operation.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Maximum Processes field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 999.

 Default:  1

 Example:  5

 Considerations:

• Each process will need a drive for copy storage pool volumes.

• If you are backing up a sequential storage pool, each process will need a drive for the primary storage pool volumes.

• If you specify Yes or Volumes Only in the Preview Options section, only one process will be used.


Backup - Help

 Select Backup to backup copies of the files that are stored in a primary storage pool to a copy storage pool.

 If you chose to preview the backup by selecting Yes in the Preview Options section, select Backup to display the files that will be copied if a backup is performed and how much space those files would occupy in the target copy storage pool.


Volumes Only - Help

 Select Volumes Only to specify that you want to preview the backup operation and only want to display a list of primary storage pool volumes containing files that have not yet been backed up.  You will need to mount these volumes if you actually perform the backup.

 This option is only available for sequential primary storage pools.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Restore - Help

Use this window to restore files to a primary storage pool. The files are restored from one or more copy storage pools to which these files have previously been backed up.

 To restore files to a primary storage pool:

1.  Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

2.  Select the primary storage pool for which files are to be restored, and then select Restore from the File menu choice. The Restore window displays.

3.  Select the copy storage pool from which copies are to be restored from the Copy Storage Pool name list box.

4.  Select the Restore push button.

 Considerations

• Specifying additional parallel processes in the Maximum Processes section can increase the performance of the restore operation.

• With additional parallel processes, ensure that there is a drive available for each process.

• To preview the files affected by a restore and the space required for these files without actually performing a restore, select the Preview Only check box.

•  You cannot restore cached copies of files.

 Related Information

•   Backing up a Storage Pool

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


No - Help

 Select No to specify that you want to perform the restore operation without previewing.

 Default:  No


Preview Only - Help

 Select Preview Only to specify that you only want to preview the restore operation.  This option displays the number of files that will be restored if you were to perform the restore, along with the amount of space that these files will occupy in the target primary storage pool.

 Default:  Off


Volumes Only - Help

 Select Volumes Only to specify that you only want to preview the restore operation and only want to display a list of copy storage pool volumes containing files which will be restored.  These volumes will need to be mounted if you actually perform the restore.

 This option can be used to identify volumes that would be required to restore a storage pool.


Primary Storage Pool - Help

 The Primary Storage Pool field displays the name of the primary storage pool to which files are to be restored.


Copy Storage Pool Name - Help

 Use the Copy Storage Pool Name list box to select the copy storage pool in which backup copies will be produced. Select the drop-down control to display names in the list.

 You can select only one copy storage pool name. This field must be filled in.

 Considerations:

• A primary storage pool and a copy storage pool cannot have the same name.


New Primary Storage Pool Name - Help

 Use the New Primary Storage Pool Name list box to select the primary storage pool to which the files will be restored. Select the drop-down control to display storage pools in the list.

 Entering information in this field is optional. If no storage pool is specified, the files will be restored to the primary storage pool which is being restored.


Maximum Processes - Help

 Enter the number of maximum parallel processes that will be used for restoring files using the Maximum Processes spin buttons.

 Using multiple parallel processes can help increase the performance of the restore operation.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Maximum Processes field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 999.

 Default:  1

 Example:  5

 Considerations:

• Each process will need a drive for copy storage pool volumes.

• If you are restoring a sequential storage pool, each process will need a drive for the primary storage pool volumes.

• If you specify Yes or Volumes Only in the Preview Options section, only one process will be used.


Restore - Help

 Select Restore to restore files to a primary storage pool. These files are restored from one or more copy storage pools to which these files have been previously backed up.

 If you chose to preview the restore by selecting the Preview Only check box, selecting Restore will display the files that will be copied if a restore had been performed along with how much space those files would occupy in the target primary storage pool.


Restore - Help

Use this window to restore files which are currently stored on one or more volumes in the same primary storage pool. The files are restored from one or more copy storage pool to which these files have previously been backed up.

 To restore a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

1.  Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

2.  Select the storage pool volume or volumes in a primary storage pool for which files are to be restored, and then select Restore from the File menu choice. The Restore window displays.

3.  Select the name of the copy storage pool from which copies are to be restored in the Copy Storage Pool name field. If you do not complete this field, files will be restored from any copy storage pool in which copies can be located.

4.  Select the Restore push button.

 Considerations

•  If you need to restore more than one volume in the same primary storage pool, select multiple volumes and then perform the restore operation rather than restoring each volume individually.

• Specifying additional parallel processes in the Maximum Processes section can increase the performance of the restore operation.

• With additional parallel processes, ensure that there is a drive available for each process.

• To preview the files affected by a restore and the space required for these files without actually performing a restore, select the Yes radio button in the Preview Options section.

•  You cannot restore cached copies of files.

 Related Information

•   Backing Up a Storage Pool

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Volume - Help

 The Volume field displays the name of the volume in a primary storage pool for which files are to be restored.


Storage Pool Name - Help

 Use the Storage Pool Name combination box to specify a storage pool that will be used as a filter for your search criteria. Select the drop-down control to display storage pools in the list. Type in the entry field, or select from the list the storage pools that you want to use as a filter.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Storage Pool Name entry field can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  * for all

 Example:  *STORAGEPOOL


Volume Access - Help

Use the Volume Access list box if you want to limit your search by volume access mode.

 You can select one, more than one, or none of the values shown in the list box, as follows:

• Read/Write - for volumes that allow data to be read or written.

• Read only -  for volumes that allow only read access.

• Unavailable - for volumes that do not have read or write access.

• Offsite - for volumes that are in an offsite location.

• Destroyed - for primary volumes that are available to be restored, and are not mounted for read or write access.

 If you do not select any value, your search will not be restricted by access mode.


Volume Status - Help

Use the Volume Status list box if you want to limit your search by volume status.

 You can select one, more than one, or none of the values shown in the list box, as follows:

• Online - for volumes that are available for use by ADSM.

• Offline - for volumes that are not available for use by ADSM.

• Empty - for volumes that contain no data.

• Pending - for volumes from which all files have been deleted but are pending due to a time delay parameter.

• Filling - for volumes that are not full and are accepting backup and archive data, or receiving migrated or moved data.

• Full - for volumes that are full and cannot accept any more data.

 If you do not select any value, your search will not be restricted by volume status.


Device Class - Help

 Use the Device Class combination box to select a device class in order to filter your search criteria. Select the drop-down control to display device classes in the list. Type in the entry field, or select from the list the device classes that you want to use as filters.

 Entering information in this field is optional.


Migrated - Help

 Select Migrated to list the contents of Migrated file spaces.

 Default:  All (List contents of All file spaces)


All - Help

 Select All to specify that your search include primary storage pools and copy storage pools.

 Default:  All


Primary - Help

 Select Primary to specify that your search include only primary storage pools.

 Default:  All


Copy - Help

 Select Copy to specify that your search include only copy storage pools.

 Default:  All


Location - Help

 Type the location of the volume in the location field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Location field can contain:

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&) up to 255 characters.

 Default value:  No location

 Example:  SanJose_1

 Considerations:

• If you include any blank characters in the Location field, you must enclose the entry in quotation marks ("").


Damaged Files - Help

 Use the Damaged Files list box to specify whether you want to include damaged files in your filter criteria. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Default:  All (lists all files, damaged or not)


Copied Files - Help

 Use the Copied Files list box to specify whether you want to include copied files in your filter criteria. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Default:  All (lists all files, copied or not)


File Type - Help

 Use the File Type list box to specify whether you want to include backup, archive, spacemanaged, or all file spaces in your filter criteria. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Default:  All (lists all files)


Migration Processes - Help

 Enter the number of processes by using the Migration processes spin buttons.  The value that you enter specifies the maximum number of processes that are performed for migrating files from the storage pool.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Migration processes field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 999.

 Default:  1

 Example:  4


Migration Processes - Help

 Enter the number of processes by using the Migration processes spin buttons.  The value that you enter specifies the maximum number of processes that are performed for migrating files from the storage pool.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Migration processes field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 999.

 Default:  1

 Example:  4


Windows Volume Names - Help

The Windows Volume Name field can contain:

• 4MM/8MM/DLT Tape - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape volume name

• CARTRIDGE - 1 to 6 character alphanumeric tape cartridge volume name

• DISK - 1 to 1024 character fully qualified logical volume name

• FILE - 1 to 255 character fully qualified name of file containing the volume data

 Example:

 4MM/8MM/DLT Tape - tape01

 DISK - \usr\adsm\disk01

 FILE - \usr\adsm\file01

 Considerations:

• Embedded blanks and equal signs are not allowed in the volume name.

• Ensure that the tape or cartridge volume is predefined by labeling it with a VOLSER using the ADSM adsmlbl utility.

• Ensure that the disk volume is pre-allocated and formatted by using the ADSM dsmfmt utility.

• Ensure that the optical disk volume is predefined by labeling and preformatting it with the ADSM adsmlbl utility.

• FILE device types do not have to be predefined.


Filespace - Help

 Select Filespace to specify collocation is activated at the file space rather than at the node level. Collocation gathers backup or archive data together for a client file space. ADSM attempts to keep data from a client file space on a minimum number of sequential access volumes. This helps reduce the number of media mounts needed to restore or retrieve files from sequential access media storage. It takes the server additional time to collocate this data.

 Default:  No (Collocation is not active)


Storage Pools Tasks - Help

Select the object you want to see a task list and task help for:

•   Storage Pools

•   Storage Pool Volumes


Storage Pool Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Adding a Copy Storage Pool

•   Adding a Primary Storage Pool

•   Backing up a Storage Pool

•   Copying a Storage Pool

•   Deleting a Storage Pool

•   Printing Storage Pool Information

•   Restoring a Storage Pool

•   Updating a Storage Pool

•   Viewing Storage Pool Information


Adding a Primary Storage Pool - Help

You can add a new primary storage pool that contains either random access media or sequential access media.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the new storage pool you are adding:

• The new storage pool name

• The device class to which the new storage pool will be assigned

 To add a Primary Storage Pool:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add Primary Storage Pool. The Primary Storage Pool Add window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name, device class, and other properties of the new storage pool.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to add the new storage pool.

 Considerations

• You must add a new storage pool volume before you can store data on it. See Adding a Storage Pool Volume.

• You can copy existing storage pool attributes to a new storage pool. See Copying a Storage Pool for instructions.


Copying a Storage Pool - Help

You can copy existing storage pool properties to add a new storage pool.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the new storage pool you are adding:

• The new storage pool name

• The name of a storage pool from which you want to copy properties

 To copy a storage pool:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Storage Pool Add window displays with the properties of the selected storage pool.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new storage pool name and change any properties required for the new storage pool.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the new storage pool.

 Considerations

• You must add a new storage pool volume before you can store data on it. See Adding a Storage Pool Volume.

• You can select multiple storage pools to copy.  A Storage Pool Add window displays for each storage pool you have selected.


Deleting a Storage Pool - Help

You can delete a storage pool containing either random access media or sequential access media.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the storage pool you want to delete:

• The name of the storage pool you want to delete

 To delete a storage pool:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pools you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Delete.  The Storage Pools Delete window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify you want to delete the storage pools listed in the delete list box. The storage pools are in a selected state. You can deselect a storage pool if you choose not to delete it.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button to remove the storage pool.

 Considerations

• You must delete all storage pool volumes that belong to a storage pool before the storage pool can be deleted.

• You must ensure that the storage pool you want to delete is not identified as the next storage pool for any other storage pools.

• You can select multiple storage pools to delete. A Storage Pool Delete window displays with all storage pools in a selected state in a list box. You can deselect storage pools you do not want to delete.


Updating a Storage Pool - Help

You can update the properties for a storage pool.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the storage pool you are updating:

• The name of the storage pool you want to update

 You can update the following properties for a storage pool:

• The description of the storage pool

• The new access mode setting for the storage pool

• The maximum size file allowed for storage within the storage pool

• The migration threshold settings

• The next storage pool name or setting

• The collocation setting for storage pools containing sequential access media

• The reclamation threshold setting for storage pools containing sequential access media

• The maximum number of scratch volumes for storage pools containing sequential access media

• The caching setting for storage pools containing random access media

 To update a storage pool:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select an existing storage pool containing random access or sequential access storage media.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties. The Storage Pool Properties notebook for random access or sequential access media displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter new information in the fields or select the new settings.

 Step 5 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes.

 Considerations

• You can select multiple storage pools to update.  A Storage Pool Properties notebook displays for each storage pool you have selected.


Viewing Storage Pool Information - Help

You can view the properties of a storage pool.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each storage pool you are viewing:

• The name of the storage pool you want to view

 To view a storage pool:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties.  The Storage Pool Properties notebook displays.


Printing Storage Pool Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Storage Pool Properties view, in the Details view, or copy information about selected storage pools in the Details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for copying information to a file:

•   Printing All Storage Pools in a Details View

•   Printing Selected Storage Pools in a Details View

•   Printing a Storage Pool Properties View


Printing All Storage Pools - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all storage pools in the details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the storage pools you are copying to a file:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy to a file all storage pools:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list. The Storage Pools Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the storage pool information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected by default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the details of all storage pools to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Storage Pools - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected storage pools in the details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the storage pools you are copying to a file:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy to a file selected storage pools:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pools you want to copy to a file. To copy information about a group of selected storage pools, select the storage pools in the details view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list. The Storage Pools-Print to File window for details displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected by default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the details of selected storage pools to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Storage Pool Properties View - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the storage pool properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the storage pools you are copying to a file:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy to a file the properties view of a storage pool:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, then select Open as Properties. The Properties view of the storage pool displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window, or, if available, select the File menu choice, then select Print to File. The Storage Pools Print to File window for properties displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected by default).

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the properties of the storage pool to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Adding a Storage Pool Volume - Help

You can add a new storage pool volume to a defined storage pool containing either random access media or sequential access media.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the new storage pool volume you are adding:

• The name of the storage pool to which the new storage pool volume will belong

• The volume name using the naming convention for the device type you are using

• The access mode for the new storage pool volume

 To add a new storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add. The Storage Pool Volumes Add Volume window displays.

 Step 3 	 Select the storage pool to which you want to add the new volume.

 Step 4 	 Enter the volume name.

 Step 5 	 Select the access mode for the new volume.

 Step 6 	 Select the Add push button to add the new storage pool volume.

 Considerations

• You can copy existing storage pool volume attributes to a new storage pool volume. See Copying a Storage Pool Volume for instructions.


Auditing Storage Pool Volumes - Help

You can audit the contents of a storage pool volume. ADSM will check for inconsistencies between the contents of the database and the contents of the volume.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the volume you are auditing:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The name of the storage pool volume you want to audit

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To audit a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volumes you want to audit.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Audit from the menu list. The Storage Pool Audit Volumes window displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Fix Inconsistencies check box if you want ADSM to delete from the database records that point to nonexistent files on the volume.

 Step 5 	 Select the Include Files Spanning Multiple Volumes check box to audit files that span multiple tape volumes. ADSM selects all associated volumes and begins the audit process with the first volume on which the file resides.

 Step 6 	 Select the Summary of Audit Results radio button to have only a summary of the audit results recorded in the Activity Log window of the Server object. Select the Each Inconsistency and a Summary of Audit Results radio button to have a report of each discovered inconsistency and a summary report sent to the Activity Log in the Server object.

 Step 7 	 Select the Audit push button to audit the volumes.

 Considerations

•  Any errors found during the audit are recorded in the Error Log.

•  During the audit process, archive and backup data cannot be written to or read from the volume.

•  You can select multiple storage pool volumes to audit. The Storage Pool Audit window displays with all the storage pool volumes in a selected state. You can deselect storage pool volumes you do not want to audit.


Copying a Storage Pool Volume - Help

You can copy the properties of an existing storage pool volume to add a new storage pool volume.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the new storage pool volume you are adding:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The volume name using the naming convention for the device type you are using

• The name of the storage pool volume from which you want to copy properties

 To copy a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volume you want to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add from the menu list. The Storage Pool Add Volume window displays with the attributes of the selected storage pool volume.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new storage pool volume name and change any required properties for the new storage pool volume.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to add the new storage pool volume.

 Considerations

• You can select multiple storage pool volumes to copy. A Storage Pool Volume Add window displays for each storage pool volume you have selected.


Updating a Storage Pool Volume - Help

You can update the access mode for a storage pool volume.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the storage pool volume you want to update:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The name of the storage pool volume you want to update

 To update a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volume you want to update.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties from the menu list. The Volume Properties notebook displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the new access mode for the volume.

 Step 5 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes.

 Considerations

•  You can select multiple storage pool volumes to update. A Storage Pool Properties window for fixed disk or removable media displays for each storage pool volume you have selected.


Deleting Storage Pool Volumes - Help

You can delete a storage pool volume from a storage pool.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the storage pool volume you want to delete:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The name of the storage pool volume you want to delete

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To delete a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volumes you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Delete.  The Storage Pool Delete Volumes window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify you want to delete the storage pool volumes listed in the Delete list box. The volumes are in a selected state.  You can deselect a volume if you choose not to delete it.

 Step 5 	 Select the Discard Data check box if you want to delete all data on the volume. Note:  If you choose to discard the data from a volume, all references to the data will be removed in the database, and the data will not be recoverable.

 Step 6 	 Select the Delete push button to remove the storage pool volumes from the storage pool.

 Considerations

• You can delete a storage pool volume only after you have discarded files on the volume or moved the files on the volume to another volume. See Moving Data from Storage Pool Volumes for instructions on moving data.

•  You can select multiple storage pool volumes to delete. A Storage Pool Volume Delete window displays with all the storage pool volumes in a selected state in a list box. You can deselect storage pool volumes you do not want to delete.


Moving Data from Storage Pool Volumes - Help

You can move data from a storage pool volume to volumes in the same storage pool or another storage pool. You can choose to move one or more volumes at a time.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the storage pool volumes you are moving:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The name of the storage pool volume to move the data from

• The name of the storage pool to move the data to

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To move data from a volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volume you want to move data from.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Move Data from the menu list. The Storage Pool Move Data Volumes window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify you want to move the storage pool volumes listed in the From These Volumes list box. The volumes are in a selected state. You can deselect a volume if you choose not to move the data from it.

 Step 5 	 Select the storage pool you want the data moved to in the To This Storage Pool drop-down list box. Select the drop-down control to see the available storage pools.

 Step 6 	 Select the Move Data push button to move the storage pool volume data to the selected storage pool.

 Considerations

• If you are preparing the volume for deletion, it is recommended that the volume access mode be set to read-only. This ensures that after the move data process has completed no data can be stored on the volume.

• You should ensure there is sufficient available space on the volumes within the specified storage pool to which you are moving the data.

•  During the move data process, archive and backup data cannot be written to or read from the volume.


Varying Random Access Storage Pool Volumes - Help

You can make a random access media storage pool volume available or unavailable to the ADSM server.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information to vary a volume online or offline:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The name of the storage pool volume you want to vary

 To vary a volume online or offline, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the volumes you want to vary online or offline.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, then select Vary -> Online to make a volume available to a storage pool.  Select Vary -> Offline to make a volume unavailable to the ADSM server.

 Considerations

• Both the Online and Offline options are available regardless of the actual state of the selected volumes. If a volume is offline and the request is for Vary Offline, then an error message is returned. If a volume is online and the request is for Vary Online, then an error message is returned.


Viewing Storage Pool Volume Information - Help

You can view the properties of a storage pool volume.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for each storage pool volume you are viewing:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The name of the storage pool volume you want to view

 To view a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volume you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties.  The Volume Properties notebook displays.


Listing Volume Content to a File - Help

You can list in a file, information about backup and archive data stored on a storage pool volume. The list will contain every file and directory information that exists on the volume. The file can be imported to a spreadsheet for printing or for viewing.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the storage pool volume information you are copying to a file:

• The name of a storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To list the contents of a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volume about whose contents you want to list information.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select List Volume Content to File from the menu list. The Storage Pool List Volume Content to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify that the volumes you want to copy file information about are in the Volumes list box. The volume names are in a selected state. You can deselect a volume if you choose not to list file information from it.

 Step 5 	 Enter node filter criteria in the Node Name field, and file space filter criteria in the File Space Name field, if you want to include only information for specific nodes and file spaces.

 Step 6 	 You can further define your filter criteria by selecting choices in the Damaged Files, Copied Files, and File Type list boxes.  The default for all these list boxes is All (listing all files).

 Step 7 	 Specify the number of files on the volume you want to include.  You can select the All radio button to include information for all the files on the selected volumes. You can select the First radio button and enter a number to specify that information about the first n number of files on the selected volumes are listed in a file. You can select the Last radio button and enter a number to specify that information about the last n number of files on the selected volumes are listed in a file.

 Step 8 	 Enter the name of the file in which information will be listed to in the File Name field.

 Step 9 	 Select the Append check box if you want the volume file information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected by default).

 Step 10 	 Select the List to File push button to list the volume file information to a file.

 Considerations

• If you use the default filter criteria, the output generated from this action can be extremely large. It is recommended that you reduce the size of the output by using the filter criteria on the Storage Pool List Volume Content to File window.


Printing Storage Pool Volume Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the storage pool volume properties view, in the details view, or copy information about selected storage pool volumes in the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for copying information to a file:

•   Printing All Storage Pool Volumes in a Details View

•   Printing Selected Storage Pool Volumes in a Details View

•   Printing a Storage Pool Volume Properties View


Printing All Storage Pool Volumes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all storage pool volumes in the details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the storage pool volumes you are copying to a file:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volumes belongs

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy to a file all storage pool volumes, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list. The Volume Print to File window for details displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the volume information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected by default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the details of all storage pool volumes to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Storage Pool Volumes - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected storage pool volumes in the details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the storage pool volumes you are copying to a file:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volumes belong

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy to a file selected storage pool volumes, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volumes you want to copy to a file for printing. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Print to File from the menu list. The Volumes Print to File window displays. selected by default).

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the volume information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected by default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the details of selected storage pool volumes to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Storage Pool Volume Properties View - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the storage pool volume properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the storage pool volumes you are copying to a file:

• The name of the storage pool to which the storage pool volume belongs

• The name of the file you want the information sent to

 To copy to a file the properties view of a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volume you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu choice, and then select Open as Properties from the menu list. The Properties view of the storage pool volume displays.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Storage Pool Volume Print to File window displays.

 Step 6 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 7 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file. (Append is selected by default).

 Step 8 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the properties of the Storage Pool Volume to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Storage Pool Volume Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Adding a Storage Pool Volume

•   Auditing Storage Pool Volumes

•   Copying a Storage Pool Volume

•   Deleting Storage Pool Volumes

•   Listing Volume Content to a File

•   Moving Data From Storage Pool Volumes

•   Printing Storage Pool Volume Information

•   Restoring a Storage Pool Volume

•   Updating a Storage Pool Volume

•   Varying Random Access Storage Pool Volumes

•   Viewing Storage Pool Volume Information


Backing Up a Storage Pool - Help

You can create backup copies of files that are stored in a primary storage pool. The backed up copies will be stored in copy storage pools

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The name of the primary storage pool for which you want to produce backup copies

• The name of the copy storage pool in which the copies will be produced

 To backup all or selected primary storage pools to copy storage pools:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Depending on which primary storage pools you want to backup, do one of the following:

 To backup all primary storage pools, select the File menu choice and then select Backup from the menu list.

 To backup selected primary storage pools to a copy pool, select one or more storage pools in the window.  Then, from the File menu choice, select Backup.

 The Backup window displays.

 Step 3 	 Type or select from the list the name of the copy storage pool to which you want the specified primary storage pools backed up in the Copy Storage Pool Name combination box.

 Step 4 	 Select the Backup push button.

 Considerations

• Specifying additional parallel processes in the Maximum Processes section can increase the performance of the backup operation.

• With additional parallel processes, ensure that there is a drive available for each process.

• To preview the files affected by a backup and the space required for these files without actually performing a backup, select the Yes radio button in the Preview Options section.


Restoring a Storage Pool - Help

You can restore previously backed up files from a copy storage pool pool to a primary storage pool.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The name of the primary storage pool for which files are to be restored.

 To restore files to a primary storage pool:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the primary storage pool for which files are to be restored, and then select Restore from the File menu choice. The Restore window displays.

 Step 3 	 Select the name of the copy storage pool from which copies are to be restored in the Copy Storage Pool name field. If you do not complete this field, files will be restored from any copy storage pool in which copies can be located.

 Step 4 	 Select the Restore push button.

 Considerations

• Specifying additional parallel processes in the Maximum Processes section can increase the performance of the restore operation.

• With additional parallel processes, ensure that there is a drive available for each process.

• To preview the files affected by a restore and the space required for these files without actually performing a restore, select the Yes radio button in the Preview Options section.

•  You cannot restore cached copies of files.


Restoring a Storage Pool Volume - Help

You can restore files that are currently stored on one or more volumes in the same primary storage pool. The files are restored from one or more copy storage pools to which these files have previously been backed up.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The name of the volume in a primary storage pool for which files are to be restored

 To restore a storage pool volume, expand the Storage Pools object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pool Volumes object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pool volumes displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the storage pool volume or volumes in a primary storage pool for which files are to be restored, and then select Restore from the File menu choice. The Restore window displays.

 Step 3 	 Select the name of the copy storage pool from which copies are to be restored in the Copy Storage Pool name field. If you do not complete this field, files will be restored from any copy storage pool in which copies can be located.

 Step 4 	 Select the Restore push button.

 Considerations

•  If you need to restore more than one volume in the same primary storage pool, select multiple volumes and then perform the restore operation rather than restoring each volume individually.

• Specifying additional parallel processes in the Maximum Processes section can increase the performance of the restore operation.

• With additional parallel processes, ensure that there is a drive available for each process.

• To preview the files affected by a restore and the space required for these files without actually performing a restore, select the Yes radio button in the Preview Options section.

•  You cannot restore cached copies of files.


Adding a Copy Storage Pool - Help

You can add a new copy storage pool that contains sequential access media.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the new copy storage pool you are adding:

• The new copy storage pool name

• The device class to which the new copy storage pool will be assigned

 To add a copy storage pool:

 Step 1 	 Open the Storage Pools object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains storage pools displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Add Copy Storage Pool. The Copy Storage Pool Add window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name, device class, and other properties of the new copy storage pool.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to add the new storage pool.

 Considerations

• You can copy existing storage pool attributes to a new storage pool. See Copying a Storage Pool for instructions.


Central Scheduler - Help

The Central Scheduler object allows Administrative Commands or Backup/Archive operations to be scheduled.

 The Central Scheduler opens to a Properties view. Use the view to add, update, or view the properties of the Scheduler.

 Expand the Central Scheduler object to display the Administrative Commands Events and Command Schedules objects and the Backup/Archive Events and Backup/Archive Schedules objects.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Central Scheduler:

•   Properties


Backup/Archive Events - Help

The Backup/Archive Events object contains the status of scheduled backup and archive operations.

 The Backup/Archive Events object opens to a Details view. Use the view to delete past events, copy details to a file for printing or to view event information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Backup/Archive Events:

•  Details


Backup/Archive Schedules - Help

The Backup/Archive Schedules object contains scheduled backup and archive operations.

 The Backup/Archive Schedules object opens to a Details view. Use the view to add, update, delete, copy a schedule, or copy schedule information to a file for printing.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Backup/Archive Schedules:

•  Details


Central Scheduler Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties of the Central Scheduler. Use this notebook to specify global scheduling properties for the server.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

Server configuration

Shows the retention period for event records. For backup/archive operations, Server Configuration also shows the scheduling method, the maximum number of sessions for processing of scheduled work, and the execution interval for randomization of start times.

Client options

Shows the number of hours between client contacts for scheduled operations, the number of times to retry failed attempts to execute a scheduled operation, and the number of minutes between retries. This tab is valid for backup/archive operations.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Server Configuration - Help

 Use the Server Configuration section of the Central Scheduler notebook to set the server options used to start scheduled backup/archive and administrative command operations.

 This section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Server Configuration page to update the retention period for event records. For Backup/Archive operations, use this page to update the scheduling method, set the maximum number of sessions for scheduled operations, and the execution interval for randomization of start times.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Client Options - Help

 Use the Client Options section of the Central Scheduler notebook to set client options used to regulate the backup/archive scheduled operations.

 This section contains two pages of properties.

 Use Page 1 of the Client Options section to specify the number of hours between client contacts for scheduled operations, and whether or not to override the client defined values.

 Use Page 2 of the Client Options section, Retry options, to specify the number of times to retry failed attempts to execute a scheduled operation, the number of minutes between retries, and whether or not to override the client defined values.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Maximum Sessions Allowed for Scheduled Operations - Help

 Type the percentage of sessions which can be used for processing scheduled backup/archive work in the Maximum Sessions Allowed for Scheduled Operations field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 100

 Default:  None

 Example:  50

 Considerations:

• The initial value of this field is set to 50 at the time that the server is installed.

• No backup/archive scheduled events can begin if a value of zero is specified.


Retention Period for Event Records - Help

 Type the number of days that backup/archive and administrative command event records are to be retained in the database in the Retention Period for Event Records field.

 An event record is created whenever processing of a scheduled operation is started or missed.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 9999

 Default:  None

 Example:  10

 Considerations:

•  The initial value of this field is set to 10 at the time that the server is installed.


Execution Interval for Randomization of Start Times - Help

 Type the percent of the startup window over which the start times for individual backup/archive nodes will be distributed in the Execution Interval for Randomization of Start Times field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 50

 Default:  None

 Example:  25

 Considerations:

• This field applies to the Client Polling method of Backup/Archive Central Scheduling.

• A value of zero indicates that no randomization will occur.

• A value of 50 indicates that nodes will be assigned start times which are randomly distributed across the first half of the startup window.

• The initial value of this field is set to 25 at the time that the server is installed.


Any - Help

 Select Any to indicate that the server supports clients running in either the client-polling or the server prompted backup/archive scheduling mode.

 Initial Setting:  On


Client Polling - Help

 Select Client Polling to indicate that only the client polling method of backup/archive central scheduling can be used. Clients will poll the server at specified time intervals to obtain scheduled work.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Server Prompted - Help

 Select Server Prompted to indicate that only the server-prompted method of backup/archive central scheduling can be used for TCP/IP clients. Clients will wait to be contacted by the server when scheduled work needs to be performed and a session is available.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Hours Between Client Contacts - Help

 Type the number of hours between attempts by the backup/archive client to contact the server for scheduled commands in the Hours Between Client Contacts field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 9999

 Default:  None

 Example:  2

 Considerations:

• This field applies to the Client Polling method of Backup/Archive Central Scheduling.

• The initial value of this field is set to the value specified by each client at the time that the server is installed.


Times to Retry - Help

 Type the maximum number of times which the backup/archive client scheduler will retry after a scheduled operation fails in the Times to Retry field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 9999

 Default:  None

 Example:  2

 Considerations:

• The initial value of this field is set to the value specified by each client at the time that the server is installed.


Minutes Between Retries - Help

 Type the number of minutes between attempts by the client scheduler to retry after a failed attempt to contact the server or after a scheduled operation fails execution in the Minutes Between Retries field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 9999

 Default:  None

 Example:  20

 Considerations:

• The initial value of this field is set to the value specified by each client at the time that the server is installed.


Use Client Defined Value - Help

 Select Use Client Defined Value to specify that the server is to use the value defined in the client's options file or the default client value for this field.

 Initial Setting:  On


Override Client Defined Value - Help

 Select Override Client Defined Value to specify that the server is to disregard the value defined in the backup/archive client's options file or the default client value and to use the value in this field.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Backup/Archive Events Details - Help

This window displays status information about each scheduled backup/archive event. Use this window to delete past events, to view or to copy details of the events to a file. The default view is the events for the current day.

 Data Columns

Scheduled Start

Displays the date and time the backup/archive schedule was intended to start.

Actual Start

Displays the date and time that the event actually started.

Schedule Name

Displays the name of the schedule for the event.

Node Name

Displays the name of the client node to which the schedule applies.

Status

Displays the completion status of the event.

 Possible values are:

Completed

Specifies that the scheduled event has been completed.

Missed

Specifies that the scheduled startup window for this event has passed and the schedule has not begun.

Failed

Specifies that the client reported a failure in executing the scheduled operation and successive retries have not succeeded.

Started

Specifies that processing began for the event.

Restarted

Specifies that the client has retried execution of the scheduled operation.

Severed

Specifies that communication with the client was severed before the event could complete.

Future

Specifies that the beginning of the startup window for the event is in the future.

Pending

Specifies that the EVENTS DETAILS window displayed during the startup window for the event, but execution of the scheduled operation has not yet begun.

Uncertain

Specifies that the state of the event cannot be determined.

 Note: A record with Uncertain status is returned from the server if the server cannot find an event record implicated by the named schedule. The possible reasons for not finding the event record are either the record was deleted or the server was unavailable during the scheduled startup window, hence, the schedule was never started.

 Records with Uncertain status are generated during the search; they don't physically reside in the database. You can tell the server not to return these types of records by selecting the "Exceptions only" push button in the Events Include window or by deleting the schedule if the schedule is no longer needed.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the Events that you want to display or copy properties to a file.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Backup/Archive Event

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Backup/Archive Event - Help

Each Backup/Archive Event object represents a scheduled backup or archive event. Select the event that you want to work with. You can display or copy properties to a file.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Backup/Archive Events:

•  Details


Backup/Archive Events Include - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the events you want displayed in the Backup/Archive Events Details view.

 To include filtered events in the view:

1. Select from the following:

• Type the policy domain name in the Policy Domain Name field.

• Type the schedule name in the Schedule Name field.

• Type the node name or names in the Node Name(s) field.

• Enter the range of dates and times using the Scheduled Start Times spin buttons.

• Select the Exceptions Only check box to display only events that failed or that did not execute successfully.

2. Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Domain - Help

 Type the name of the Policy domain in the Policy Domain field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Policy Domain can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Wildcard characters

 Default:  *

 Example:  LAN1DOMAIN


Schedule Name - Help

 Type the backup/archive or administrative command schedule name in the Schedule Name field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Schedule Name can contain:

• 1 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  *

 Example:  DAILY_BACKUP     admincmd1


Node Name(s) - Help

 Type a node name or wildcard characters in the Node Name(s) field and press the Include push button. The nodes matching the selection criteria displays in the Nodes list.

 The Node Name can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  *

 Example:  JAMES_SMITH


Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Date spin buttons to be used as the beginning date for the Events Include.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Date can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 - 2100 for the year

 Default:  Current date

 Example:  03 / 29 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.


Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Time spin buttons to be used as the starting point for the Events Include.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Time can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Default:  00:00

 Example:  01 : 00

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time


Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Date spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the Events Include.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Date can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 - 2100 for the year

 Default:  Value for begin date

 Example:  05 / 22 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.


Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Time spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the Events Include.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Time can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Default:  23:59

 Example:  23 : 59

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time


Exceptions Only - Help

 Select Exceptions Only to indicate that only those events that failed or that did not execute successfully are to be displayed.


Backup/Archive Schedules Details - Help

This window displays information on one or more backup/archive schedules. Use this window to add, update, delete, copy a schedule within a policy domain or to another existing policy domain, or copy schedule information to a file for printing.

 Data Columns

Policy Domain

Displays the name of the policy domain to which this schedule belongs.

Schedule Name

Displays the name of the schedule.

Action

Displays the type of operation that is to occur when the schedule is executed.

Start Date/Time

Displays the date and time for the beginning of the initial startup window.

Length of Startup Window

Displays the length of the window during which the schedule will be started.

Period Between Startup Windows

Displays the number of time units between startup windows for the schedule.

Day

Displays the scheduled day on which the startup window is to begin.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the Schedules that you want to open as properties, copy to an existing domain or to a file for printing.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Backup/Archive Schedule

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Backup/Archive Schedule - Help

Each Backup/Archive Schedule represents the data used to schedule backup or archive work for the client nodes. You can open a schedule as properties, copy schedules within a policy domain or to another existing policy domain, or copy information to a file for printing.

 The name of any expired schedule will be preceded by an asterisk.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Backup/Archive Schedules:

•  Details


Copy Schedule - Help

Select Copy Schedule to display a window which will allow you to specify the criteria needed to copy a schedule to a new schedule.

 This choice is available when objects have been selected.


Backup/Archive Schedule Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to add a new backup/archive schedule to the schedules container. Use this notebook to add descriptive information, assign the timing of the schedule operation, and associate the new schedule with a set of nodes in a policy domain.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the name of the policy domain and schedule, descriptive text for the schedule, and nodes associated with this schedule.

Operation

Shows the overriding client options, the objects and the actions which will occur when the schedule is executed.

Timing

Shows the timing requirements and the priority of the schedule.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Backup/Archive Schedule Add Notebook to specify the properties of a new backup/archive schedule to be added to the Central Scheduler object.

 This section contains one page of properties.

 Use the General page to specify the name of the policy domain and schedule, descriptive text for the schedule, and node associations.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Operation - Help

 Use the Operation section of the Backup/Archive Schedule Add Notebook to specify the properties of a new backup/archive schedule to be added to the Central Scheduler object.

 The Operation section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Operation page to specify the overriding client options, the objects and the actions which will occur when the schedule is executed.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Timing - Help

 Use the Timing section of the Schedule Add Notebook to specify the properties of a new backup/archive or administrative command schedule to be added to the Central Scheduler object.

 The Timing section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Timing page to specify the timing requirements and the priority of the schedule.

 Considerations:

• If the initial startup window has elapsed without the schedule starting, the schedule will first execute as specified by the Period Between Startup Windows.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Domain - Help

 Use the Policy Domain list box to specify the name of the policy domain to which the schedule belongs. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Description - Help

 Type the descriptive text which describes the schedule in the Description field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Description can contain:

• 0 to 1024 characters

• Any character

 Default:  None

 Example:

 "Dept M94's Incremental backup schedule"

 Export Admin Command

 Considerations:

• If quotes are used in this field, they must be balanced


Action - Help

 Use the Action list box to specify the action which will occur when this backup/archive schedule is executed.

 The types of actions are:

Archive

Specifies that you want to archive the files described in the Objects entry field.

Command

Specifies that you want to execute a client operating system command described in the Objects entry field.

Incremental

Specifies that you want to backup any files that have changed since the last backup and for which the specified time between backups has elapsed.

Macro

Specifies that you want to execute a macro whose file name is described in the Objects entry field.

Restore

Specifies that you want to restore the files described in the Objects entry field.

Retrieve

Specifies that you want to retrieve the files described in the Objects entry field.

Selective

Specifies that you want to backup the files described in the Objects entry field.

 Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list. Select from the list the action that you want to occur. You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Default:  Incremental


Overriding Client Options - Help

 Type the options to be supplied to the DSMC operation at the time the backup/archive schedule is executed in the Overriding Client Options field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Overriding Client Options field can contain:

• 0 to 512 characters

 Default:  None

 Example:  -quiet

 Considerations:

• Text that contains blanks must be enclosed in double quotes


Objects - Help

 Type the objects upon which the specified action is to be performed in the Objects field.

 The allowed objects depend on the specified action and the platform on which the schedule will be executed. For an Action of Command or Macro, the Objects field describes the command or macro to be executed. For Archive, Restore, Retrieve, and Selective, the Objects field describes the files or drives to be acted upon.

 This field must be filled in for all but Incremental backup.

 The Objects field can contain:

• 0 to 512 characters

 Default:  Objects defined in the client's option file

 Example:

      OS/2, Windows - c: d:

                      d:\mymacro

      AIX  - /home

             "copy /u/me/data /u/you"


Start Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Start Date spin buttons for the beginning of the window in which the schedule will first be executed.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Start Date field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 - 2100 for the year

 Default:  Current date

 Example:  03 / 29 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.


Start Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Start Time spin buttons for the beginning of the window in which the schedule will first be executed.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Start Time field can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Default:  Current time

 Example:  23:59

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time


Expiration Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Expiration Date spin buttons on which the schedule will no longer be used.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Expiration Date field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 - 2100 for the year

 Default:  Never

 Example:  05 / 22 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The schedule will expire at 23:59:59 on the specified date

• The date specified is the server date.


Day of Week - Help

 Use the Day of Week list box to specify the day of the week on which the startup window will begin. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Default:  Any

 Example:

 If you want the schedule to start between 1:00 and 3:00 AM on Tuesday, October 5 and be repeated once a week, every Tuesday thereafter, then:

1. Set Start Date to 10/05/93

2. Set Start Time to 01:00

3. Set Length of Startup Window and Startup Window Length Units to 2 HOURS

4. Set Period Between Startup Windows and Period Between Startup Windows Units to 1 WEEK

5. Set Day of Week to TUESDAY


Priority - Help

 Type the priority of the schedule in the Priority field. A lower numerical priority value for a schedule will cause the schedule to start before a schedule with a higher numerical value.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Priority field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 10

 Default:  5

 Example:  5


Never - Help

 Select Never to disregard the entry in the expiration date field. If Never is selected, the schedule will not expire.


Add - Help

 Select Add on the Add Node Associations window to add the selected nodes to the Schedule Properties notebook. You must then select Apply on the Schedule Properties notebook to submit the node associations to the server.

 When Add is selected, the node is added to the notebook and the Add Node Associations window is removed.

 To update the notebook without removing the Add Node Associations window, select Apply.


Select All - Help

 Select Select All to select every entry in the list.


Deselect All - Help

 Select Deselect All to deselect every entry in the list.


Backup/Archive Schedule Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties assigned to a backup/archive schedule in the Central Scheduler. Use this notebook to update, view or copy schedule information to a file for printing.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the name of the policy domain and schedule, descriptive text for the schedule, update history, and nodes associated with this schedule.

Operation

Shows the overriding client options, the objects and the actions which will occur when the schedule is executed.

Timing

Shows the timing requirements and the priority of the schedule.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Backup/Archive Schedule Properties Notebook to update or view the properties of a schedule.

 This section contains one page of properties.

 Use the General page to view the policy domain name, schedule name, and modification history, and to update descriptive text for the schedule and node associations.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Policy Domain

•  Schedule Name

•  Last Update By

•  Last Update Date/Time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Operation - Help

 Use the Operation section of the Backup/Archive Schedule Properties Notebook to update the properties of a backup/archive schedule.

 The Operation section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Operation page to specify the overriding backup/archive client options, the objects and the actions to be performed on the objects.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Timing - Help

 Use the Timing section of the Schedule Properties Notebook to update the properties of a backup/archive or an administrative command schedule.

 The Timing section contains one page of properties.

 Use the Timing page to specify the timing requirements and the priority of the schedule.

 Considerations:

• If the initial startup window has elapsed without the schedule starting, the schedule will first execute as specified by the Period Between Startup Windows.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Policy Domain - Help

 The Policy Domain field displays the name of the policy domain.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Schedule Name - Help

 The Schedule Name field displays the name of the schedule.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update Date/Time - Help

 The Last Update Date/Time field displays the date and time the specified schedule was last updated.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Last Update By - Help

 The Last Update By field displays the administrator name of the client who last updated this schedule.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Schedules Include - Help

Use this window to specify the filters for the schedules you want to include in the Backup/Archive Schedules Details view.

 To include filtered schedules in the view:

1. Select from the following:

• Type the policy domain name in the Policy Domain Name field.

• Type the schedule name in the Schedule Name field.

• Select All Schedules or Schedules with Associated Nodes radio button.

• Type the node name or names in the Node Name(s) field.

2. Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Schedule Copy - Help

This window displays the fields you can use to specify the criteria required for copying a backup/archive schedule within a policy domain or to another existing policy domain. Use this window to specify the schedule name and the policy domain name to which the schedule is to be copied.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Policy Domain

•  Schedule Name

Note:   Node associations are not copied along with the schedule. You must define the nodes to be associated with the schedule in the Schedule Properties notebook once the schedule is copied.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Target Policy Domain - Help

 Use the Target Policy Domain list box to select the policy domain to which the schedule will be copied. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.


Target Schedule Name - Help

 Type the name that the copied backup/archive schedule is to have if it is to differ from the schedule name provided, in the Target Schedule Name field.

 Entering information in this field is optional unless the target policy domain is the same as the source policy domain.

 The Target Schedule Name can contain:

• 0 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  Current schedule name

 Example:  DAILY_INCR

 Considerations:

• If target schedule name already exists in target policy domain, the copy will not occur unless the Replace check box is selected.


Replace - Help

 Select Replace if the existing target schedule should be replaced if one exists.


Copy - Help

 Select Copy to copy the specified schedule to a new schedule.


Nodes - Help

 The nodes that are associated with the specified policy domain are displayed in the Nodes list. Select the nodes that you want to associate with this schedule. You can choose multiple selections from the list.


Include - Help

 Select Include to display in the Nodes list the nodes you want to choose from for Node Associations. Once the nodes are displayed, you may select the nodes you want to associate with this schedule.


Backup/Archive Event Properties - Help

This window displays the properties for a backup or archive event. Use this window to view or copy the event properties to a file for printing.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields in the properties window, select from the list below:

•  Policy Domain

•  Schedule Name

•  Node Name

•  Scheduled Start

•  Actual Start

•  Completed

•  Status

•  Result

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node Name - Help

 The Node Name field displays the name of the node.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Scheduled Start - Help

 The Scheduled Start field displays date and time that the event is set to start.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Actual Start - Help

 The Actual Start field displays the date and time that the event actually started.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Completed - Help

 The Completed field displays the date and time that the event completed.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Status - Help

 The Status field displays the state of processing of the event.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Result - Help

 The Result field displays the return code of the operation.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


Associated Nodes - Help

 The Associated Nodes are nodes that are associated with this schedule. If the list is empty, you must select Add Nodes to display a window which will allow you to specify the criteria to associate nodes. To disassociate nodes from the schedule, select from the Associated Nodes list the nodes you want to disassociate and then select the Delete Nodes push button. You can choose multiple selections from the list.


Add Nodes - Help

 Select Add Nodes to display a window which will allow you to specify the criteria to associate nodes with this schedule.


Delete Nodes - Help

 Select from the Associated Nodes list the nodes you want to disassociate from this schedule and then select the Delete Nodes push button.


Schedules Add Node Associations - Help

This window displays the criteria to specify node associations for this backup/archive schedule. Use this window to include nodes from the indicated policy domain in the Nodes list from which you will select the nodes you want to associate with this schedule.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields in the window, select from the list below:

•  Policy Domain

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


All Schedules - Help

 Select All Schedules to specify that all schedules matching the include criteria will be displayed.

 Initial Setting:  On


Schedules with Associated Nodes - Help

 Select Schedules with Associated Nodes to specify that backup/archive schedules with node associations will be displayed. When Schedules with Associated Nodes is selected, the Node Name(s) field becomes available to enter additional include criteria.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Apply - Help

 Select Apply on the Add Node Associations window to add the selected nodes to the Schedule Properties notebook. You must then select Apply on the Schedule Properties notebook to submit the node associations to the server.

 When Apply is selected, the node is added to the notebook without removing the Add Node Associations window.

 To update the notebook and remove the Add Node Associations window, select Add.


Administrative Command Events - Help

The Administrative Command Events object contains the status of scheduled administrative command operations.

 The Administrative Command Events object opens to a Details view. Use the view to delete past events, to copy details to a file for printing or to view event information.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Administrative Command Events:

•  Details


Administrative Command Schedules - Help

The Administrative Command Schedules object contains the administrative command schedules.

 The Administrative Command Schedules object opens to a Details view. Use the view to add, update, delete, copy a schedule, or copy schedule information to a file for printing.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Administrative Command Schedules:

•  Details


Administrative Command Events Details - Help

This window displays status information about each scheduled administrative command event. Use this window to delete past events, to view or to copy details of the events to a file. The default view is the events for the current day.

 Data Columns

Scheduled Start

Displays the date and time the administrative command schedule was intended to start.

Actual Start

Displays the date and time that the event actually started.

Schedule Name

Displays the name of the schedule for the event.

Status

Displays the completion status of the event.

 Possible values are:

Completed

Specifies that the scheduled event has been completed.

Missed

Specifies that the scheduled startup window for this event has passed and the schedule has not begun.

Failed

Specifies that the client reported a failure in executing the scheduled operation and successive retries have not succeeded.

Started

Specifies that processing began for the event.

Restarted

Specifies that the client has retried execution of the scheduled operation.

Severed

Specifies that communication with the client was severed before the event could complete.

Future

Specifies that the beginning of the startup window for the event is in the future.

Pending

Specifies that the EVENTS DETAILS window displayed during the startup window for the event, but execution of the scheduled operation has not yet begun.

Uncertain

Specifies that the state of the event cannot be determined.

 Note: A record with Uncertain status is returned from the server if the server cannot find an event record implicated by the named schedule. The possible reasons for not finding the event record are either the record was deleted or the server was unavailable during the scheduled startup window, hence, the schedule was never started.

 Records with Uncertain status are generated during the search; they don't physically reside in the database. You can tell the server not to return these types of records by selecting the "Exceptions only" push button in the Events Include window or by deleting the schedule if the schedule is no longer needed.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the Events that you want to display or copy properties to a file.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Administrative Command Event

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrative Command Event - Help

Each Administrative Command Event object represents a scheduled administrative command. Select the event that you want to work with. You can display or copy event properties to a file.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Administrative Command Events:

•  Details


Administrative Command Events Include - Help

Use this window to specify filters for the events you want displayed in the Administrative Command Events Details view.

 To include filtered events in the view:

1. Select from the following:

• Type the schedule name in the Schedule Name field.

• Enter the range of dates and times using the Scheduled Start Times spin buttons.

• Select the Exceptions Only check box to display only events that failed or that did not execute successfully.

2. Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrative Command Schedules Details - Help

This window displays information on one or more administrative command schedules. Use this window to add, update, delete, or copy a schedule.

 Data Columns

Schedule Name

Displays the name of the schedule.

Start Date/Time

Displays the date and time for the beginning of the initial startup window.

Length of Startup Window

Displays the length of the window during which the schedule will be started.

Period Between Startup Windows

Displays the number of time units between startup windows for the schedule.

Day

Displays the scheduled day on which the startup window is to begin.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the Schedules that you want to open as properties, or copy to a file for printing.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• Administrative Command Schedule

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrative Command Schedule - Help

Each Administrative Command Schedule represents the data used to schedule administrative command work for the server. You can open a schedule as properties or copy schedule information to a file for printing.

 The name of any expired schedule will be preceded by an asterisk.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of Administrative Command Schedules:

•  Details


Administrative Command Schedule Add - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the fields you can use to create a new administrative command schedule to the schedules container. Use this notebook to add descriptive information, to define the administrative command, and to assign the timing of the schedule operation.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the name of the schedule, descriptive text for the schedule, and the administrative command.

Timing

Shows the timing requirements and the priority of the schedule.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Administrative Command Schedule Add Notebook to specify the properties of a new schedule to be added to the Central Scheduler object.

 This section contains one page of properties.

 Use the General page to specify the name of the schedule, descriptive text for the schedule, and the administrative command to be scheduled.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrative Command Schedule Properties - Help

This window uses a notebook to display the properties assigned to an administrative command schedule in the Central Scheduler. Use this notebook to update, view or copy schedule information to a file for printing.

 Tabs for this notebook are:

General

Shows the name of the schedule, descriptive text for the schedule, update history, the administrative command, and whether this command is active or inactive.

Timing

Shows the timing requirements and the priority of the schedule.

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


General - Help

 Use the General section of the Administrative Command Schedule Properties Notebook to update or view the properties of a schedule.

 This section contains one page of properties.

 Use the General page to view the schedule name and modification history, and to update descriptive text for the schedule or the administrative command to be scheduled.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields for the page, select from the list below:

•  Schedule Name

•  Last Update By

•  Last Update Date/Time

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Schedules Include - Help

Use this window to specify the filters for the schedules you want to include in the Administrative Commands Schedules Details view.

 To include filtered schedules in the view:

1. Type the schedule name in the Schedule Name field.

2. Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrative Command Event Properties - Help

This window displays the properties for an administrative command event. Use this window to view or copy the event properties to a file for printing.

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields in the properties window, select from the list below:

•  Schedule Name

•  Scheduled Start

•  Actual Start

•  Completed

•  Status

•  Result

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrative Command - Help

 Type the administrative command that you would like to schedule in the Administrative Command field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Administrative Command field can contain:

• A valid administrative server command

• 1 to 512 characters

 Default:  none

 Example:  'EXPORT NODE mynode'

 Considerations:

• Text that contains blanks must be enclosed in quotes.

• QUERY ACTlog is not a valid command for this field.


Delete Past Events - Help

Select Delete Past Events to display a window which will allow you to specify the events you want to delete.

 Delete Past Events is available in the Backup/Archive Events Details and the Administrative Command Events Details views.


Backup/Archive Events Delete - Help

Use this window to specify the Date and Time prior to which backup/archive events are to be deleted.

 To delete backup/archive events:

1. Use the Date spin buttons to specify the date.

2. Use the Time spin buttons to specify the time.

3. Select the Delete push button to delete the events.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Administrative Command Events Delete - Help

Use this window to specify the Date and Time prior to which administrative command events are to be deleted.

 To delete administrative command events:

1. Use the Date spin buttons to specify the date.

2. Use the Time spin buttons to specify the time.

3. Select the Delete push button to delete the events.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Date - Help

 Enter the date using the Date spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the Events Delete.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Date can contain:

• A number from 1 to 12 for the month

• A number from 1 to 31 for the day

• A number from 1990 - 2100 for the year

 Default:  Current date

 Example:  05 / 22 / 1993

 Considerations:

• The date specified is the server date.


Time - Help

 Enter the time using the Time spin buttons to be used as the ending point for the Events Delete.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Time can contain:

• A number from 0 to 23 for the hour

• A number from 0 to 59 for the minute

 Default:  Current time

 Example:  23 : 59

 Considerations:

• The time specified is the server time


Yes - Help

 Select Yes to specify that the administrative command is active and available to be scheduled and executed.

 Initial Setting:  On


No - Help

 Select No to specify that the administrative command is inactive and unavailable to be scheduled or executed.

 Initial Setting:  Off


Schedule Copy - Help

This window displays the fields you can use to specify the criteria required for copying an administrative command schedule to a new schedule. Use this window to specify the schedule name to which the schedule is to be copied.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 For a detailed explanation of the output fields, select from the list below:

•  Schedule Name

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Target Schedule Name - Help

 Type the name that the copied administrative command schedule is to have in the Target Schedule Name field.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Target Schedule Name can contain:

• 0 to 30 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  none

 Example:  newadmcmd

 Considerations:

• If target schedule name already exists, the copy will not occur unless the Replace check box is selected.


Length of Startup Window - Help

 Type the length of the window during which the schedule will be started in the Length of Startup Window field. This field is numeric only. The units are specified in the Startup Window Length Units field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Length of Startup Window field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 999

 Default:  1

 Example:

 If you want the schedule to start between 1:00 and 3:00 AM on Tuesday, October 5 and be repeated once a week, every Tuesday thereafter, then:

1. Set Start Date to 10/05/93

2. Set Start Time to 01:00

3. Set Length of Startup Window and Startup Window Length Units to 2 HOURS

4. Set Period Between Startup Windows and Period Between Startup Windows Units to 1 WEEK

5. Set Day of Week to TUESDAY

 Considerations:

• The value is ignored if Startup Window Length Units=Indefinite is specified.

• If the initial startup window has elapsed without the schedule starting, the schedule will first execute as specified by the Period Between Startup Windows.

• The Length of Startup Window value must be less than the Period Between Startup Windows value.

• Length of Startup Window maps to the duration value returned in the server messages.


Startup Window Length Units - Help

 Use the Startup Window Length Units list box to specify the time units to be used to determine the length of the startup windows for this schedule. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Default:  Hours

 Considerations:

• Indefinite is only allowed if Period Between Startup Windows=Onetime.

• Startup Window Length Units maps to duration units value returned in the server messages.


Period Between Startup Windows - Help

 Type the number of time units between startup windows for this schedule in the Period Between Startup Windows field. This field is numeric only. The units are specified in the Period Between Startup Windows Units field.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Period Between Startup Windows field can contain:

• A number from 1 to 999

 Default:  1

 Example:

 If you want the schedule to start between 1:00 and 3:00 AM on Tuesday, October 5 and be repeated once a week, every Tuesday thereafter, then:

1. Set Start Date to 10/05/93

2. Set Start Time to 01:00

3. Set Length of Startup Window and Startup Window Length Units to 2 HOURS

4. Set Period Between Startup Windows and Period Between Startup Windows Units to 1 WEEK

5. Set Day of Week to TUESDAY

 Considerations:

• The value is ignored if Period Between Startup Windows Units=Onetime

• The Length of Startup Window value must be less than the Period Between Startup Windows value.

• The Length of Startup Window maps to the period value returned in the server messages.


Period Between Startup Windows Units - Help

 Use the Period Between Startup Windows Units list box to specify the time units to be used for determining the period between startup windows for the schedule. Select the drop-down control to display all the items in the list.

 You can choose only one selection from the list.

 Default:  Days

 Considerations:

• A value of Onetime causes the schedule to execute only once.

• Period Between Startup Windows Units maps to the period units value returned in the server messages.


Central Scheduler Tasks - Help

Select the task list you want to view:

• Central Scheduler Properties Tasks

• Backup/Archive Schedule Tasks

• Administrative Command Scheduler Tasks


Defining Central Scheduler Properties - Help

You can define properties for the Central Scheduler.

 To define Central Scheduler properties:

 Step 1 	 Open the Central Scheduler object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Enter properties for the Central Scheduler.

 Step 3 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the information to the server.


Updating Central Scheduler Properties - Help

You can update properties of the Central Scheduler.

 To update Central Scheduler properties:

 Step 1 	 Open the Central Scheduler object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the field you want to update.

 Step 3 	 Enter the new information for the field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the changes to the server.


Printing Central Scheduler Properties - Help

You can copy the Properties view of the Central Scheduler to a file. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print Central Scheduler properties:

 Step 1 	 Open the Central Scheduler object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Central Scheduler - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the properties of the Central Scheduler to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Defining a Backup/Archive Schedule - Help

You can define a new backup/archive schedule to the Central Scheduler.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the policy domain to which the schedule will belong

• The name of the new schedule

• The nodes to be associated with the new schedule

 To define a Backup/Archive Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Add from the Edit menu.

 Step 3 	 Enter properties for the new Schedule.

  Step 4  	 Define the node associations for this schedule.

 Step 5 	 Select the Add push button to submit the new Schedule information to the server.


Updating a Backup/Archive Schedule - Help

You can update the properties of a backup/archive schedule.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

 To update a Backup/Archive Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Schedule that you want to update.

 Step 3 	 Select Open as Properties from the File menu.

 Step 4 	 Select the field you want to update.

 Step 5 	 Enter the new information for the field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the new Schedule information to the server.


Viewing a Backup/Archive Schedule - Help

You can view the properties of a backup/archive schedule.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

 To view a Backup/Archive Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 If you want to filter the list of schedules, select Include from the View menu.

 Step 3 	 To see detailed information about a particular schedule, select that schedule and then select Open as Properties from the File menu.


Copying a Backup/Archive Schedule - Help

You can copy existing properties of a backup/archive schedule within the same policy domain or to another existing policy domain.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule you want to copy

• The name of the policy domain to which the schedule will be copied

 To copy a Backup/Archive Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the schedule you would like to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select Copy Schedule from the File menu.

 Step 4 	 Enter the target policy domain name and optionally, the schedule name.

 Step 5 	 Select the Replace push button if the existing target schedule should be replaced.

 Step 6 	 Select the Copy push button to copy the schedule.


Deleting a Backup/Archive Schedule - Help

You can delete backup/archive schedules from the Central Scheduler.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The names of the schedules

 To delete a Backup/Archive Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the schedule, or schedules you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select Delete from the Edit menu. A delete confirmation window is displayed for you to verify the schedules to be deleted.

 Step 4 	 Deselect schedules you choose not to delete on the confirmation window.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button on the confirmation window to delete the schedules from the server. Select the Cancel push button if you want to cancel the delete action.


Printing Backup/Archive Schedule Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Schedules Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Backup/Archive Schedules in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all backup/archive schedules in a details view

•   Printing selected backup/archive schedules in a details view

•   Printing a properties view of backup/archive schedules


Printing All Backup/Archive Schedules - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Backup/Archive Schedules in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Schedules you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print Backup/Archive Schedules, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Schedules - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the Schedules information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Schedules information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Backup/Archive Schedules - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Backup/Archive Schedules in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Schedules:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print selected Backup/Archive Schedules, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected Schedules, select the Schedules in the details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Schedules - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected Schedules to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Backup/Archive Schedule Properties - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Backup/Archive Schedule Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Backup/Archive Schedules.

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To copy a properties view of Backup/Archive Schedules, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the schedule you want to print.

 Step 3 	 Select Open as Properties under the File menu.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Schedules - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the properties of Schedules to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Viewing Backup/Archive Events - Help

You can view details for the backup/archive events.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the policy domain

• The name of the schedule

• The time range over which you want to check for scheduled executions.

 To view Backup/Archive Events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains scheduled events displays.

 Step 2 	 If you want to filter the list of events, select Include from the View menu.

 Step 3 	 To see detailed information about a particular event, select that event and then select Open as Properties from the File menu.


Printing Backup/Archive Events Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Events Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Backup/Archive Events in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all backup/archive events in a details view

•   Printing selected backup/archive events in a details view

•   Printing a backup/archive event properties view


Printing All Backup/Archive Events - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Backup/Archive Events in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Events you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print Backup/Archive Events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains scheduled events displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Events - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the Events information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Events information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Backup/Archive Events - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Backup/Archive Events in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Events:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print selected Backup/Archive Events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains scheduled events displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected Events, select the Events in the details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Events - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected Events to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Defining Node Associations - Help

You can associate nodes with backup/archive schedules in the Central Scheduler. The schedule must be previously defined prior to associating nodes.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

• The name of the policy domain

• The names of the nodes to be added

 To define Node Associations, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select an existing Schedule and then select Open as Properties from the File menu.

 Step 3 	 Select the Add Nodes push button. The Schedules Add Node Associations window displays.

 Step 4 	 Type a node name or wildcard characters in the Node Name(s) field and press the Include push button. The nodes matching the selection criteria displays in the Nodes list.

 Step 5 	 Select the nodes that you want to associate with this schedule in the Nodes list.

 Step 6 	 Select the Add push button to associate the nodes with this schedule.

 Step 7 	 Select the Apply push button on the Properties note page to send the node association data to the server.


Deleting Node Associations - Help

You can disassociate nodes from backup/archive schedules in the Central Scheduler.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

• The name of the policy domain

• The names of the nodes to be deleted

 To delete Node Associations, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select an existing Schedule and then select Open as Properties from the File menu.

 Step 3 	 Select the nodes that you want to disassociate from this schedule from the Associated Nodes list.

 Step 4 	 Select the Delete Nodes push button to disassociate the nodes from this schedule.

 Step 5 	 Select the Apply push button on the Properties note page to send the node association data to the server.


Viewing Node Associations - Help

You can view the nodes that are associated with backup/archive schedules in the Central Scheduler.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

• The name of the policy domain

 To view Node Associations, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select an existing Schedule and then select Open as Properties from the File menu.

 Step 3 	 View the nodes that are associated with this schedule. The nodes are listed in the Associated Nodes list on page 1 of the General section of the notebook.


Printing Node Associations - Help

You can print node associations to a file. To print node associations, you must print the properties view of the backup/archive schedules containing the node associations.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

• The name of the policy domain

 To print Node Associations:

 See Printing Backup/Archive Schedule Properties to print node associations.


Viewing Central Scheduler Information - Help

You can view information about the Central Scheduler.

 To view central scheduler information:

 Step 1 	 Open the Central Scheduler object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. The Properties view of the object displays.

 Step 2 	 View the information about the Central Scheduler in the notebook.


Central Scheduler Properties Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

• Defining Central Scheduler Properties

• Printing Central Scheduler Properties

• Updating Central Scheduler Properties

• Viewing Central Scheduler Information


Administrative Command Scheduler Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

• Copying an Administrative Command Schedule

• Defining an Administrative Command Schedule

• Deleting Administrative Command Events

• Deleting an Administrative Command Schedule

• Printing Administrative Command Events Information

• Printing Administrative Command Schedule Information

• Updating an Administrative Command Schedule

• Viewing an Administrative Command Schedule

• Viewing Administrative Command Events


Backup/Archive Scheduler Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

• Copying a Backup/Archive Schedule

• Defining a Backup/Archive Schedule

• Defining Backup/Archive Node Associations

• Deleting a Backup/Archive Schedule

• Deleting Backup/Archive Events

• Deleting Backup/Archive Node Associations

• Printing Backup/Archive Events Information

• Printing Backup/Archive Node Associations

• Printing Backup/Archive Schedule Information

• Updating a Backup/Archive Schedule

• Viewing a Backup/Archive Schedule

• Viewing Backup/Archive Events

• Viewing Backup/Archive Node Associations


Defining an Administrative Command Schedule - Help

You can define a new Administrative Command Schedule to the Central Scheduler.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the new schedule

• The administrative command to be scheduled

 To define an Administrative Command Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Add from the Edit menu.

 Step 3 	 Enter properties for the new Schedule.

 Step 4 	 Select the Add push button to submit the new Schedule information to the server.

 Considerations

• QUERY ACTlog is not a valid command to schedule.


Updating an Administrative Command Schedule - Help

You can update the properties of an Administrative Command Schedule.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

 To update an Administrative Command Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Schedule that you want to update.

 Step 3 	 Select Open as Properties from the File menu.

 Step 4 	 Select the field you want to update.

 Step 5 	 Enter the new information for the field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Apply push button to submit the new Schedule information to the server.


Viewing an Administrative Command Schedule - Help

You can view the properties of an Administrative Command Schedule.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

 To view an Administrative Command Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 If you want to filter the list of schedules, select Include from the View menu.

 Step 3 	 To see detailed information about a particular schedule, select that schedule and then select Open as Properties from the File menu.


Deleting an Administrative Command Schedule - Help

You can delete Administrative Command Schedules from the Central Scheduler.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The names of the schedules

 To delete an Administrative Command Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the schedule, or schedules you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select Delete from the Edit menu. A delete confirmation window is displayed for you to verify the schedules to be deleted.

 Step 4 	 Deselect schedules you choose not to delete on the confirmation window.

 Step 5 	 Select the Delete push button on the confirmation window to delete the schedules from the server. Select the Cancel push button if you want to cancel the delete action.


Printing Administrative Command Schedule Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Schedules Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Administrative Command Schedules in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all administrative command schedules in a details view

•   Printing selected administrative command schedules in a details view

•   Printing a properties view of administrative command schedules


Printing All Administrative Command Schedules - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Administrative Command Schedules in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Schedules you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print Administrative Command Schedules, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Schedules - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the Schedules information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Schedules information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Administrative Command Schedules - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Administrative Command Schedules in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Schedules:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print selected Administrative Command Schedules, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected Schedules, select the Schedules in the details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Schedules - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected Schedules to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Administrative Command Schedule Properties - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Administrative Command Schedule Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Administrative Command Schedules.

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To copy a properties view of Administrative Command Schedules, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the schedule you want to print.

 Step 3 	 Select Open as Properties under the File menu.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Schedules - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the properties of Schedules to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Viewing Administrative Command Events - Help

You can view details for the Administrative Command Events.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule

• The time range over which you want to check for scheduled executions.

 To view Administrative Command Events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains scheduled events displays.

 Step 2 	 If you want to filter the list of events, select Include from the View menu.

 Step 3 	 To see detailed information about a particular event, select that event and then select Open as Properties from the File menu.


Printing Administrative Command Events Information - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Events Properties view, the Details view, or copy information about selected Administrative Command Events in the Details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Select one of the following to see instructions for printing:

•   Printing all administrative command events in a details view

•   Printing selected administrative command events in a details view

•   Printing an administrative command event properties view


Printing All Administrative Command Events - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all Administrative Command Events in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Events you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print Administrative Command Events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains scheduled events displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Events - Print to File window displays.

 Step 3 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 4 	 Select the Append check box if you want the Events information appended to an existing file.

 Step 5 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the Events information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected Administrative Command Events - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected Administrative Command Events in the Details view.  The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Events:

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To print selected Administrative Command Events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains scheduled events displays.

 Step 2 	 To copy information about a group of selected Events, select the Events in the details view. (Select a single object by clicking on it with the mouse, or select multiple objects by clicking one object with the mouse and then using the Shift key and mouse to select another object and all objects in the list between the selected objects, or by using the Cntl key and mouse to select a group of individual objects.)

 Step 3 	 Select Print to File from the File menu. The Events - Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the selected Events to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Deleting Backup/Archive Events - Help

You can delete backup/archive events.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The date/time range prior to which you would like the events deleted

 To delete backup/archive events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains events displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Delete Past Events from the File menu. The Backup/Archive Events Delete window displays.

 Step 3 	 Use the spin buttons to select the date/time range prior to which you would like the events deleted.

 Step 4 	 Select the Delete push button to delete the specified events, or select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.


Deleting Administrative Command Events - Help

You can delete administrative command events.

 Before you begin, you should have the following information available:

• The date/time range prior to which you would like the events deleted

 To delete administrative command events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains events displays.

 Step 2 	 Select Delete Past Events from the File menu. The Administrative Command Events Delete window displays.

 Step 3 	 Use the spin buttons to select the date/time range prior to which you would like the events deleted.

 Step 4 	 Select the Delete push button to delete the specified events, or select the Cancel push button to cancel the delete action.


Printing Administrative Command Event Properties - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Administrative Command Event Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Administrative Command Events.

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To copy a properties view of Administrative Command Events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains events displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the event you want to print.

 Step 3 	 Select Open as Properties under the File menu.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Events - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the properties of Events to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Backup/Archive Event Properties - Help

You can copy to a file all the information in the Backup/Archive Event Properties view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for Backup/Archive Events.

• The name of the file you want the print information sent to

 To copy a properties view of Backup/Archive Events, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Backup/Archive Events object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains events displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the event you want to print.

 Step 3 	 Select Open as Properties under the File menu.

 Step 4 	 Select the Print to File push button on the properties window. The Events - Print to File window displays.

 Step 5 	 Enter the name of the file to copy the information to in the File Name field.

 Step 6 	 Select the Append check box if you want the information appended to an existing file.

 Step 7 	 Select the Print to File push button on the Print to File window to copy the properties of Events to the specified file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Copying an Administrative Command Schedule - Help

You can copy existing properties of an administrative command schedule to a new schedule.

 Before you begin, you will need:

• The name of the schedule you want to copy

 To copy an Administrative Command Schedule, expand the Central Scheduler object and then follow these steps:

 Step 1 	 Open the Administrative Command Schedules object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains schedules displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the schedule you would like to copy.

 Step 3 	 Select Copy Schedule from the File menu.

 Step 4 	 Enter the target schedule name.

 Step 5 	 Select the Replace push button if the existing target schedule should be replaced.

 Step 6 	 Select the Copy push button to copy the schedule.


File Spaces - Help

The File Spaces object represents all the client node file spaces on the server. Use this object to view or delete client node file spaces.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of the File Spaces object:

•  Details


File Spaces Details - Help

This window displays information about each client node file space on the server. Use this window to select the file space you want to work with. From this window you can delete existing client node file spaces from the server, or copy file space information to a file for printing.

File Space Name

Displays the name of the file space for a node.

Node Name

Displays the name of a client node using the server.

Platform

Displays the platform the node is using.  For example, OS/2, or AIX.

File Space Type

Displays the type of data the file space contains. For example, FAT, HPFS, or NFS.

Capacity (MB)

Displays the space available, in megabytes, in the client's workstation.

%Util

Displays the space used, in percentage, in the client's workstation.

Last Backup Start

Displays the date and time of the last backup of a client node.

Days Since Last Backup Started

Displays the number of days since the last backup of a client node was started.

Last Backup Completion Date/Time

Displays the completion date and time of the last backup of a node.

Days Since Last Backup Completed

Displays the number of days since the last backup of a client node completed.

 Selecting a Data Column heading will sort all the entries in the view by this Column. Select the file space that you want to delete or copy information about to a file for printing. You can choose multiple file spaces from the list.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Help for Objects

• File Spaces

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


File Space - Help

Each File Space object represents a client node file space residing on the server. Select an object to delete, or copy to a file for printing.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 Available Views

 You can open the following views of a file space object:

•  Details


File Spaces Include - Help

Use this window to specify filter criteria for the file spaces you want displayed in the Details view. Each file space is identified by a unique file space name and node name.

 To include filtered file spaces in the view:

1. Type the node name (with or without wildcard characters) in the Node Name field.

2. Type the file space name (with or without wildcard characters) in the File Space Name field.

3. Select the Include or the Apply push button to filter the view.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node Name - Help

 Type the name of the node the file space belongs to in the Node Name field.  The node name is used to filter the list of nodes to be included in the File Spaces view.

 This field must be filled in.

 The Node Name field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  Asterisk (*)

 Example:  BRANDON.MILPITAS.IBM.COM


File Space Name - Help

 Type the name of the file space in the File Space Name field. The file space name is used to filter the list of file spaces to be included in the File Spaces view.

 This field must be filled in.

 The File Space Name field can contain:

• 1 to 1024 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

• Asterisk (*) wildcard character

• Question mark (?) wildcard character

 Default:  Asterisk (*)

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


File Spaces Delete - Help

Use this window to confirm the file spaces you have selected to delete. All the file spaces in the list are in a "selected" state. You can deselect from the list the file spaces you do not want to delete.

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To delete selected file spaces:

1.  Verify that you want to delete all the selected file spaces displayed in the scrollable list box.

2.  Type specific owners in the Owner field to delete file data for individual owners, or leave the Owner field blank to delete all file data with the selected file spaces.

3.  Select the Delete push button to delete all file spaces that are still selected. Select the Cancel push button if you want to cancel the delete action.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


File Spaces - Help

 The File Spaces list is used to view, or deselect the file spaces you have selected to delete.  The file spaces in the list are in a "selected" state. Select one, or more than one, file spaces to deselect them from the list.  File spaces that have been deselected will not be deleted.


Owner - Help

 Type the name of a file space owner in the Owner field. Several users may own data within the same file space. Use this field to specify which owners' files in the file space you want to delete, or leave the Owner field blank to delete all file data contained in the selected file spaces.

 Entering information in this field is optional.

 The Owner field can contain:

• 1 to 64 characters

• Any alphanumeric character, underscore (_), period (.), hyphen (-), plus (+), or, ampersand (&)

 Default:  Blank (file data for all owners is deleted)


All - Help

 Select All to specify that backup, archive, and migrated data is to be deleted.

 Default:  All


Archive - Help

 Select Archive to specify that all archive data is to be deleted.

 Default:  All


Backup - Help

 Select Backup to specify that all backup data is to be deleted.

 Default:  All


File Space Rename - Help

Use this window to change the name of a file space. You can rename file spaces to avoid duplicating file space names after importing file data from another server. Use the naming conventions of the selected client node platform to rename file spaces.

 To rename a file space:

1. Type in the new file space name in the New File Space Name field.

2. Select the Rename push button to change the file space name.

 Related Information

•   Related Tasks

 To access help for a field, control or object in the ADSM administrator's graphical user interface, position the cursor on it and press F1.


Node - Help

 The Node field displays the name of a client node that owns the selected file space.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


File Space - Help

 The File Space field displays the current name of a selected file space.

 This field is a display-only field and you cannot update it.


New File Space Name - Help

 Type the new name for the selected file space in the New File Space Name field. Use the naming conventions of the selected client node platform to rename file spaces.

 This field must be filled in.


Migrated - Help

 Select Migrated to specify that all migrated data is to be deleted.

 When you select Migrated, the Owner field will be ignored during the delete process.

 Default:  All


File Spaces Tasks - Help

Select the task you want to learn about:

•   Deleting File Spaces

•   Printing File Spaces Information

•   Renaming File Spaces

•   Viewing File Spaces Information


Deleting File Spaces - Help

You can delete data from file spaces belonging to a node. Data residing in a node's file spaces must be deleted from the ADSM server before you can remove the node.

 Before you begin, you will need the following information for the file spaces you are deleting:

• The node name

• The file space name

• The owner's name, if different than the node name

 This action may create one or more background processes that will take a variable amount of time to complete. For more information on the completion of this action, select Monitoring Processes here, or in the Server task help.

 To delete file spaces:

 Step 1 	 Open the File Spaces object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains File Spaces displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the file spaces you want to delete.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu, and then select Delete. The File Spaces Delete window displays.

 Step 4 	 Verify the list of file spaces you have selected to delete in the File Spaces list box. Deselect file spaces you want to keep.

 Step 5 	 Select the type of file spaces you want to delete.  You can select Backup, Archive, Migrated, or All.

 Step 6 	 Type specific owners in the Owner field to delete file data for individual owners, or leave the Owner field blank to delete all file data with the selected file spaces.

 Step 7 	 Select the Delete push button to delete the file spaces from the server.

 Considerations

• If you select Migrated in the Delete window, the Owner field will be ignored during the delete process.


Printing File Space Information - Help

You can copy to a file for printing, information for all the file spaces in the Details view, or selected file spaces in the Details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor,

 Select one of the following to see instructions for copying information to a file:

•   Printing all file spaces in a details view

•   Printing selected file spaces in a details view


Printing All File Spaces - Help

You can copy to a file the information for all file spaces in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view.  This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the file spaces you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to.

 To print all the file spaces:

 Step 1 	 Open the File Spaces object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains File Spaces displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the Edit menu item, and then select Select All from the menu list.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu item, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The File Spaces Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the file spaces information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the file spaces information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected by default)

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the file spaces information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Printing Selected File Spaces - Help

You can copy to a file the information for selected file spaces in the Details view. The format of the contents in the file will be the same format as the details view. This file can be sent to a printer or used as input to a spreadsheet or word processor.

 Before you begin, you need the following information for the file spaces you are printing:

• The name of the file you want the information sent to.

 To print selected file spaces:

 Step 1 	 Open the File Spaces object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains File Spaces displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the file spaces you want to copy to a file.

 Step 3 	 Select the File menu item, and then select Print to File from the menu list.  The File Spaces Print to File window displays.

 Step 4 	 Enter the name of the file the file spaces information will be sent to in the File Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Append check box if you want the file spaces information appended to an existing file.  (Append is selected as the default).

 Step 6 	 Select the Print to File push button to copy the file spaces information to a file.

 Considerations

• You can view this file with an ASCII editor.


Viewing File Spaces Information - Help

You can view information about a file space or group of file spaces in the details view.  A properties view is not available for file spaces. To view file spaces information:

 Step 1 	 Open the File Spaces object on the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains File Spaces displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the file spaces you want to view.

 Step 3 	 Select the View menu choice, and then select Details. The File Spaces Details view displays.


Renaming File Spaces - Help

You can rename existing file spaces.

 To rename a file space:

 Step 1 	 Open the File Space object from the ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (Administration) window. A window that contains File Spaces displays.

 Step 2 	 Select the file space you want to rename.

 Step 3 	 Select the Edit menu choice, and then select Rename. The File Space Rename window displays. The name of the selected node appears in the Node field, and the current name of the file space appears in the File Space field.

 Step 4 	 Enter the new name of the file space in the New File Space Name field.

 Step 5 	 Select the Rename push button to change the file space name.

 Considerations

• Use the naming conventions of the selected client node platform to rename file spaces.

• Multiple File Space Rename windows are opened when multiple file spaces are selected.


Select a term for its definition

activate

active policy set

activity log

administrative command event

administrative command schedule

administrator

administrator definitions

archive

archive copy group

association

background process

backup

backup/archive event

backup/archive schedule

backup copy group

caching

capacity

client session

collocation

copy group

copy mode

copy serialization

copy storage pool

database

details view

device class

device configuration

event

export

file space

full backup

group of mirrored volumes

import

icons view

incremental backup

management class

migration

mirrored volume

multiple selection

node

node definitions

notebooks, using

page

policy definition

policy domain

policy set

privilege class

properties view

random access media

randomization

reclamation

recovery log

register

registration

schedule

sequential access media

startup window

storage pool

storage pool volume

utilization

validate

view

volume history

volume set


The process of validating the contents of a policy set and copying the policy set to the ACTIVE policy set.


The policy set within a policy domain that contains the most recently activated policy currently in use by all client nodes that have been assigned to that policy domain.


A log that keeps normal activity messages generated by the server. These messages include information about server and client operations, such as the start time of a session or device I/O errors. Each message includes a message ID, date and time stamp, and a text description.


Administrative command operation that is scheduled to be executed at a particular time.


A database record that describes scheduled administrative command operations.


A user who has been registered to the server. Administrators can be authorized to one or more of the following administrative privilege classes:  system, policy, storage, operator, or analyst.  Administrators can use the administrative client to enter server commands and queries in accordance with their privileges.


Server control information which includes the administrator's name, password, contact information, administrative privilege classes, and whether the administrative ID is locked from the server. Administrator definitions can be exported from a source server so that it can be imported to a target server at a later date.


A function that allows users to copy one or more files to a storage pool for long-term storage.  Archive copies may be accompanied by descriptive information.


A policy object that contains the attributes which control the generation, destination, and expiration of archive files.  An archive copy group belongs to a management class.


The relationship between a node and a schedule. An association identifies the name of a schedule, a name of the policy domain to which the schedule belongs, and the names of nodes that are currently related with the schedule.


A server process that is run in the background, allowing the administrative client to be used for other work.

 Same as Process.


A function that allows users to copy one or more files to a storage pool as insurance against loss of data.


Backup or archive operation that is scheduled to be executed by a node at a particular time.


A database record that describes scheduled backup or archive operations.


A policy object that contains the attributes which control the generation, destination, and expiration of backup files.  A backup copy group belongs to a management class.


The process of leaving a duplicate copy on random access media when the server migrates files to sequential access media. When you use caching it takes additional space.


The amount of logical space that is available to the database or recovery log for storing data.  The capacity is initialized at installation to be equal to assigned space and is adjusted each time the recovery log is extended or reduced.


A period of time in which a user can communicate with a server to perform backup, archive, restore, or retrieval requests.

 Same as Session and Client Node Session.


The process that attempts to keep all data belonging to a single client node on a minimal number of sequential access media volumes within a storage pool. The purpose of collocation is to minimize the number of volumes that must be accessed when a large amount of data must be restored. If you specify Collocation, it will take the server additional time to collocate the data.


A policy object that contains attributes that control the generation, destination, and expiration of backup and archive files.  There are two kinds of copy groups: backup and archive.  Copy groups belong to management classes.


A copy group attribute that specifies whether to backup a file if that file has not been modified since the last time the copy group backed up the file.  The copy mode can be either modified, or absolute.


A copy group attribute that specifies whether a file can be modified during a backup or archive process and what to do if it is.  The copy serialization can be static, dynamic, shared static, or shared dynamic.


A copy storage pool is a sequential storage pool that contains duplicate copies of files that reside in primary storage pools.  You use copy storage pools when restoring and backing up files from primary storage pools.

 Copy storage pools have the following restrictions:

•  A copy storage pool and its associated primary storage pool cannot have the same name.

•  A copy storage pool cannot be used as a copy group destination.

•  A copy storage pool cannot be used as a management class destination for space-managed files.

•  A copy storage pool cannot be used as a next storage pool in a migration hierarchy.

•  A copy pool does not have migration attributes, and no hierarchy exists for the migration of file copies that are stored in copy storage pools.


Records information about all objects managed by the server including policy management objects, users and administrators, and client nodes.


A named group of storage devices that have similar availability, performance and storage characteristics. Each device class has a unique name and represents a device type of disk, optical disk, optical library, stand alone tape device or file.

 You can define device classes for your installation using the DEFINE DEVCLASS command.


Device configuration includes Device Class, Drive, and Library definitions.


Backup/archive or administrative command operation that is scheduled to be executed at a particular time.


To copy information and selected file data to sequential access media. Information and selected file data can be exported from the following objects:

• Administrators

• Nodes

• Policy

• Server


A file space uniquely defines the location of data on the client node and the server.  ADSM uses the file space name in conjunction with the node name for storing and retrieving data.


A full backup copies the entire contents of the ADSM Database. It begins a new Database backup series and consolidates the entire Database in a single backup.  A full backup is required the next time a backup is run when any of the following conditions are true:

• The Database has never been backed up.

• The maximum number of incremental backups allowed between full backups has been reached. The maximum number of incremental backups allowed in each Database backup series is 32. After the maximum number of incremental backups has been reached, you must perform a full backup to begin a new series.

• The log mode was changed from Normal to Roll Forward in the Recovery Log Properties window.

• The database has been extended or reduced.


One, two or three volume copies defined to the database or recovery log. Each volume copy contains the exact same portion of the database or recovery log.


To copy information and selected file data to a target server. Information and selected file data can be imported from the following objects:

• Administrators

• Nodes

• Policy

• Server


An incremental backup copies only those database pages that are new or changed since the last time the database was backed up with a full backup.


A policy object that is a named collection of copy groups.  A management class can contain one backup copy group, one archive copy group, a backup and archive copy group, or zero copy groups. Files can be bound to a management class to specify how the server should manage backup versions or archive copies of workstation files.


The process of moving data from one storage pool to the next storage pool as controlled by the high and low migration thresholds.


A volume that has been assigned to the database or recovery log.


Multiple Selection allows you to select and work with more than one object at a time in a details view.

 To use Multiple Selection, do the following:

•  When using the mouse:

 Press the mouse selection button at a start point and move the pointer to the end point. This will highlight the objects to be worked on.


A file server or workstation on which the backup-archive client program has been installed, which has been registered to the server.


Server control information which includes the client's user ID, password, contact information, policy domain, file compression status, deletion authority, and whether the user ID is locked from the server. A client node definition can be exported from a source server so that it can be imported to a target server at a later date.


ADSM uses windows in notebook format when you select certain options from the menu.  The notebook provides a convenient way to perform several tasks or to see pages of information without leaving the same window.

 After using the notebook, you can complete your task by pressing an applicable control button at the bottom of the window.  You can also exit the window by double-clicking on the system icon.


Each page in the database is a block of 4096 bytes.  When a transaction occurs, the server reads and updates information in the database pages.


Server control information which includes information about policy domains, policy sets, including the ACTIVE policy set, management classes, including the default management class, copy groups, schedules, and associations between client nodes and schedules. A policy definition can be exported from a source server so that it can be imported to a target server at a later date.


A policy object that contains policy sets, management classes, and copy groups that are used by a group of client nodes.


A policy object that contains a group of management class definitions that exist for a policy domain.  At any one time there be many policy sets within a policy domain, but only one policy set can be active.


A level of authority granted to administrators who are registered with an ADSM server.  There are five privilege classes:  system, analyst, operator, policy, and storage. Privilege classes are used to restrict access to different server commands.


Any volume containing a file system that can be accessed in a non-sequential manner by the ADSM server. In ADSM, the type of media residing in storage pools on disk drives.


The percentage of the startup window that the server can use to randomize start times for different nodes associated with a schedule.


The process that consolidates the remaining data from many sequential access media volumes onto a single new sequential access volume. You can specify a Reclamation Threshold percentage which specifies the amount of space on tape volumes that can be occupied by reclaimable space. The remainder of the space is for active data.


A log of updates that are about to be written to the database. The log can be used to recover from system and media failures.


To define a client node or administrator who can access the server.


The process of defining a client node or administrator who can access the server.


A database record that describes scheduled backup/archive or administrative command operations.


Any volume containing a file system that can be accessed in a sequential manner by the ADSM server. In ADSM, the type of media residing in storage pools, such as cartridge tape, tape reels, optical disk, or file.


A time period during which a schedule must be initiated.


A named collection of storage pool volumes that is the destination for backup versions and archive copies. ADSM supports two types of storage pools: one containing fixed random access media and one containing sequential access media.

 The storage pools are classified according to the access strategy used to access the volumes and identified by the device type of the media on which the storage pool resides.

 When using the storage pool backup feature, storage pools are further classified as primary or copy storage pools.  Primary storage pools contain the original file data; copy storage pools store duplicate copies of files that reside in primary storage pools.


A volume that has been assigned to a storage pool, containing either random access media or sequential access media, to store backed up or archived client files.


The percentage of space used by the database or recovery log from their assigned capacity at a specific point of time.


The process of ensuring that the active policy set contains a default management class, and reporting on copy group definition errors.


A view is a way of looking at an object's information in a window.

 In ADSM, there are three ways to view an object:

•  An Icons view displays each object as an icon.

• A Details view shows specific information corresponding to each object in a list format.

• A Properties view is displayed in a notebook or window. It shows the current status and characteristics of a particular object.


Volume History information includes volumes containing a backed up ADSM database, volumes containing exported administrator, node, policy, or server data, and sequential access storage pool volumes that have been reused, added, or deleted.


All volumes defined to an image of the database or recovery log. Can have up to three mirrored images of the database or recovery log, each represented by a volume set.